P. 1
394_UManual

394_UManual

|Views: 14|Likes:
Published by Aflores

More info:

Published by: Aflores on Apr 23, 2012
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

07/14/2012

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • STATIC ELECTRICITY
  • TERMINOLOGY
  • SAFETY NOTES
  • SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING
  • 1 INSTALLATION
  • 1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER
  • 1.2 INSTALLATION
  • 1.2.1 Mechanical installation
  • PANEL MOUNTING
  • PIPE MOUNTING
  • 1.2.2 Electrical installation
  • CONFIGURATION TRANSFER WIRING
  • SUPPLY VOLTAGE (MAINS) WIRING
  • SIGNAL WIRING
  • 1.3 CHANGING THE CHART
  • 1.4 CHANGING THE CARTRIDGE
  • 2 BASIC OPERATION
  • 2.1 POWER UP
  • 2.2 BACKGROUND DISPLAY
  • 2.3 ALARM INDICATION
  • 2.4 KEY/DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
  • 2.4.1 Keys
  • ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
  • PAGE UP/DOWN
  • CURSOR
  • SCROLL UP / DOWN KEYS
  • CANCEL
  • ENTER
  • 2.4.2 Indicators
  • CHANNEL ALARMS
  • GLOBAL ALARM
  • EDIT/HOLD
  • 2.5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
  • 2.5.1 Channel inputs/outputs
  • 2.5.2 Entering configuration
  • 2.5.3 Channel configuration
  • TEMPERATURE UNITS
  • LINEARIZATION TYPE
  • CJC TYPE
  • SCALE PAGE
  • VALUE FORMAT
  • INPUT BREAK RESPONSE
  • OFFSET
  • ALARM TYPE
  • ALARM THRESHOLD (SETPOINT)
  • ALARM JOBS
  • CHECKING THAT THE TRACE IS ON
  • 3 OPERATOR MENUS
  • 3.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 3.2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR MENUS
  • 3.3 CHART SUBMENU
  • 3.3.1 Chart on/off
  • CHART ALIGN
  • 3.3.2 Logs
  • OPERATOR INITIATION
  • JOB INITIATION
  • AUTOMATIC LOGGING
  • 3.3.3 Scale print (Dump Scales)
  • 3.4 ALARM SUMMARY PAGE
  • 3.4.1 Display interpretation
  • 3.5 ALARM SETUP PAGE
  • 3.6 ACTION
  • 3.7 CLOCK
  • Op:Configuration
  • 3.7.1 Back-up battery
  • 3.8 SYSTEM ERROR
  • 3.9 CONFIGURATION
  • 3.10 CALIBRATE CHART
  • 3.11 OPERATOR MENU SUMMARY
  • 4 CONFIGURATION
  • 4.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 4.1.1 Password
  • 4.1.2 Text entry
  • CHARACTER SET
  • 4.1.3 Options
  • 4.1.4 Logs 1 and 2
  • 4.1.5 Jobs
  • 4.2 CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES
  • 4.3 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION
  • 4.3.1 Password
  • 4.3.2 Language
  • 4.3.3 Remote CJ Channel
  • 4.3.4 Remote CJ units
  • 4.3.5 Instrument tag
  • 4.4 CHART CONFIGURATION
  • 4.4.1 Chart speed
  • 4.4.2 User chart speed
  • 4.4.3 Stop After One Revolution
  • 4.4.4 Log intervals A and B
  • 4.4.5 Printing
  • TIME/DATE/CHART SPEED
  • SCALE
  • MESSAGES
  • 4.4.6 Adaptive recording
  • 4.5 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
  • 4.5.1 Range configuration
  • INPUT TYPE
  • INPUT RANGE
  • SHUNT VALUE
  • INPUT UNITS
  • LINEARISATION TYPE
  • SCALED
  • DAMPING
  • BREAK RESPONSE
  • OPEN / CLOSED
  • TEST WAVEFORMS
  • 4.5.2 Alarm configuration
  • SETPOINT CONFIGURATION
  • Deviation alarms
  • Rate-of-change alarms
  • ALARM PARAMETERS
  • 4.5.3 Trace configuration
  • Trace
  • Colour
  • Line thickening
  • Span A / Span B
  • 4.6 GROUP CONFIGURATION
  • 4.6.1 Log groups 1,2
  • 4.6.2 DV Group
  • 4.6.3 Display Group
  • 4.7 OPERATOR ACTION CONFIGURATION
  • 4.8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION
  • 4.8.1 Set Time
  • 4.8.2 Set Date
  • FORMAT
  • 4.9 MESSAGE CONFIGURATION
  • 4.9.1 Embedded sequences
  • ONE PART SEQUENCES
  • TWO PART SEQUENCES
  • 4.10 INTERNAL EVENTS
  • 4.10.1 Event sources
  • 4.11 CONFIGURATION TRANSFER
  • ↵ TO SAVE CONFIG
  • ↵ TO RESTORE CONFIG
  • BAUD RATE
  • 4.12 OPERATOR ACCESS
  • 4.13 ADJUST
  • 4.13.1 Input adjust
  • 4.13.2 Chart adjust
  • 4.14 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
  • 4.15 CONFIGURATION MENU SUMMARY
  • 5 RELAY OUTPUT OPTION
  • 5.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 5.1.1 Configuration
  • JOBS
  • 5.1.2 Relay specification
  • 5.2 RELAY WIRING
  • 5.2.1 Six change-over (also called Form C or SPDT) relays board
  • 6 ANALOG OUTPUT (RETRANSMISSION) OPTION
  • 6.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 6.2 SPECIFICATION
  • 6.3 WIRING
  • 6.4 CONFIGURATION PAGES
  • 6.5 OUTPUT ADJUST
  • 7 MATHS PACK OPTION
  • 7.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 7.1.1 Groups
  • 7.1.2 Jobs
  • 7.1.3 Operator pages
  • 7.2 EQUATIONS
  • 7.2.1 Level 1 equations
  • CONSTANT
  • COPY
  • SUBTRACT
  • MULTIPLY
  • DIVIDE
  • MODULUS
  • DV Group average
  • 7.2.2 Level 2 equations
  • SQUARE ROOT
  • CHANNEL AVERAGE
  • GROUP AVERAGE
  • ROLLING AVERAGE
  • E TO THE POWER
  • NATURAL LOG
  • 10 TO THE POWER
  • LOG BASE 10
  • DV Grp Latch Min
  • DV Grp Cont Min
  • DV Grp Latch Max
  • DV Grp Cont Max
  • RATE OF CHANGE
  • SAMPLE AND HOLD
  • CHANNEL MINIMUM
  • DV GROUP LATCH MIN
  • DV GROUP CONT MIN
  • CHANNEL MAXIMUM
  • DV GROUP LATCH MAX
  • DV GROUP CONT MAX
  • THIRD ORDER POLYNOMIAL
  • RELATIVE HUMIDITY
  • F VALUE
  • MASS FLOW LINEAR
  • MASS FLOW SQUARE ROOT
  • ZIRCONIA PROBES
  • SWITCH
  • HIGH SELECT
  • LOW SELECT
  • STOPWATCH
  • TIME STAMP
  • PERCENTILE
  • Fn:Percentile
  • 7.3 CONFIGURATION
  • MATHS PACK UNIQUE PARAMETERS
  • 8 TOTALISERS, COUNTERS AND TIMERS
  • 8.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 8.2 TOTALISERS
  • 8.2.1 Source types
  • 8.2.2 Alarms
  • 8.2.3 Display
  • 8.2.4 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required)
  • 8.2.5 Operator pages
  • 8.2.6 Totalizer configuration
  • ALARM PAGES
  • 8.3 TOTALIZER COUNTER OUTPUT
  • 8.4 COUNTERS
  • 8.4.1 Introduction
  • 8.4.2 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required)
  • 8.4.3 Display
  • 8.4.3 Operator pages
  • 8.4.4 Configuration
  • 8.5 TIMERS
  • 8.5.1 Introduction
  • 8.5.2 Operator pages
  • 8.5.3 Configuration
  • JOBS PAGES
  • 8.5.4 Timer examples
  • 9 CONTROLLERS OPTION
  • 9.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 9.2 VIEWING ON RECORDER CHANNEL
  • 9.3 WIRING
  • 9.3.1 Output and PV data
  • 9.3.2 User input (T/C, RTD, mA, volts or mV)
  • 9.4 SPECIFICATION
  • 10 CUSTOM LINEARISATION OPTION
  • 10.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 10.2 CONFIGURATION PAGES
  • 11 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION
  • 11.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 11.1.1 Safety isolation specification
  • 11.2 WIRING
  • 11.2.1 Pinout
  • 11.2.2 Termination and Biasing
  • HOST COMPUTER
  • 11.3 CONFIGURATION PAGES
  • 11.4 GOULD MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL
  • 11.4.1 Introduction
  • 11.4.2 Channel addressing
  • 11.4.3 Reading analog inputs
  • 11.4.4 Function codes
  • 11.5 XMODEM TRANSFER
  • 12 MEMORY CARD OPTION
  • 12.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 12.2 MEMORY CARD INSERTION
  • 12.2.1 Card formatting
  • 12.2.2 Changing cards
  • 12.3 CONFIGURATION SAVE AND RESTORE
  • 12.3.1 Save
  • 12.3.2 Restore
  • 12.4 DATA LOGGING (ARCHIVE)
  • 12.4.1 Archive Configuration
  • 12.4.2 Archive interval
  • 12.5 OPERATOR ACCESS
  • 12.6 MEMORY CARD GENERAL FUNCTIONS
  • 12.6.1 Directory
  • 12.6.2 Delete
  • 12.6.3 Card status
  • 12.6.4 Automatic file deletion
  • 12.7 ARCHIVE FILES
  • 12.7.1 Text file names
  • 12.7.2 Hourly file names
  • 12.7.3 Daily file names
  • 12.7.4 Counter file names
  • 12.7.5 File name extensions
  • 12.7.6 Rules for creation of files
  • 12.8 OTHER INFORMATION
  • 12.8.1 Event sources
  • 12.8.2 System errors
  • 12.8.3 Error messages
  • 12.9 MEMORY CARD CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW
  • 13 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY OPTION
  • 13.1 INTRODUCTION
  • 13.1.1 Fuses
  • 13.1.2 Safety isolation specification
  • 13.2 SIGNAL WIRING
  • 14 REFERENCE
  • 14.1 COSHH
  • 14.1.1 Printheads
  • 14.1.2 Batteries
  • 14.2 ERROR MESSAGES
  • 14.2.1 Invalid configuration
  • 14.2.2 Failure to adjust channel (Adj fail on ch NN)
  • 14.2.3 Input adjust not available (I/P Adj n/a on ch NN)
  • 14.2.4 Printer must be off line
  • 14.3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
  • 14.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
  • ANNEX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
  • A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder)
  • A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Input board)
  • INDEX

M

o
d
e
l

3
9
4
M
u
l
t
i
-
p
o
i
n
t

c
i
r
c
u
l
a
r
-
c
h
a
r
t

r
e
c
o
r
d
e
r
User Guide
EUROTHERM
Major Functional items
Consumables
24-hours/rev GDTW0394Uxxx
7-days/rev GDSV0394Uxxx
Charts
xxx = n of divisions from centre to edge = 050, 060, 070, 080, 100, 150
Print cartridge
LA250280
Other items
Attenuator (100:1)........... LA244180
Shunt (100 )...................LA246779UK10
Shunt (250 )...................LA246779UK25
Chart
clamp
Time
reference
Chart retainer
(three places)
A
A
A
PC Configuration tool........... LA246843
Controller handbook *...........HA025036
* One copy supplied with each recorder fitted with controller option.
Controller A
(option)
Controller B
(option)
Print head
Door catch
Configuration
transfer port
Memory
card eject
Platen
release
Operator interface
Declaration of Conformity
Signed:
IA249986U130 Issue 2 Sep 02
Manufacturer's name: Eurotherm Limited
Manufacturer's address Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,
BN13 3PL, United Kingdom.
Product type: Industrial chart recorder
Model: 394 (Status level B2 or higher)
Safety specification: EN61010-1: 1993 / A2:1995
EMC emissions specification: EN50081-2 (Group1; Class A)
EMC immunity specification: EN50082-2
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC
specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply
with the EMC Directive 89 / 336 / EEC amended by 93 / 68 / EEC, and also with the Low
Voltage Directive 73 /23 / EEC
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited
William Davis
(General Manager)
ε
E UROT HE RM
Dated:
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form, by any means, without the prior, written permission of the copyright owner.
Eurotherm Limited reserves the right to alter the specification of its products from time to time without
prior notice. Although every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained in
this manual, it is not warranted or represented by Eurotherm Limited to be a complete or up-to-date de-
scription of the product.
© 2006 Eurotherm Limited
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 1
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
CIRCULAR CHART RECORDER USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section Page
(Continued)
STATIC ELECTRICITY .................................................................. 9
TERMINOLOGY ............................................................... 9
SAFETY NOTES ........................................................................ 10
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING......................... 10
1 INSTALLATION ........................................................... 11
1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER ............................................. 11
1.2 INSTALLATION................................................................... 11
1.2.1 Mechanical installation........................................................... 11
PANEL MOUNTING ......................................................... 11
PIPE MOUNTING............................................................. 11
1.2.2 Electrical installation .............................................................. 11
CONFIGURATION TRANSFER WIRING.............................. 11
SUPPLY VOLTAGE (MAINS) WIRING .................................. 14
SIGNAL WIRING ............................................................. 15
1.3 CHANGING THE CHART.................................................... 16
1.4 CHANGING THE CARTRIDGE ............................................. 17
2 BASIC OPERATION ..................................................... 18
2.1 POWER UP ....................................................................... 18
2.2 BACKGROUND DISPLAY .................................................... 18
2.3 ALARM INDICATION.......................................................... 19
2.4 KEY/DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ................................................. 19
2.4.1 Keys .................................................................................. 19
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE ................................................. 19
PAGE UP/DOWN............................................................ 19
CURSOR ......................................................................... 19
SCROLL UP / DOWN KEYS .............................................. 20
CANCEL ......................................................................... 20
ENTER ............................................................................ 20
2.4.2 Indicators ............................................................................. 20
CHANNEL ALARMS ......................................................... 20
GLOBAL ALARM .............................................................. 20
EDIT/HOLD ..................................................................... 20
2.5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE ............................................... 21
2.5.1 Channel inputs/outputs .......................................................... 21
2.5.2 Entering configuration ............................................................ 21
2.5.3 Channel configuration ............................................................ 22
TEMPERATURE UNITS ....................................................... 23
LINEARIZATION TYPE ....................................................... 23
CJC TYPE ........................................................................ 23
SCALE PAGE ................................................................... 23
VALUE FORMAT ............................................................... 23
INPUT BREAK RESPONSE ................................................. 24
OFFSET ........................................................................... 24
TAG ............................................................................... 24
ALARM TYPE ................................................................... 24
ALARM THRESHOLD (SETPOINT) ....................................... 25
ALARM JOBS ................................................................... 25
CHECKING THAT THE TRACE IS ON ................................. 26
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 2
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
List of contents (Cont.)
Section Page
3 OPERATOR MENUS..................................................... 27
3.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 27
3.2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR MENUS ........................................... 27
3.3 CHART SUBMENU ............................................................. 27
3.3.1 Chart on/off ......................................................................... 28
CHART ALIGN................................................................. 28
3.3.2 Logs .................................................................................. 29
OPERATOR INITIATION .................................................... 29
JOB INITIATION............................................................... 29
AUTOMATIC LOGGING................................................... 29
3.3.3 Scale print (Dump Scales) ........................................................ 29
3.4 ALARM SUMMARY PAGE.................................................... 29
3.4.1 Display interpretation ............................................................. 30
3.5 ALARM SETUP PAGE .......................................................... 30
3.6 ACTION ........................................................................... 30
3.7 CLOCK ............................................................................. 30
3.7.1 Back-up battery ..................................................................... 31
3.8 SYSTEM ERROR .................................................................. 31
3.9 CONFIGURATION .............................................................. 31
3.10 CALIBRATE CHART ........................................................... 32
3.11 OPERATOR MENU SUMMARY ........................................... 33
4 CONFIGURATION....................................................... 35
4.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 35
4.1.1 Password.............................................................................. 35
4.1.2 Text entry .............................................................................. 35
CHARACTER SET ............................................................. 35
4.1.3 Options ................................................................................ 37
4.1.4 Logs 1 and 2 ........................................................................ 37
4.1.5 Jobs .................................................................................. 37
4.2 CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES ........................................ 39
4.3 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION ........................................ 40
4.3.1 Password.............................................................................. 40
4.3.2 Language ............................................................................. 40
4.3.3 Remote CJ Channel ................................................................ 40
4.3.4 Remote CJ units ..................................................................... 40
4.3.5 Instrument tag ....................................................................... 40
4.4 CHART CONFIGURATION.................................................. 41
4.4.1 Chart speed .......................................................................... 41
4.4.2 User chart speed ................................................................... 41
4.4.3 Stop After One Revolution ...................................................... 42
4.4.4 Log intervals A and B ............................................................. 42
4.4.5 Printing ................................................................................ 42
TIME/DATE/CHART SPEED ............................................... 42
SCALE ............................................................................ 42
MESSAGES ..................................................................... 42
4.4.6 Adaptive recording ................................................................ 42
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 3
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
4.5 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION.............................................. 43
4.5.1 Range configuration............................................................... 43
INPUT TYPE ..................................................................... 43
INPUT RANGE................................................................. 43
SHUNT VALUE ................................................................. 43
INPUT UNITS ................................................................... 43
LINEARISATION TYPE ....................................................... 44
CJC TYPE ........................................................................ 45
SCALED .......................................................................... 45
VALUE FORMAT ............................................................... 45
DAMPING ...................................................................... 45
BREAK RESPONSE ........................................................... 45
OPEN / CLOSED ............................................................. 46
TEST WAVEFORMS .......................................................... 46
TAG ............................................................................... 46
4.5.2 Alarm configuration ............................................................... 47
SETPOINT CONFIGURATION ........................................... 47
ALARM PARAMETERS ....................................................... 49
ALARM JOBS ................................................................... 49
4.5.3 Trace configuration ................................................................ 50
TRACE ............................................................................ 50
COLOUR......................................................................... 50
LINE THICKENING........................................................... 50
SPAN A / SPAN B ........................................................... 50
4.6 GROUP CONFIGURATION ................................................. 52
4.6.1 Log groups 1,2 ..................................................................... 52
4.6.2 DV Group............................................................................. 53
4.6.3 Display Group ...................................................................... 53
4.7 OPERATOR ACTION CONFIGURATION............................... 53
4.8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION ................................................. 53
4.8.1 Set Time ............................................................................... 53
4.8.2 Set Date ............................................................................... 53
FORMAT ........................................................................ 54
4.9 MESSAGE CONFIGURATION ............................................. 54
4.9.1 Embedded sequences ............................................................ 54
ONE PART SEQUENCES................................................... 54
TWO PART SEQUENCES .................................................. 54
4.10 INTERNAL EVENTS .......................................................... 55
4.10.1 Event sources ...................................................................... 55
4.11 CONFIGURATION TRANSFER ........................................... 57
↵ TO SAVE CONFIG........................................................ 57
↵ TO RESTORE CONFIG .................................................. 57
BAUD RATE ..................................................................... 57
4.12 OPERATOR ACCESS ......................................................... 58
4.13 ADJUST ........................................................................... 59
4.13.1 Input adjust ......................................................................... 59
4.13.2 Chart adjust ........................................................................ 60
4.14 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION.............................................. 60
4.15 CONFIGURATION MENU SUMMARY ................................. 61
List of contents (Cont.)
Section Page
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 4
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
5 RELAY OUTPUT OPTION.............................................. 63
5.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 63
5.1.1 Configuration ........................................................................ 63
JOBS .............................................................................. 63
5.1.2 Relay specification ................................................................. 63
5.2 RELAY WIRING.................................................................. 64
5.2.1 Six change-over (also called Form C or SPDT) relays board ........ 64
6 ANALOG OUTPUT (RETRANSMISSION) OPTION........... 65
6.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 65
6.2 SPECIFICATION................................................................. 65
6.3 WIRING............................................................................ 66
6.4 CONFIGURATION PAGES .................................................. 66
6.5 OUTPUT ADJUST ................................................................ 68
7 MATHS PACK OPTION ................................................ 69
7.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 69
7.1.1 Groups ................................................................................. 69
7.1.2 Jobs .................................................................................. 69
7.1.3 Operator pages .................................................................... 70
7.2 EQUATIONS ..................................................................... 70
7.2.1 Level 1 equations ................................................................... 70
CONSTANT .................................................................... 70
COPY ............................................................................. 70
ADD ............................................................................... 70
SUBTRACT ...................................................................... 70
MULTIPLY ......................................................................... 70
DIVIDE ............................................................................ 70
MODULUS ...................................................................... 70
7.2.2 Level 2 equations ................................................................... 71
SQUARE ROOT ............................................................... 71
CHANNEL AVERAGE ....................................................... 71
GROUP AVERAGE ........................................................... 71
ROLLING AVERAGE ......................................................... 71
E TO THE POWER............................................................ 71
NATURAL LOG ................................................................ 71
10 TO THE POWER ......................................................... 71
LOG BASE 10 ................................................................. 71
RATE OF CHANGE .......................................................... 72
SAMPLE AND HOLD ........................................................ 72
CHANNEL MINIMUM ...................................................... 72
DV GROUP LATCH MIN.................................................... 72
DV GROUP CONT MIN.................................................... 72
CHANNEL MAXIMUM...................................................... 72
DV GROUP LATCH MAX ................................................... 72
DV GROUP CONT MAX ................................................... 72
THIRD ORDER POLYNOMIAL ............................................. 72
RELATIVE HUMIDITY ......................................................... 73
F VALUE .......................................................................... 73
MASS FLOW LINEAR ....................................................... 74
MASS FLOW SQUARE ROOT ........................................... 76
ZIRCONIA PROBES .......................................................... 77
SWITCH ......................................................................... 78
List of contents (Cont.)
Section Page
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 5
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
HIGH SELECT .................................................................. 78
LOW SELECT ................................................................... 78
STOPWATCH .................................................................. 78
TIME STAMP .................................................................... 79
OXYGEN (O2) CORRECTION........................................... 79
PERCENTILE .................................................................... 80
7.3 CONFIGURATION ............................................................. 81
MATHS PACK UNIQUE PARAMETERS ................................ 81
8 TOTALISERS, COUNTERS AND TIMERS.......................... 85
8.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................ 85
8.2 TOTALISERS ....................................................................... 85
8.2.1 Source types ......................................................................... 85
8.2.2 Alarms ................................................................................. 85
8.2.3 Display................................................................................. 85
8.2.4 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required) ..................... 85
8.2.5 Operator pages .................................................................... 85
8.2.6 Totalizer configuration ............................................................ 86
ALARM PAGES ................................................................ 87
8.3 TOTALIZER COUNTER OUTPUT ........................................... 88
8.4 COUNTERS ........................................................................ 88
8.4.1 Introduction........................................................................... 88
8.4.2 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required) ..................... 88
8.4.3 Display................................................................................. 88
8.4.3 Operator pages .................................................................... 88
8.4.4 Configuration ........................................................................ 89
ALARM PAGES ................................................................ 89
8.5 TIMERS ............................................................................. 90
8.5.1 Introduction........................................................................... 90
8.5.2 Operator pages .................................................................... 90
8.5.3 Configuration ........................................................................ 90
JOBS PAGES ................................................................... 91
8.5.4 Timer examples ..................................................................... 91
9 CONTROLLERS OPTION ............................................... 92
9.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................. 92
9.2 VIEWING ON RECORDER CHANNEL .................................. 92
9.3 WIRING............................................................................. 92
9.3.1 Output and PV data ................................................................ 92
9.3.2 User input (T/C, RTD, mA, volts or mV) .................................... 92
9.4 SPECIFICATION.................................................................. 94
List of contents (Cont.)
Section Page
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (CONT.)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 6
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
10 CUSTOM LINEARISATION OPTION ............................ 95
10.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................. 95
10.2 CONFIGURATION PAGES ................................................ 95
11 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION ......................... 96
11.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................. 96
11.1.1 Safety isolation specification ................................................. 96
11.2 WIRING.......................................................................... 96
11.2.1 Pinout ................................................................................. 96
11.2.2 Termination and Biasing ....................................................... 97
HOST COMPUTER ........................................................... 97
11.3 CONFIGURATION PAGES ................................................ 98
11.4 GOULD MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................ 99
11.4.1 Introduction......................................................................... 99
11.4.2 Channel addressing ............................................................. 99
11.4.3 Reading analog inputs ......................................................... 99
11.4.4 Function codes .................................................................... 100
11.5 XMODEM TRANSFER ....................................................... 102
12 MEMORY CARD OPTION.................................................... 103
12.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................. 103
12.2 MEMORY CARD INSERTION............................................. 103
12.2.1 Card formatting................................................................... 105
12.2.2 Changing cards .................................................................. 105
12.3 CONFIGURATION SAVE AND RESTORE ............................ 106
12.3.1 Save .................................................................................. 106
12.3.2 Restore ............................................................................... 106
12.4 DATA LOGGING (ARCHIVE) ............................................. 107
12.4.1 Archive Configuration ........................................................... 107
JOBS .............................................................................. 108
12.4.2 Archive interval ................................................................... 110
12.5 OPERATOR ACCESS ........................................................ 110
12.6 MEMORY CARD GENERAL FUNCTIONS............................ 111
12.6.1 Directory ............................................................................ 111
12.6.2 Delete ................................................................................ 111
12.6.3 Card status ......................................................................... 112
12.6.4 Automatic file deletion.......................................................... 112
12.7 ARCHIVE FILES ................................................................ 112
12.7.1 Text file names .................................................................... 113
12.7.2 Hourly file names................................................................. 113
12.7.3 Daily file names .................................................................. 113
12.7.4 Counter file names ............................................................... 113
12.7.5 File name extensions ............................................................ 113
12.7.6 Rules for creation of files........................................................ 114
12.8 OTHER INFORMATION .................................................... 114
12.8.1 Event sources ...................................................................... 114
12.8.2 System errors ...................................................................... 114
12.8.3 Error messages .................................................................... 114
12.9 MEMORY CARD CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW....... 115
List of contents (Cont.)
Section Page
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 7
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
13 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY OPTION..................... 116
13.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................. 116
13.1.1 Fuses ................................................................................. 116
13.1.2 Safety isolation specification ................................................. 116
13.2 SIGNAL WIRING ............................................................. 117
14 REFERENCE............................................................... 119
14.1 COSHH .......................................................................... 119
14.1.1 Printheads .......................................................................... 119
14.1.2 Batteries ............................................................................. 120
14.2 ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................... 121
14.2.1 Invalid configuration ............................................................ 121
14.2.2 Failure to adjust channel (Adj fail on ch NN) .......................... 121
14.2.3 Input adjust not available (I/P Adj n/a on ch NN) ................... 121
14.2.4 Printer must be off line ......................................................... 121
14.3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES ................................................ 122
14.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS ..................................................... 123
ANNEX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ............................ 127
A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (RECORDER) ............................. 128
A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (INPUT BOARD) ........................ 129
INDEX ........................................................................... 131
List of contents (Cont.)
Section Page
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 8
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
This page is deliberately left blank
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 9
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
STATIC ELECTRICITY
High voltages (tens of kilo-volts) can be generated on the human skin through a number of mechanisms, such as fric-
tion between different materials (e.g. nylon and skin), and separation of similar materials (e.g. masking tape, nylon
sheet). The gate-oxide region of all metal oxide semiconductors (MOS) is extremely thin, and can be damaged by
voltages as low as 60 Volts. Modern MOS devices have built-in clamp diodes which reduce the incidence of obvious
static damage considerably. It is possible however, even with such clamping diodes, to produce a small rupture in the
oxide layer. This might not destroy the device immediately, but it may result in a gradual reduction in the performance
of the device until, eventually, it fails.
For this reason, the following precautions should be taken when handling any recorder circuit board.
1. Personnel handling MOS devices, or circuit boards containing them, should wear antistatic materials such as
cotton. Nylon clothing should be avoided.
2. All bench tops should be covered with conductive material (10
4
to 10
5
Ohms per square) maintained at the re-
corder chassis potential.
3. Circuit boards removed from a recorder should be placed into a static-safe bag, initially at the recorder chassis
potential, for storage. Before re-fitting the board, the containing bag should again be returned to the recorder
chassis potential.
4. Personnel handling MOS devices, or boards containing them, should wear a wrist strap connected (via a safety
resistor) to the bench top, or if appropriate, to a suitable grounding point on the rack.
5. Leads of MOS devices removed from circuit should be shorted together using conductive foam or similar.
6. MOS devices should not be extracted from or inserted into circuit whilst the circuit board has power applied.
TERMINOLOGY
Antistatic
This term means that the material in question does not of itself generate static electricity. Such materials do not afford
protection against external electric fields.
Static safe
This means that the material in question:
a) does not generate static electricity, and
b) any device enclosed in such material is safe from the effects of external electric fields.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 10
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
!
Refer to the Manual for instructions
Protective Earth
This recorder for ac supply only
This recorder for dc supply only.
Risk of electric shock
This recorder for either ac or dc supply
SAFETY NOTES
1. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth ground terminal shall be connected to a protective
conductor. The supply voltage (mains) wiring must be terminated in such a way that, should it slip in the cable
clamp, the Earth ground wire would be the last wire to become disconnected.
2. In the case of portable equipment, the protective earth ground terminal must remain connected (even if the re-
corder is isolated from the supply voltage), if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous voltages*.
WARNING!
Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus, or disconnection of the protec-
tive earth ground terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions. Intentional
interruption is prohibited.
3. The line voltage fuse within the power supply unit is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is faulty, the
manufacturer's local service center should be contacted for advice.
4. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative and secured against
unintended operation. The nearest manufacturer's service center should be consulted for advice.
5. A switch or circuit breaker shall be included when installing this instrument. It shall be in close proximity to the
instrument and within easy reach of an operator. It shall be marked to indicate that it will disconnect this instru-
ment.
6. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, should be avoided as far as possi-
ble and, if inevitable, shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved.
7. Where conductive pollution (e.g. condensation, carbon dust) is likely, adequate air conditioning/filtering/sealing
etc. must be installed in the recorder enclosure.
8. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. Where this is impractical, shielded
cables should be used for the signal wiring. Where signal wiring is carrying (or could carry, under fault condi-
tions) hazadous voltages *, double insulation should be used.
9. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment
might be impaired.
10. The battery is not individually replaceable. If the battery does not function, consult the manufacturer for service
information.
* A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ Voltages appears under ‘Hazardous Live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly, under normal
operating conditions Hazardous voltage levels are defined as >30V RMS (42.4V peak) or >60V dc.
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING
One or more of the symbols below may appear on the recorder labelling.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 11
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Inner: Terminal transmit
Outer: 0 Volts
Centre: Terminal receive
Jack plug wiring for transfer with host
computer/dumb terminal
Inner
Centre
Outer
Inner
Centre
Outer
Jack - to - jack wiring for transfer between recorders
Recorder 1 Recorder 2
Transmit
Receive
0 Volts
Transmit
Receive
0 Volts
1 INSTALLATION
1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER
The recorder is despatched in a special pack designed to give adequate protection during transit. Should the outer box
show signs of damage, it should be opened immediately and the recorder examined. If there is evidence of damage,
the instrument should not be operated and the local representative contacted for instructions. After the recorder has
been removed from its packing, the packing should be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation
have been removed. Once the recorder has been installed, any internal packing should be removed, and stored with
the external packing against future transport requirements.
1.2 INSTALLATION
1.2.1 Mechanical installation
Mechanical installation details are shown in figure 1.2.1
PANEL MOUNTING
The recorder is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel. With the weight of the recorder sup-
ported, the recorder is secured using the two clamp brackets supplied , either at the top and bottom or at the right and
left sides of the recorder.
PIPE MOUNTING
Mounting brackets to suit a 50mm (2 inch) pipe are also available.
1.2.2 Electrical installation
Details for connecting the line supply and for signal wiring are shown in figure 1.2.2. A user supplied and mounted
switch for the supply voltage must be included with the installation.
CONFIGURATION TRANSFER WIRING
Wiring for the configuration port jack plug is as shown below. See section 4.11 for details of the configuration trans-
fer facility.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 12
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Bolt
Spring washer
Washer
Mounting Technique
345.5mm Wide x
340.5mm High
both mm
+ 2
0
13.60 inches Wide x
13.41 inches High
both in.
+ 0.08
0
Bezel/door outline
Panel cutout
Panel cutout
Lift latch to
operate
148 mm
36 mm 2 mm
3
4
0

m
m
Door opens
100
345 mm
12.5 mm
22.5
mm
Max. panel
thickness
= 25.4 mm
3
6
0

m
m
.
380 mm
Top view
Front view
Note:
Bezel and panel cutout are offset
from one another horizontally
5 30
Panel mounting angles
v
e
r
t
i
c
a
l
Configuration
Port Right side
Figure 1.2.1 Mechanical installation
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 13
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Lift latch to
release door catch
Undo this screw
to release platen.
I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V-
Chan 6 Chan 5 Chan 4 Chan 3 Chan 2 Chan 1
NOCOM NC NOCOM NC NOCOM NC NOCOM NC NOCOM NC NOCOM NC
COM TX TX PU RX RX
E L N
Relay 6 Relay 5 Relay 4 Relay 3 Relay 1
Cable clamp for
mains lead
Connect supply voltage here
(90-264V 50/60Hz)
Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6
Controller A
O/P 1
1A
O/P 2
1B
Controller B
2A2B
Alarm
3A3B
Input
V- V+ VI
O/P 1
1A
O/P 2
1B 2A2B
Alarm
3A3B
Input
V- V+ VI
1
2
3
4
5
6
+
-
+
-
+
-
Chart
motor
Con 9
Con 17
Con 8
Pen
motor
Con 4
Arm
lift
Print
needles
Con 7
Con 12
Memory
card
Con 13
Config.
port
Con 3
Edge
detect
Con5
Internal
comms
'Micro' board
Con 15
I/O and Power
Display
Con10
Option board 3
(Re-transmission connections shown)
Option board 2 (Comms connections shown)
Input board
Con 16
I/O
Board
Relay
2
+V -C +I +V -C +I +V -C +I +V -C +I +V -C +I +V -C +I
Transmitter power supply Nº1
Transmitter power supply Nº2
+
-
+
-
+
-
Option board 1 (Relay connections shown)
1.2.2 ELECRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Figure 1.2.2 Electrical installation - overview
Notes:
1. Access to terminals is by opening the door, then undoing the securing screw to release the platen.
2. Option boards are shown as 1 = relays, 2 = serial communications, 3 = retransmission (analogue output).
In fact any option board can be fitted in any of the three positions. Up to three relay boards can be fitted,
if no other options are fitted.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 14
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Link for 115V ac
Remove for 230V ac
Fuse type
115V = 100mA
230V = 63mA
20 mm
Anti-surge
Link for 230V ac
Remove for 115V ac
Link for 115V ac
Remove for 230V ac
See figure 1.2.2a for board location
E L N
Blue
(White)
Brown
(Black)
Grn/Ylw
(Green)
Leave the Earth lead longer than the others, so it
would be the last to become disconnected should
the cable be pulled out of the connector.
1.2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
SUPPLY VOLTAGE (MAINS) WIRING
Figure 1.2.2b Supply voltage wiring
The supply voltage cable is terminated at the terminal block located near the bottom right-hand corner of the case (see
figure 1.2.2a). Care should be taken to ensure that only the earth ground wire (green or green with a yellow stripe) is
connected to the Earth (right-most) terminal.
The fuse in the main recorder power supply is not user replacable. If fuse may have been blown, consult manu-
facturer for service information.
Caution
Although the recorder is designed to work from any 50 or 60Hz voltage between 90 and 264V, the transmitter
power supply option is not. When sold with a new order, the transmitter power supply will come with the
correct links and fuse for the specified line voltage. When supplied as a retrofit option, or if the supply
voltage to the recorder changes, each transmitter power supply board must have its links and fuse correctly
selected, or the fuse may rupture when power is applied. Figure 1.2.2c gives details of links and fuse types.
Figure 1.2.2c Transmitter Power Supply link/fuse details
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 15
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
DC V (-2V<Vin<10V)
DC mV
Thermocouples
+ –
V+ V- I
DC mA
Shunt
assembly
I
DC V
(– 20 to +100V)
Attenuator
assembly
+ –
3-wire resistance
thermometer
2-wire resistance
thermometer
Potentiometer
V+ V- I V+ V- I
Contact closure
(not channel 1)
Min closure = 250 msec
V+ V-
+ –
Wire sizes:
Power: 0.5 mm
2
(min)
Signal: 2.5 mm
2
(max)
Com NO NC
Coil energisation
controlled by Events
Internal wiring
Relay output (shown in alarm / power off position)
Input wiring
Relay output wiring
V+ V- I
V+ V- I V+ V- I
1.2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)
SIGNAL WIRING
Figure 1.2.2d Input / output wiring
Note: See section 11 for Serial communications and section 6 for analogue output (retransmission) wiring.
For controller wiring details see section 9 and the controller handbook.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 16
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
B
B
A
B
C
Chart
locked
Chart
unlocked
Fig 1.3a Open the recorder door Fig 1.3b Change chart
Op:Display
Op:Chart
↵ for Fast Chart Off
↵ to Align Chart
↵ for Chart On
↵ to Park
1.3 CHANGING THE CHART
Open the recorder door (fig 1.3a) and operate the cancel (x) key to
call the Op: Display page, then use the page
key to call the Op: Chart page.
Operate the 'Enter' key twice to switch the chart drive off.
If there is currently no chart fitted, ignore the rest of this para-
graph. If there is a chart fitted, Lift the paper locking tab at the
center of the chart hub ('A' in figure 1.3b), and remove the old
chart by lifting it out from under the hold-down tabs ('B') and off
the hub.
Place the new chart under the hold-down tabs ('B' in figure 1.3b)
and onto the hub ('A') WITHOUT YET LOWERING THE LOCKING TAB.
Rotate the chart until the current as time printed on the chart is
just clockwise (i.e above) the time reference mark ('C' in the fig-
ure). Lower the locking tab onto the chart.
Use the page key to call the ↵ to align page. Press repeatedly, or hold continuously the enter
key to rotate the chart counter-clockwise until the current time, as printed on the chart, is aligned with the time refer-
ence point.
Carry out the alignment procedure described in section 3.10 before returning the recorder to service.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 17
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
1.4 CHANGING THE CARTRIDGE
Note: Care should be taken to avoid cartridge ink contact with skin or clothing
Before changing the cartridge, switch the chart drive off as described in section 1.3 above. Then use the page key
twice, then the Enter key, to park the printhead.
Lift the printhead arm and pull the print cartridge down and away (figure 1.4). Fit the new cartridge and lower the
arm.
Use the page key repeatedly until the ↵ for Chart On page appears. Operation of the enter key re-
starts tracing.
Note: If the arm is lifted during normal tracing, the pen drive will stop, but the chart will continue to rotate.
Subsequent lowering of the pen will set the pen to its normal rest position, before trending restarts. When the
printhead is lowered, the chart backs up 2-3 degrees and then comes forward to its original position to ensure
chart motor start-up time accuracy.
Figure 1.4 Changing the cartridge
Lift arm
Remove cartridge
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 18
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Alarm 1 on channel 1 and alarm
3 on channel 2 are active. For
details about alarms in general,
see section 4.5.2
2 BASIC OPERATION
This section is designed to help you as a new user to understand the display and key operations. After the display and
key descriptions, an example configuration is given to show you how to set up an input channel to a known set of
parameters, so you can start recording your own traces with the minimum of effort. Only those items which are nec-
essary to get you going are explained; for full information about the Operator and Configuration display see sections
3 and 4 respectively.
2.1 POWER UP
At power up, a power-on message can be printed on the chart giving any of: time, date, and chart speed. Which (if
any) of these is required is set up in Chart Configuration (section 4.4) For example:-
09:15 29/02/96 12 Hour Chart
or
29/02/96 7 Day Chart
See sections 3.7 and 3.8 if a system error is indicated.
2.2 BACKGROUND DISPLAY
After initialization is complete, the display enters what is called a 'background' display, showing the value of a chan-
nel in a format similar to that shown below. If this is the first switch-on, or if the recorder has not been configured,
the channel will be OFF.
Initially, the first channel on display is measuring channel 1. This remains on display for 5 seconds, after which
channel 2 appears. Channels 'scroll' in this manner until all input channels have been displayed, after which, if the
display group has been edited to include them (section 4.6.3) any option channels (derived variables, totalisers and
counters) will be scrolled through in the same manner. When all channels have been scrolled-through, input channel
1 is returned to.
01 1.2345 Units (Measuring channel)
D01 1.2345 Units (Derived (maths) channel)
T1 123456789 Units (Totaliser)
C1 12345678 Units (Counter)
By operating the page up/down keys, the display can be made to show alarm types or the channel identifier (tag)
instead of its current value. When either of these alternative displays are selected, the relevant channel is held (i.e.
the normal scrolling process is stopped).
01 586.03 Deg C
Furnace 1 temp A
Alarms: 11 23
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 19
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
1 2 3 4 5 6
E
Enter
key
Cancel
key
Scroll down
key
Scroll up
key
Cursor
key
Page down
key
Page up
key
Alarm
acknowledge
Global
Channel alarm
Edit/Hold
Channel alarms
Channel alarms
20 Character Display
2.3 ALARM INDICATION
Each of the six input channels has its own LED indicator on the display. A further alarm icon situated to the left of the
display line indicates whenever there is an active alarm. The symbols flash until the alarm is acknowledged or are
steadily illuminated if the alarms are still active but have been acknowledged.
Alarms can be acknowledged at any time by using the Alarm acknowledge key (the left-most key of the eight). Fig-
ure 2.4 shows the operator interface with the locations of the channel alarm indicators and the operating keys.
2.4 KEY/DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
Figure 2.4 Operator interface
2.4.1 Keys
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
This key acknowledges all active, unacknowledged alarms.
PAGE UP/DOWN
The Page up and down keys are used
a. to move round the Operator and Configuration top level menus
b. to move round sub menus (e.g. Operator Chart submenu - section 3.3)
CURSOR
The cursor key can be used in background mode to stop the normal scrolling-through of channels' values i.e. to dis-
play a single channel's value continuously (Channel hold) until the cursor key is operated again. The 'E' LED is illu-
minated while channel hold is in operation.
In operator and configuration pages, the cursor key is used to move from field to field where there is more than one
item whose value can be changed. The cursor position is shown by the selected field's flashing on and off. For exam-
ple, the Log interval page (part of chart configuration) has both hours and minutes fields (shown underlined below)
which are moved between using the cursor.
Log Int 0hrs 0mins
Log Int 0hrs 0mins
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 20
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
2.4.1 KEYS (Cont.)
SCROLL UP / DOWN KEYS
This key is used
a. To scroll through text characters when entering text strings.
b. To enter numeric values.
c. To scroll through all menu items associated with a parameter (e.g. thermocouple types).
CANCEL
This is used
a. To enter the Operator menus from the background display.
b. To cancel all changes made since the last operation of the 'Enter' key (described below).
c. To move you to the next highest menu level.
ENTER
This is used
a. To return to the background display from the Op:Display page.
b. To initiate changes in the Operator menus (section 3)
c. To confirm changes made to configuration.
d. To enter sub menus (i.e. to go to the next lowest menu level).
2.4.2 Indicators
CHANNEL ALARMS
Each input channel has a dedicated LED indicator to show alarm status. The LED comes on (flashing) when any one
of the four alarms are triggered and stays on for a period determined by the type of alarm (section 4.5.2).
For latching alarms, the LED will stay illuminated until the cause (trigger) of the alarm has returned to a non-alarm
state AND the alarm has been acknowledged. If the alarm trigger is still active when the alarm is acknowledged, the
LED will stop flashing and remain steadily illuminated until the trigger goes inactive. If the alarm trigger has already
returned to a non-active state by the time the alarm is acknowledged, then the LED will extinguish immediately on
acknowledgement.
For non-latching alarms, the LED will be illuminated (flashing if unacknowledged) only until the trigger returns to a
non active state.
GLOBAL ALARM
This alarm symbol to the left of the display line becomes active if there is any alarm which is active (on input and
derived channels, totalizers etc.). Again the icon flashes if the alarm is unacknowledged.
EDIT/HOLD
During operation it is possible to hold one channel permanently on display (i.e. you can disable the normal scrolling-
through of all the items in the display group) by operating the cursor (right arrow) key while the required channel is
on display.
During configuration, the 'E' indicator illuminates if a change has been made to the configuration, which has not been
written to the recorder memory by operation of the 'Enter' key.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 21
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
01 OFF
Op: Display
Op:Chart
Op:Alarm Summary
Op:Channel 1 Alarm 1
Op: Action
Op:Clock
Op:System Error
Op:Configuration
Password 00000
2.5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
This section gives you a step-by-step guide to the basic configuration of a single channel (Nº2) to an imaginary set of
input conditions. If you are new to recorders, it is recommended that you first follow this example, and then modify
it to suit your own particular requirements. Section 4.5 gives details for each entry.
Notes
1. Because of the difficulties involved in representing items which flash on and off, the cursor position is
shown in this manual by an underline character.
2. The 'Page up' key is used in this description to scroll through page menus. The page down key can also
be used, but the scroll order is reversed and will therefore not match the description.
2.5.1 Channel inputs/outputs
Before starting to configure any part of the recorder, it is essential that you know exactly what you want it to do with
the input signal you are supplying it with. For our channel, a list of parameters can be written as follows:
Channel number 2
Input range 0 to 1000 degrees C
Input type Type J thermocouple
Input break response Drive high
Trace On
Tag Furnace1 tempA
Alarm Tripped immediately if temperature exceeds 780 degrees C. Remains active until acknowl-
edged. Log channels 1 to 6 on the chart on alarm.
2.5.2 Entering configuration
From the background display, operate the Cancel key
The data display area changes to the first of the operator pages.
Repeated operation of the Page up key scrolls through the top
level operator pages. (The page down key scrolls in the opposite
direction, but is omitted here for the sake of clarity.)
When the configuration page is reached, operate the
'Enter' key
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 22
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Password 00000
Password 00000
Password 00000
Password 00000
Password 00010
Conf: Instrument
Conf:Chart
Conf:Channel 1
Conf:Channel 2
Channel : Range
I/P Type Off
I/P type T/C
I/P Range Lo 0.00
I/P Range Hi 0.00
I/P Range Hi 1000.0
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
2.5.2 Entering Configuration (Cont.)
The password is set to '10' at the factory. The password can be
edited in Instrument Configration.
To enter '10', press the cursor key three times, then the up arrow
and 'enter' keys.
2.5.3 Channel configuration
Operate the Page up key twice, to call the top level channel
configuration page.
Use the up arrow key to change the channel number to '2' and
operate the 'Enter' key.
Use the Enter key again to enter 'Range' configuration.
Operate the up arrow key to change 'Off' to 'T/C' (Thermocou-
ple). Note the other input type choices.
The 'E' LED illuminates to remind you that you have made a
change which has not yet been entered into the data base.
Operate the Page up key to call the Range low page.
The low range is 0 as required, so operate the page key again to
call the Range High page
Enter the value 1000 as follows:
1. Operate the up arrow key until '1' appears in the display.
2. Operate the cursor key, and repeat step 1, but stop when '0'
appears in the display.
3. Repeat step 2.
4. Repeat step 2.
5 Repeat step 2 but stop when the decimal point appears.
Note: If you do not enter the decimal point, the recorder will
interpret the entry as 100000
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 23
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
I/P Units ˚C
Lin Type Type B
Lin Type Type C
Lin Type Type E
Lin Type Type J
CJC Type Off
CJC Type Internal
Unscaled
Val Format XXXXX.
Val Format XXXX.X
Val Format XXX.XX
'E'
2.5.3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
TEMPERATURE UNITS
Operate the page key to call the input units page
Units are ˚C as required. Other units (˚F, K or R could be
scrolled to using the arrow keys)
Operate the Page up key to call the linearisation type page.
LINEARIZATION TYPE
Use the up arrow key to scroll from Type B through to Type J
thermocouple.
Operate the Page up key to call the CJC page.
CJC TYPE
Use the up arrow key to scroll from 'Off' to 'Internal'. This is
the usual CJC type choice.
SCALE PAGE
Use the page key to call the scaling page. As our scale range is
the same as the input range, we can leave it 'Unscaled' and
continue by operating the Page up key.
Scaling is used where an input signal (e.g. 4-20
mA) is used to represent another type of input (e.g.
0-500 gal/min), or where, a potentiometer wiper
voltage may be required to appear as, say, 0 to
100% instead of 0-1 Volts.
VALUE FORMAT
This page allows us to set the position of the decimal point for
display.
Use the up arrow key to move the decimal point to our required
position (two decimal places)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 24
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Damping None
Brk Rsp None
Brk Rsp Drive Hi
Offset 0.00
Tag: Channel 1
Tag: Furnace1 tempA
Tag: Furnace1 tempA
Channel : Range
Channel : Alarm 1
Alarm : Setpoint
Enable Off
Enable Unlatched
Enable Latched
Type Absolute Low
Type Absolute High
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
2.5.3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
INPUT BREAK RESPONSE
Use the Page up key twice to call the Break Response page.
This page allows us to set Drive high, such that if the wiring to
the thermocouple breaks, the pen will move to the outer edge
of the chart and trace at Full Scale, thus making it obvious that
there is a problem.
OFFSET
Used to add a fixed value (in engineering units) to measure-
ments. This is normally set to 0.0.
TAG
This page allows entry of a 14-character text string to describe
the channel. The tag can appear at the display and in logs.
Use of the up and down arrow keys allows us to scroll through
the available character set for whichever of the 14 characters is
currently flashing. The cursor key is used to move you along
the string to the position to be edited. See section 4.1.2 for
characters.
When tag editing is complete, operate the Enter key, followed
by the Cancel key, to re-call the Channel Config page
This completes the Channel Range configuration. We now
need to go to Channel Alarm configuration, then Channel
Trace.
ALARM TYPE
From the Channel :Range page, operate the page key to call
the Channel : Alarm page.
By default, alarm 1 of the four alarms is already selected, and
we will use this for convenience.
Use the Enter key to call the Setpoint page, then again to call
the enable page.
Use the up arrow key to scroll through 'Unlatched' to 'Latched'.
·See section 4.5.2 for a description of different types of alarm.
Use the Page up key to call the alarm type page. By default,
'Absolute Low' appears at the display.
Operate the up arrow key to select 'Absolute High'.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 25
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Type Absolute High
Threshold 0.00
Threshold 780.00
Threshold 780.00
Alarm : Setpoint
Alarm : Job 1
No Action
Chart Online
Chart span B Ch 1
Chart Span B for All
Disable all alarms
Ack all alarms
Send log 1 to chart
On going active
On going active
Alarm : Job 1
Channel : Alarm 1
Channel : Trace
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
'E'
2.5.3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
ALARM THRESHOLD (SETPOINT)
Operate the Page up key to call the Threshold page.
Use the up arrow and cursor keys to set the threshold to 780.00,
using the technique described for input range (section 2.5.3
above).
In this case the decimal point is in the right place and does not
need to be entered.
Operate the Enter key to confirm the setting, then the Cancel
key to return to the Alarm : Setpoint page.
ALARM JOBS
Use the Page up key to call the Alarm Job 1 page, and operate
the Enter key.
Use the up arrow key repeatedly to scroll through the available
jobs, until 'Send log 1 to chart' appears, then operate the page
key.
Initially, log 1 contains input channels 1 to 6. The contents can
be changed in log configuration as described in section 4.6.1.
Page to the actions choice. The 'On going Active' action is as
required, and our alarm configuration is now complete,
Operate the Enter key to enter the changes made so far, then
operate the Cancel key twice to return to the Channel : Alarm 1
page.
Use the Page up key to call the Channel : Trace page
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 26
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Channel : Trace
Trace Off
Trace On
Trace On
Channel : Trace
Conf:Channel 2
Op: Configuration
OP:Display
02 > Range deg C
02 < Range deg C
'E'
2.5.3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
CHECKING THAT THE TRACE IS ON
Use the Enter key to call the trace on/off page
If the trace is off, use either arrow key to scroll to 'On'.
Use the Enter key to confirm the changes, then the Cancel key
repeatedly, until the Operator menus are reached.
Use the page or cancel key repeatedly until the
'Op: display' screen is displayed, then press the Enter key to
return to the background display.
Since your input signals will almost certainly be different from
those described above, the recorder will display its over or
under range display.
To cure this you must re-enter the configuration menus and set
all your channels to suit your particular input signals.
If you want to do more than the very basic configuration given
above, details are to be found in section 4 of this manual, or in
the relevant option sections as appropriate.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 27
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Cancel key
Page up key
Page down key
3 OPERATOR MENUS
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the operator menu structure of the basic recorder. For details of Options such as relays, analog
retransmission, derived variables (math), memory card or serial communications; see the relevant option section.
3.2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR MENUS
As described in section 2, the recorder goes into 'background mode' on power-up, showing the value of a channel or
other process variable, as configured. In order to enter the operator menus, the 'Cancel' (X) key is used. This brings
the following to the display:
Op:Display
This allows a return to the background display using the enter key or entry to other Operator pages, using the 'Page'
keys. The other Top level operator pages (excluding options) are:
Op:Chart
Op:Alarm Summary
Op:Alarm setup
OP:Action
Op:Clock
Op:System error
Op:Configuration
OP:Calibrate chart
3.3 CHART SUBMENU
This allows the operator to carry out the following functions, unless his access is restricted as described in Section
4.13
1. Switch the chart drive on and off
2. Park the printhead for the replacement of chart or print head
3. Align the chart time.
4. Display current chart speed
5. To initiate logging to chart.
6. To print scales on the chart immediately instead of waiting for their normal cycle time to come round.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 28
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Op:Chart
Please wait
for Chart On
to Park
to Align Chart
Speed is HHH hour
to Send Log 1
to Dump Scales
Please wait
Chart advances 0.2mm per
operation or at 1 rev/hr if held
continuously.
for Chart Off
for Fast Chart Off
Printhead parks
Speed is HHH hour
to Send Log 2
3.3 CHART SUBMENU (Cont.)
Figure 3.3 Chart Operator Menus
3.3.1 Chart on/off
If access is allowed (section 4.13), the operator can switch the chart drive on and off as required. When the chart is
off, the printhead can be 'Parked' for replacement. 'Chart fast off' allows the recorder to complete the current line of
printing (if any) before switching chart drive off. 'Chart off' causes the recorder to print any queued messages before
switching off.
CHART ALIGN
This function is used to align the pre-printed time marks on the chart with the time reference point of the recorder (see
section 1.3). Single operations of the enter key cause the chart to move approx 0.2 mm at its edge. Continuous opera-
tion of the key causes the chart to move continuously at 1 rev/hr until the key is released. Chart drive must be off.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 29
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
For more details of alarm types
and actions see section 4.5.2
For a description of the alarm
display; see next page.
Where N = 1 or 2 - see figure 3.3
1 1 2 3 3
Op:Alarm Summary
1 3 2 1 4
43
3.3.2 Logs
When delivered form the factory, Log groups 1 and 2 contain all the recorder's input channels. During 'Group con-
figuration' (section 4.6) these items can be deleted individually, and if the relevant options are present, derived vari-
ables, totalisers and counters can be added. The log format can be set up to include tags or not as required.
OPERATOR INITIATION
The contents of either group can be printed on the chart at any time by the operator from the display page:
↵ to Send Log N
JOB INITIATION
The contents of Log 1 group and/or Log 2 group can be sent to chart and/or memory card (if present) using 'jobs' as
described in section 4.1.5.
AUTOMATIC LOGGING
Two log intervals (A and B) can be configured in 'Chart configuration' and if this is done, log group 1 will be printed
on the chart automatically at log interval A or B, interval B being selected by job action. Setting interval A (B) to 0hr,
0 min, disables the automatic printing of the log at interval A (B).
Two archive intervals (A and B) can be configured in 'Memory card configuration' if the relevant option is present. If
this is done, log group 2 will be sent to memory card automatically at archive interval A or B, interval B being se-
lected by job action. Setting interval A (B) to 0hr, 0 min, disables the automatic archiving of the log at interval A
(B). Logs are printed in black with values in alarm shown in red.
3.3.3 Scale print (Dump Scales)
Operating the 'Enter' key from this page causes the recorder to print all channels' scales on the chart as quickly as it
can.
↵ to Dump Scales
3.4 ALARM SUMMARY PAGE
Figure 3.4 Alarm summary page
This Operator page allows the status of all current alarms to be viewed.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 30
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
3.4.1 Display interpretation
The alarms appear in channel order, and are flashing if not acknowledged. Each alarm is presented as a channel
number (full size), followed by a subscript alarm number (1 to 4) .
3.5 ALARM SETUP PAGE
This page allows the operator to view the alarm type, threshold settings etc.
If access is allowed (Section 4.13) the operator may adjust the threshold settings.
Figure 3.5 Alarm setup page
3.6 ACTION
This page allows the 'Enter' key to be used as an event trigger (Section 4.10). The label which appears, and the defin-
ing of the action to be carried out as latching or not latching is set up in the Operator Action part of configuration
(Section 4.7).
As despatched from the factory, the label is 'Ack All', it is non-latching and its jobs list is to acknowledge all alarms
3.7 CLOCK
This page allows the user to view the current system time and date.
Figure 3.7 Operator clock display page
Date format (DD/MM/YY or
MM/DD/YY) set up in Clock
configuration (Section 4.8.2)
Op:Channel 1 Alarm1
Dev in Ref 10.00
Dev 1.000
View alarm type:
Abs high/low, ROC rise/fall or Deviation in/out.
Edit setpoint if necessary using arrow up/down
keys.
Deviation value for Deviation alarms
Period for Rate-of-Change alarms
Use up/down arrows and cursor to select
channel number and alarm number.
Op:Clock
13:52:25 29/02/96
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 31
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
The password set to 00010 by manu-
facturer, but it can be edited in In-
strument Configuration.
If set to 00000, Configuration pages
are entered directly without having to
enter a password.
Op:Configuration
Password 00000
Conf:Instrument
To further config
pages
3.7.1 Back-up battery
The system date and time are maintained under power-off conditions, by a re-chargeable Nickel-metal hydride battery.
When fully charged, the battery will maintain the time and date for approximately one month.
As despatched from the factory, the battery is discharged. A fully charged battery will provide backup protection for
a minimum of one month at a maximum temperature of 40˚C. A discharged battery, charged for one hour, will pro-
vide a minimum of 48 hours of backup protection at a maximum of 40˚C.
Note: The battery on the main circuit board is not a user replaceable item. If the battery does not function,
consult factory for service information.
3.8 SYSTEM ERROR
This page allows the user to view any system errors which have occurred. If the relevant options are fitted, the fol-
lowing errors can be reported. If more than one is active, the Page key is used to scroll through the list:
Bad Remote CJ Temp
Writing system fail
Disk overdrive (archiving buffer full with no disk present or no more disk space available).
Battery Failure
Clock failure
EEPROM DB Cleared
Battery-backed RAM cleared
Memory Card Battery Low
Memory Card Battery Flat
DV Run Time Error
3.9 CONFIGURATION
Operation of the Enter key from this page followed by a password, allows the user access to the configuration pages
described in Section 4.
Figure 3.9 Entry to configuration
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 32
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Op:Calibrate Chart
Paper zero. Use /
Paper span. Use /
8
A
. M
.
0
8
7
A
. M
.
0
7
-
2
6
0
4
0
2
0
0
-
2
0
1
0

A
.
M
.
1
0
9

A
.
M
.
0
9
8
0
1
0
0
6 A
. M
.
0 6
5 A . M .
0 5
1 0 0
8 0
6 0
4 0
2 0
0
2 0
Use up/down keys to adjust trace position
(Effects shown much exaggerated for clarity)
Adjust zero first.
Up arrow moves trace right;
Down arrow moves trace left
3.10 CALIBRATE CHART
This page allows the printhead zero and span positions to be set to chart zero and span. On initiation, the printhead
traces lines on the chart where it thinks zero and span are. If incorrect, the positions can be adjusted using the up
arrow key to move the trace slightly to the right, or the down arrow to move it to the left.
Note: Zero (center of chart) setting should always be carried out before the span (outer edge of chart) setting.
The chart must be turned OFF to access this function.
Figure 3.10a Chart calibration pages
Figure 3.10b Zero and Span adjustments (simulated chart sample)
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 33
For security purposes, it is possible for the recorder to be configured
(Section 4.13) such that operator access to the items listed below is
disabled (i.e. they cannot be changed from the Operator menus).
Y/N indicates whether the item appears (Y) or (N) in the menus as
despatched from the factory. This list does not include options.
Chart Switch on / off line..................... Y
Alarm Adjust setpoints (thresholds).... N
Log Initiate....................................... Y
OPERATOR PERMISSIONS
Use 'Cancel' key to ignore changes, to return to a higher
level, or to enter operator menus from PV display.
Use 'Page' keys to move from page to page.
Use 'Enter' key to enter 'Page', to confirm changes
or to return to PV display.
Use Up and Down arrows to scroll through
underlined items in page.
Op:Display
Use 'Enter' key to
return to PV
display
1 568.37 Deg C
Use 'Cancel' key to
enter Operator
menus
Background Process Variable (PV) display
View alarm types
View alarm status
Op:Alarm summary
Op:Channel C Alarm A
C = 1 to 4 or 6; A = 1 to 4
View alarm types
View alarm thresholds
Change threshold if permitted.
View time and date
Op:Clock
Op:Calibrate chart
Use enter key as event trigger
Op:Action
Enter configuration menu structure if password known.
(Password is 10 when despatched but can be edited in
'Instrument' configuration)
Op:Configuration
Set printhead to chart
Basic menu only. (I.E. Options not shown)
Op:Chart
Turn chart drive on/off if permitted
Park printhead
Align chart time
Display current speed
Initiate log if permitted
Print scales
3.11 OPERATOR MENU SUMMARY
Figure 3.11 Top level Operator Menu structure
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 34
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
This page is deliberately left blank
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 35
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
4 CONFIGURATION
Note: In order to help new users, a brief configuration guide appears as section 2 of this manual. This guide
gives step-by-step instructions to show an example configuration of a single input channel.
Note: A configuration tool, to run on a PC, is available from the manufacturer to speed configuration and
text entry.
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The configuration of the basic recorder is divided into the following categories. Options are described in later sec-
tions.
1 Instrument 6 Clock
2 Chart 7 Messages
3 Channel 8 Alarm Messages
4 Group 9 Events
5 Operator action 10 Configuration Transfer
In addition to the above, Diagnostics and Operator Access are included in the configuration menus.
The above categories are listed in the order in which they appear when the page key is being used, but it is not nec-
essary to carry out the configuration in that order. In order to help you find your way around the table 4.1 overleaf
relates 'what you can do' with 'where you do it' and where in the manual you can find details of it for basic recorder
functions (i.e. options are not included).
4.1.1 Password
In order to prevent unauthorised access to the recorder's configuration, a
password protection system operates. When despatched from the factory,
this password is set to 00010, but this can be modified as a part of the
Instrument configuration described in section 4.3
4.1.2 Text entry
A number of items (messages, tags, units strings etc.) require text to be entered or modified. Text entry is achieved by
using the 'Cursor' key to move the underline to the character to be edited, and then using the up and down arrow keys
to scroll through the character set until the required letter, number or symbol appears. This process is repeated for all
the characters in the text string.
CHARACTER SET
The characters available are:
A to Z, a to z, Ä ä à ç ê è é Ö ö ô Ü ü ù β Σ µ Ω δ
2

3
! ❝ ❜ [ \ ] ^ ❛ { | } ~ Ç â å ë ï î ì Å É æ Æ ò û ÿ ¢ ¥
á í ó ú ñ Ñ a o ¿ ¡ « » α Γ π σ τ φ θ ∞ ∈ ∩ ≡ # $ % & ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > _ £ ˚ 0 to 9 (Space)
Setting the password to a 00000 sub-
sequently allows direct access from
the operator menu without further
need for a password.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 36
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Adaptive recording Chart Section 4.4.5
Adjust input Adjust Section 4.14
Alarm Jobs Channel: Alarm: Jobs Section 4.5.2
Alarm Parameters Channel : Alarm : Setpoint Section 4.5.2
Break response Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
CJC (remote) channel Instrument Sections 4.3.3, 4.3.4
CJC type selection Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Channel colour Channel : Trace Section 4.5.3
Channel parameters Channel: Range Section 4.5.1
Channel scroll list Group Section 4.6
Channel span Channel : Trace Section 4.5.3
Channel trace on/off Channel : Trace Section 4.5.3
Channels displayed Group Section 4.6
Chart speed Chart Sections 4.4.1
Clock setting Clock Section 4.8
Configuration read/write Transfer Section 4.11
Damping Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Date setting/format Clock Section 4.8
Date embedding in messages Message Section 4.9.1
Decimal point position Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Diagnostics Diagnostics Section 4.12
Displayed channels Group Section 4.6
Dwell period Channel : Alarm: Setpoint Section 4.5.2
Event sources / jobs Events Section 4.10
External CJ temp Channel: Range Section 4.5.1
Hysteresis Channel : Alarm: Setpoint Section 4.5.2
Input adjust Adjust Section 4.14
Input range Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Input scaling Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Input type Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Instrument tag Instrument Section 4.3.5
Language Instrument Section 4.3.2
Line thickening Channel : Trace Section 4.5.3
Linearisation type Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Log contents Group Section 4.6
Log interval Chart Section 4.4.3
Messages Messages Sections 4.4.4, 4.9
Operator action key Operator action Sections 3.6, 4.7, 4.10
Operator permissions Access Sections 4.12
Password Instrument Sections 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.3.1
Pen zero/span setting Calibrate chart Section 3.10
Printing on the chart Chart Section 4.4.4
Process value in messages Message Section 4.9.1
Reference (deviation alarms) Channel : Alarm : Setpoint Section 4.5.2
Remote CJ Instrument Sections 4.3.3, 4.3.4
Restore configuration Transfer Sections 1.2.2, 4.11
Save configuration Transfer Sections 1.2.2, 4.11
Shunt Value Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Tag Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Text entry/embedding Various Sections 4.1.2, 4.9.1
Time embedding in messages Message Section 4.9.1
Time set Clock Section 4.8
Value format Channel : Range Section 4.5.1
Parameter etc. to be edited Configuration page name Where to look
4.1 INTRODUCTION (Cont.)
Table 4.1 Configuration parameter locator
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 37
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
4.1.3 Options
Option descriptions appear in later sections of this manual.
4.1.4 Logs 1 and 2
Logs are alphanumeric reports showing the current values of a number of process variables. Logs can either be
printed on the chart, or if the appropriate (archiving) memory card option is fitted, they can be sent to memory card–.
As despatched from the factory, the two log groups contain input channels 1 to 6. To include option PVs such as to-
talisers, derived channels etc., the user can edit the log groups as described in Group configuration (section 4.6.1).
Group configuration also allows the group format to be defined, i.e. whether Process variable (PV) tags and instru-
ment tag are to be included.
Logs can be initiated in the following ways:
a. Automatically at fixed time periods (section 3.3.3)
b. From the Operator menu (section 3.3.3)
c. By job action - (section 4.1.5)
Note: When logging automatically:
Log 1 prints contents on the chart at one of two logging intervals (A or B) set up in Chart configuration
(section 4.4.3). Normally, interval A is used; interval B is selected by job action (section 4.1.5).
If a memory card archive option is fitted, Log 2 saves its group contents to the memory card at one of two
archive intervals (A or B) set up in the Memory Card configuration (described in section 12). Normally,
archive interval A is used; interval B is selected by job action (section 4.1.5).
4.1.5 Jobs
Jobs cause the operation of the recorder to change as the result of an initiating trigger which can be an alarm going
active, an event input, a totaliser reaching a previously specified value and so on. A list of job actions and 'modifiers'
is given in figure 4.1.5 following.
A modifier defines when the relevant action is to occur (e.g. While active, While inactive).
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 38
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.1.5 JOBS (Cont.)
Figure 4.1.5 Jobs and modifiers
On Acknowledge
On Going Active
On Going Inactive
N = Channel number (use up/down arrow keys)
Disable all alarms
Ack All Alarms
Chart online
Chart Span B Ch N
Chart Span B for All
No Action
While Inactive
While UnAck'ed
Log 1 to chart
Log 2 to chart
Display Message N
Print Message N
Dump Scale
Log Message N
Log 1 to archive 1
Log 2 to archive 2
Log interval B
Archive interval B
While Active
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 39
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Use arrow keys to scroll
through parameter
choices
Use page keys to move
from parameter to
parameter
Type Absolute High
Type Deviation in
Type Deviation out
Type Rate of Ch Rise
Type Rate of Ch Fall
Enable Latched
Enable Trigger
Alarm : Job 1
Threshold 10.00
Hysteresis 0.00
Dwell 0s
Returns to whichever 'enable' is currently selected.
Conf : Channel 1
Channel : Range
Channel : Alarm 1
Channel : Trace
Enable off
Alarm : Setpoint
Type Absolute Low
Enable Unlatched
Reference 10.00
Deviation 1.00
Change 1.00
Per second
Average 1s
Only Page up and Scroll up keys shown;
Page down and Scroll down keys
reverse the order in which the menu
items appear.
Characters shown underlined flash on and off when available for edit.
If the Edit indicator is lighted, the
Cancel key cancels all changes
made since the last 'Enter'.
If the Edit indicator is not
lighted, the Cancel key returns to
the Alarm:Setpoint page from
anywhere in these sub-menus.
4.2 CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES
Configuration menus are treated in the same way as operator menus, with the page and enter keys being used to select
a parameter, and the arrow keys being used to edit it. To return to a higher menu level the cancel (x) key is used.
Figure 4.2 below shows the alarm setpoint sub-menus in an attempt to illustrate these techniques.
Figure 4.2 Configuration techniques
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 40
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Remote CJ units C
Remote CJ Channel: 1
Conf:Instrument
Scrolls through Enabled, Disabled
Use Arrow keys to enter channel number
Scrolls through C, F, K, R
Use Cursor and arrow keys to enter
instrument tag (appears in logs if
configured to do so - section 4.6.1)
Set Password: 00010
Language: English
Remote CJ Disabled
Tag:Instrument
Scrolls through English, French, German
Use Cursor and arrow keys to enter new
password.
4.3 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION
Instrument configuration allows:
1. The setting of a new password
2. The setting of a different language for subsequent displays and chart printing
3. Configuration of remote cold junction input
Figure 4.3 Instrument Configuration pages
4.3.1 Password
The password can be any five-character (max.) string, entered using the cursor and arrow keys as described in section
4.1.2. You can set the password to 00000 to disable password protection, thus allowing access to the configuration
menus without further need of a password.
4.3.2 Language
English, French or German can be selected as the language for subsequent operations.
4.3.3 Remote CJ Channel
When 'Enabled', any input channel can be selected for use as a remote cold junction measuring channel. In such a
case, the selected input type, range, linearisation etc. must be set up in the channel configuration (section 4.5) for the
selected channel. The temperature units set up in the channel's configuration must match those set up in 'Remote CJ
Units' described immediately below.
Once a remote CJ channel has been configured, any other input channel can use it as a 'Remote' CJ input, if so con-
figured.
4.3.4 Remote CJ units
Scrollable through ˚C, ˚F, Kelvins or Rankine, the remote CJ units must match the units configured for the Remote CJ
channel.
4.3.5 Instrument tag
A 16-character max. descriptive tag can be entered. See section 4.1.2 for text entry techniques.
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 41
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
4.4 CHART CONFIGURATION
Chart configuration allows the following to be set up:
1. Chart speed.
2. Log interval for logging Log 1 Process Variables automatically on the chart.
3. Time/date/scale/chart speed etc. data.
4. Adaptive recording on/off.
Figure 4.4 Chart configuration pages
4.4.1 Chart speed
Standard chart speeds of 1 revolution per: 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 7-days or 'User' can be selected. If
'User' is selected, the recorder will use the speed entered on the following page.
4.4.2 User chart speed
A number of hours per revolution, from 1 to 960, can be entered here. This speed is used if 'User' is selected in the
Chart speed page described above. All annotation stops (tracing continues) at chart speeds faster than 6 hr/rev.
Log Int A 0hr 0min
Conf:Chart
Speed: 24 hr
User Speed: 24 hour
Stop after 1 rev: no
Scroll through no, yes
Print time: Yes
Print date: Yes
Print speed: Yes
Print scales: Yes
Scrolls through 48 hour, 72 hour, 7 day,
User, 12 hour, 24 hour.
Scroll through
yes/no
Use arrow keys to enter
hours and minutes
Use up/down arrows and cursor to enter
chart speed between 1 and 960 hours/rev.
Scroll through no, yes
Scroll through no, yes
Adaptive Record Off
Scroll through on, off
Log Int A 0hr 0min
Log Int B 0hr 0min Log Int B 0hr 0min
Scroll through no, yes
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 42
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.4.3 Stop After One Revolution
When selected, this feature causes the chart to complete one turn from the point at which it was last placed online and
then stop. The tracing will stop, the "Chart online" event source will become inactive and any demand annotation will
print at maximum speed.
4.4.4 Log intervals A and B
Two log intervals can be entered here for the automatic periodic printing of log group 1 on the chart. The cursor key
is used to move from 'hr' to 'min' fields, and the up/down arrow keys to enter the required value. An entry of 0 hours,
0 minutes stops automatic logging to chart at that interval (i.e. A or B). For log content and format, see Group con-
figuration - section 4.6
Log interval A is used under normal conditions. Interval B can be selected only through job action (section 4.1.5)
4.4.5 Printing
TIME/DATE/CHART SPEED
If individually selected 'yes', time, date, and chart speed can be printed on the chart at chart on-line.
SCALE
If selected 'Yes' low and high end scale values will be printed at regular intervals on the chart.
MESSAGES
Twenty user messages of 20 characters each can also be printed as a result of job action.
4.4.6 Adaptive recording
At slow chart speeds, it is possible that a spike or other brief disturbance in the measured signal will be picked up by
the input circuit between chart increments, and they will thus not appear on the chart (even though they might trigger
an alarm). With adaptive recording enabled; if a sudden change in the input signal is detected, the recorder will put
an extra dot on the chart without the chart being moved. This means that even at the slowest chart speeds, fast sig-
nals can still be traced on the chart.
When adaptive recording is enabled, it applies to all channels.
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 43
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 3
4.5 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Channel configuration is in three parts: Range, Alarms and Trace.
4.5.1 Range configuration
This sub section allows the setting up of the following:
1. Input type, range and units
2. Linearisation type
3. Scaling
4. Value format (decimal point position)
5. Input damping
6. Input break response
7. Channel tag (identifier or descriptor)
8. CJ type for thermocouple inputs
9. Shunt value for mA inputs
10. Open/Closed text strings for digital inputs
Figure 4.5.1 shows the configuration menu for Input Type = volts (from a 4-20 mA input using a 250Ω shunt. Other
input types are similar, and any parameters unique to a particular input type are indicated in the accompanying de-
scriptions.
INPUT TYPE
Allows an input type of Thermocouple (T/C), mV, V, mA, Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD), Ohms, Digital
input, Comms (if communications fitted), Cont 1/2 (if controller(s) fitted) or 'Test' to be selected. The appearance of
some subsequent display pages is dependent on this selection.
NOTE: To ensure best accuracy, ALWAYS use mA input type with current input through a shunt resistor.
INPUT RANGE
The low and high settings should match the lowest and highest values which the recorder will have applied to its in-
puts. This allows the recorder to select the best (i.e. most accurate) electronic range for your input. The up arrow
and cursor keys are used to enter the value (including the decimal point).
These pages do not appear for Digital or Comms (if fitted) inputs, or if the selected Input Type is 'Test'.
SHUNT VALUE
For mA input type only, allows a shunt value to be entered (normally 100 or 250Ω). The entered value must match
that of the fitted shunt. Best accuracy can be achieved by using a current loop shunt of 50Ω or less (1.0 Volts at 20
mA). See specification section (Annex A) for accuracy information.
INPUT UNITS
This page appears only for thermocouple and RTD inputs and allows ˚C, ˚F, K(elvins) or R(ankine) to be selected.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 44
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5.1 RANGE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
LINEARISATION TYPE
The linearisation types (if any) which appear on the scroll list depend on the Input Type selected. The complete list is:
Linear, square root, x
3/2
, x
5/2
,
Thermocouple types B, C, D, E, G2, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, Ni/NiMo, MoRe, Platinel,
RTD types Pt
100
, Pt
1000
, Ni
100
,

JPt
100
, Pt
100
A,

Cu
10
Figure 4.5.1 Channel configuration pages for thermocouple inputs
Offset 0.00
Conf:Channel 1
I/P Units C
I/P Range Lo 0.00
I/P Range Hi 0.00
CJ Type Off
I/P type Off I/P type T/C
Lin Type Type B
Unscaled
Val Format XXXXX.
Damping None
Scale high 10.00
Scale Units : V
Scale low

0.00
Brk Rsp None
Scrolls through T/C, mV, V, mA, RTD,
Ohms, Dig, Comms (if fitted),
Cont1 (if fitted), Cont2 (if fitted), Test.
Enter low and high input
range values.
Scrolls through
C, F, K, R
Scrolls through Types B, C, D, E, G2, J, K,
L, N, R, S, T, U, NiNi/mo, MoRe, Platinel.
Scrolls through
Off, Internal, External, Remote.
Scrolls through decimal
point positions for
displayed value.
Scrolls through
2, 4, 8....128, 256 seconds.
Use arrow
and cursor
keys to enter
values and
units text
Scrolls through
None, Drive hi(gh),
Drive lo(w).
Use arrow and cursor keys
to enter offset
Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Channel : Trace
Tag Channel 1
Use arrow keys and cursor key
to enter channel name
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 45
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Effect of damping on step change
in input signal
Input
97%
3 x
Damping
Recorder
response
4.5.1 RANGE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
CJC TYPE
For thermocouple inputs only, allows Off, Internal, External or Remote to be selected as cold junction type.
Internal uses the recorder's internal temperature sensor to apply cold junction compensation.
External is used where the cold junction of one or more thermocouples is maintained at a known temperature. When
'External' is chosen as CJC type, operation of the Page key calls a further page where the known temperature is to be
entered.
Remote uses a temperature sensor connected to a separate input channel to measure the cold junction temperature of
one or more remote thermocouples. This allows copper cable to be used from the remote location to the recorder,
instead of high cost compensation cable. The input channel for the CJ temperature measurement is defined in 'Instru-
ment' configuration (Section 4.3.4).
SCALED
This allows the input to be scaled (e.g. 4 to 20 mA input = 0 to 100%). The scaling low and high values are entered
using the cursor and up arrow keys as for input values. The Scale units are entered using the text entry technique
described in section 4.1.2, above.
VALUE FORMAT
Allows the decimal point position to be chosen for the process value. The up/down arrow keys are used to move the
decimal point from XXXXX. to X.XXXX (when set to X.XXXX, the decimal point will "float" to the right as the
number increases).
DAMPING
For 'noisy' slowly changing signals, damping can be used to filter noise so
that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly. The arrow keys allow
selection of 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256 seconds.
It is not recommended that damping be used on quickly changing signals.
BREAK RESPONSE
For lower ranges only (i.e. thermocouples and voltages less than 150 mV) the recorder can be made to respond in a
known way if a break in the input circuit is detected.
Note:- The break response for ALL CHANNELS on any single recorder must be selected as either: (upscale or
none) OR (downscale or none). Upscale and downscale CANNOT BE MIXED on a recorder
Break response can be set to
a. None (trace drifts with input wiring acting as an aerial)
b. Drive hi (trace is placed at the outside edge of the chart)
c. Drive lo (trace is placed at the inside edge of chart)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 46
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5.1 RANGE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
OPEN / CLOSED
For Input Type digital (not available on Channel 1), the PV display consists of a text string or an open/closed repre-
sentation. The strings which are to appear under open (logic low) and closed (logic high) conditions can be scrolled
through using the up/down arrow keys.
These text strings are: Open, Close,__-__, _____, In, Out, Hi, Lo.
TEST WAVEFORMS
When Input Type is selected as 'Test', the following four test waveforms can be selected and scaled both for tracing
on the chart and for the displayed value:
Triangle - 5 hrs or 40 mins
Sine - 5 hrs or 40 mins
TAG
This allows a 14-character descriptive name (tag) to be associated with each channel. This tag is used both for dis-
play and for logging. See section 4.1.2 for text entry techniques.
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 47
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Conf:Channel 1
Threshold 100.00
Enable Off
Type Absolute low
Dwell 10s
Alarm : Setpoint
Hysteresis 0.00
Scrolls through
Off, Unlatched, Latched, Trigger
Use up/down arrows and cursor
to enter values.
Max 2047s
Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Channel : Trace
Alarm : Job 1
Scrolls through Absolute low/high,
Deviation in/out, Rate of change rise/fall.
Use arrow keys to select channel
Use arrow keys to select alarm 1 to 4
1
4
4
2
4
4
3
4.5.2 Alarm configuration
Up to four alarms can be configured for each channel. For absolute and deviation alarms, a hysteresis value can be
entered to prevent spurious triggering should the process value 'hover' around the alarm threshold. For all types of
alarm, a dwell (or waiting) period can be configured, and if the alarm clears within this period, the alarm is ignored.
Each alarm can initiate up to two jobs, as described in section 4.1.5 above.
SETPOINT CONFIGURATION
Allows you to set up alarm type, threshold value, hysteresis etc. Figure 4.5.2a shows display pages for absolute
alarms. For deviation and rate-of-change alarms, some of the display pages will be different from those shown.
Figure 4.5.2a Alarm configuration pages: Absolute alarms.
ENABLE
Off, Unlatched, latched or trigger can be selected for the alarm, using the up or down arrow key.
Off The alarm is disabled
Unlatched When triggered, the alarm stays active until the triggering source returns to a non-alarm state. Alarm
indicators flash until acknowledged, then stay permanently on until the alarm is no longer active.
Alarm messages can be printed on the chart if alarm jobs trigger Customer Messages.
Latched When triggered, the alarm stays active until it has been acknowledged and the triggering source re-
turns to a non-alarm state. Alarm indicators flash until acknowledged, then stay permanently on until
the alarm is no longer active. Alarm messages are printed on the chart. Continuous jobs remain active
only until the source has returned to a non-alarm state (whether or not the alarm has been acknowl-
edged). NOTE - relay action does not latch when alarm is no longer active.
Trigger When triggered, any jobs associated with the alarm are initiated, and for continuous jobs (e.g. change
chart speed) continue until the triggering source returns to a non-alarm state. Trigger alarms are not
annunciated.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 48
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Measured
value
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Reference
value
Deviation
value
Deviation-in
alarm active
Earliest part of chart
Latest part of chart
Deviation-in
alarm active
Deviation
value
Measured
value
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Reference
value
Deviation-out
alarm active
Deviation-out
alarm active
Latest part of chart
Earliest part of chart
Deviation
value
Deviation
value
Absolute High
alarm active
Absolute Low
setpoint
Absolute Low
alarm active
Measured
value
Latest part of chart
Earliest part of chart
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Absolute High
setpoint
4.5.2 ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
For clarity, the following alarm diagrams are shown
with straight rather than curved value lines. PV val-
ues increase from the right (inner) to left (outer) por-
tion of the chart.
ALARM TYPES
Absolute alarms
An absolute high alarm becomes active when the PV
value rises above the alarm threshold value. The
alarm remains active until the measured value falls
below (setpoint - hysteresis).
An absolute low alarm becomes active when the PV
value falls below the alarm threshold value. The
alarm remains active until the measured value rises
above (setpoint + hysteresis)
Deviation alarms
Deviation alarms require a reference value and deviation value and can have a hysteresis value entered if required.
'Deviation out' alarms are active
a. when the PV value rises above (Reference + Deviation), and remains above {(Reference + deviation) - hyster-
esis}, or
b. when the PV value falls below (Reference - Deviation) and remains active until the PV value rises above. (Ref-
erence - Deviation) + Hysteresis.
'Deviation in' alarms are the inverse of the above, as shown in the sketch below.
Figure 4.5.2b Absolute alarm definition
Figure 4.5.2c 'Deviation out' alarm definition Figure 4.5.2d 'Deviation in' alarm definition
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 49
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
0 2 4 6 8 10
Litres x 1000
50
40
30
20
10
0
M
i
n
u
t
e
s
Rate of change - rise
alarm active
Rate of change - fall
alarm active
Rate of change - fall
alarm active
In this example, both rise and fall
alarms are triggered at 200 litres
per minute
Earliest part of chart
Rate of change - rise
alarm active
Latest part of chart
Measured
value
4.5.2 ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Rate-of-change alarms
With rate-of-change alarms, a value, a time period and
an averaging period have to be configured. In the ac-
companying sketch, the Value is 200 litres and the Time
Period is one minute.
The alarm is triggered if the PV changes by more than
the configured Value in less than the configured Time
Period (i.e. more than 200 litres/minute in the sketch)
The averaging period can be used to change the sensitiv-
ity of the alarm, such that noise spikes or normal oscil-
lations in the input signal do not trigger false alarms.
Figure 4.5.2e Rate-of-change alarm definitions
ALARM PARAMETERS
THRESHOLD
Sometimes called 'setpoint', this is the trip point for absolute alarms, entered using the up and down arrow keys.
REFERENCE
For Deviation alarms, this sets a 'central' value on each side of which the Deviation Value (see immediately below) is
to operate. The value is entered using the up and down arrow keys.
DEVIATION
For Deviation alarms only, this is a value each side of the reference value, within which a Deviation IN alarm is
active, and outside which a Deviation OUT alarm is active. See figures 4.5.2c and 4.5.2d.
CHANGE
For Rate-of-Change alarms only, this allows a value (D) to be entered using the up/down arrow keys. If the change in
the channel value (∆PV) over the specified time period T (see below) is greater than D (∆PV/T > D) then the alarm is
tripped.
PER
For Rate-of-Change alarms, allows a time period to be selected for the above change value. The up arrow key allows
1 second, 1 minute or 1 hour to be selected as the period.
AVERAGE
Allows a period of 0 to 9 seconds to be entered for Rate-of-Change alarms. This has the effect of preventing spurious
alarms being triggered by transient changes in the PV value.
HYSTERESIS
Allows a 'deadband' to be entered for absolute and deviation alarms, to prevent alarms being continuously triggered if
the process variable value hovers around the trip point. The value is entered using the up/down arrow keys.
DWELL
This feature allows the triggering of any alarm to be delayed for a period configurable up to 2047 seconds. If the
alarm source returns to a non-alarm state during the Dwell period, the alarm is ignored. The dwell period is entered
using the up/down arrow keys.
ALARM JOBS
As shown in figure 4.5.2a, the jobs page is reached by operating the page key from the Alarm : Setpoint page. Two
jobs can be set up for each alarm, and the actions they can carry out are as shown in the Jobs description in section
4.1.5
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 50
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.5.3 Trace configuration
This section of configuration allows you to:
a. Set Trace on-off
b. Select trace colour
c. Set line thickening on/off
d. Set chart spans A and B for the channel
Figure 4.5.3 on the next page shows typical Channel Trace pages.
Trace
Scrollable through Off and On.
Colour
The following colours can be selected: blue, red, green, black, blue/red and green/black . For single colour traces, the
channels' scales are printed on the chart in the same colour as the trace. For bi-colour traces, the traces swap colour
every 6 mm (approx.) and the scales are printed in blue for blue/red traces and green for green/black traces.
Line thickening
With line thickening enabled, an extra-wide trace (3 x standard width) is produced to aid long-distance viewing. If
line thickening is used for protracted periods, a reduction in the life of the pen can be expected.
Span A / Span B
This allows two spans (A and B) to be selected for the chart trace so that a certain part of the trace can be magnified
under certain circumstances (e.g. when the channel goes into alarm).
For example you may wish to record a process warming up from say 20˚C to its operating temperature of 700˚C, and
then to look more carefully at any small variations. In order to do this for channel 1, Span A could be set to 0 to
900˚C and span B to 600 to 800˚C. An alarm could then be set up as a trigger (to avoid alarm light coming on) at say,
600˚C with an associated job: 'Span B for 1' 'while active'.
If Span A/Span B are left 'Unspanned', the input scale range will be used for chart span.
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 51
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Conf:Channel 1
Span A:Unspanned
Line Thickening Off
Span B:Unspanned
Trace Off
Colour Blue
Span B similar
Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Channel : Trace
Use arrow keys to select channel
Scroll through Off, On
Scroll through blue, red, green, black, blue/red, green/black
Scroll through Off, On
Span A:Spanned
Span A:Low 0.00
Span A:High 0.00
Use cursor and arrow keys to
enter high and low values
4.5.3 TRACE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Figure 4.5.3 Channel Trace pages.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 52
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Conf:Group DV
Conf:Group Log 1
Conf:Group Log 2
Conf:Group Display
DV Group appears only
if maths option fitted
01 02 03 04 05 06
Option PVs (if fitted)
Include item tag yes
Include inst tag yes
01 02 03 04 05 06
Option PVs (if fitted)
Note:
01 02 03 04 05 06
Conf:Group Log
01 02 03 04 05 06
01 XX 03 04 05 06
’E’
4.6 GROUP CONFIGURATION
This allows contents and format of four* groups to be set up: Log1, Log2, DV*, and display.
* Note: DV appears only if the maths option is fitted.
Figure 4.6 Group Configuration pages
4.6.1 Log groups 1,2
Two log groups are available for sending tabular data to the chart, or to memory card (if fitted). Both log groups can
be printed on the chart by operator action (section 3.3.3) or by job action (section 4.1.5). Log group 1 can be sent to
chart and log group 2 can be sent to the memory card (if fitted) automatically, at fixed intervals as described below.
Two logging intervals (A and B) can be set up in Chart configuration (Section 4.4.3) to allow automatic printing of log
group 1 on the chart. If the memory card option is fitted, archive intervals A and B can also be set up (see section 12)
to cause automatic archiving of log group 2.
LOG CONTENTS
Initially, the log group contains all input channels. In order to edit the list, the cur-
sor key is used to move the underline to the item to be added, and the arrow keys
used to change its status from included (PV number shown) to excluded (XX
shown). The example shows how to delete channel 2 from log group 1.
Adding an item uses exactly the same procedure, with the 'XX' being replaced by
the PV number.
When present, optional derived variables, totalisers and counters can be added to
any log.
LOG FORMAT
Allows channel tag and /or instrument tag to be included in the log groups 1 and 2. See section 4.5.1 for channel
tags, and section 4.3.5 for instrument tag.
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 53
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Conf:Oper Action
Label:ACK ALL
Latched no
Use arrow keys and cursor
key to enter text string
Latched yes
Conf:Clock
Set Time 13:52:00
Set Date 22/04/02
Date format DD/MM/YY
Use arrow keys and cursor
key to enter hrs and mins.
Date format MM/DD/YY
Use arrow keys and cursor
key to enter date.
4.6 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
4.6.2 DV Group
Allows a number of items to be grouped together for action by a Derived Variable (e.g Group Average) - see section 7
for details. This group can contain all values available to the display and the two logs, but cannot be printed to the
chart.
4.6.3 Display Group
The Display group is similar to the Log group described above, except that it determines which PVs appear in the
scroll list at the display instead of which PVs are printed on the chart or sent to memory card.
4.7 OPERATOR ACTION CONFIGURATION
This defines the text string (↵ to ------ )which appears in the Operator Action page (section 3.6), and whether the
trigger is to be latching or non-latching. When used from the Operator Action page, the 'Enter' key acts as a trigger to
an 'internal event', and can initiate up to two jobs. See section 4.10 (Internal events) for more details
Figure 4.7 Operator action configuration
4.8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION
This part of the recorder's configuration allows you to set the current time and date, and the date format. The time
and date are maintained, under power-off conditions, by a nickel-cadmium battery as described in section 3.7.1
Figure 4.8 Clock configuration pages
4.8.1 Set Time
Use the up/down keys to set the hours. Use the cursor key to underline the minutes field, then the arrow keys to set
minutes to the next whole minute. The seconds are set to zero and the clock starts on operation of the enter key.
4.8.2 Set Date
Use the up/down and cursor keys to set the current date
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 54
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
4.8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
FORMAT
Use the up arrow key to scroll through Day/Month/Year and Month/Day/Year as date formats. It should be noted that
if a valid date has not been set up, date format change will not work.
4.9 MESSAGE CONFIGURATION
This part of the configuration allows up to 20 messages to be entered, for display and/or to be printed on the chart as
the result of operator or Job action. Entered using the text entry method described in section 4.1.2, these messages
can include 'embedded sequences' as described below.
4.9.1 Embedded sequences
Message text is freely editable, and may contain one or more 'Embedded sequence' each of which causes the current
value of a particular variable (e.g. time, date, value of channel N) to be automatically included in the message when
printed. The sequences are embedded using < and > as delimiters to separate them from one another and from normal
text.
Although the message is limited to 20 characters at the display, the embedded sequences will expand fully on the
chart or at the memory card (packed data only) if present. The available sequences, which must be entered as shown,
are as follows:
ONE PART SEQUENCES
<TIME> Embeds the current time in hh:mm:ss format
<DATE> Embeds the current date in the format (DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY) defined in clock configuration
(section 4.8)
<TMDT> Embeds time and date
TWO PART SEQUENCES
The remaining sequences require an Item and a Type to be entered either as <Item.Type> or as <Item–Type>. If the
latter (hyphen) format is used, the 'Type' will be highlighted if in alarm.
ITEMS
Blank Uses the triggering item (e.g. alarm) itself as the message triggering source
n Uses measuring channel n as the message triggering source
Dnn Uses derived channel nn as the triggering source.
Tn Uses totaliser n as the source if TCT option fitted
Cn Uses counter n as the source if TCT option fitted
tn Uses timer n as the source if TCT option fitted
En Uses event n as the source.
TYPES
NO Causes the Item's ID to be embedded (e.g. t2, 06)
PV Causes the Item's process value to be embedded
TA Causes the item's tag to be embedded
UN Causes the Item's units string to be embedded
VU Causes the items process value and units to be embedded.
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 55
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Ch1
S1
S2
Event 1
S1
S2
Event 2
Ch 2
Ch 4
Event Job 1
Send log 1
to chart
S1.S2
S1.S2
4.9.1 EMBEDDED SEQUENCES (Cont.)
EXAMPLES
An alarm going active on channel 3 has 'Print Message 1 on going active' as one of its jobs.
If Message 1 were set up to be: <TIME><.TA><-PV> then the current time and the tag and process value of chan-
nel 3 would be printed on the chart.
If, instead, Message 1 were <TIME><6.TA><6-PV> then the current time and the tag and process value of chan-
nel 6 would be printed on the chart when the channel 3 alarm went active.
4.10 INTERNAL EVENTS
As standard, there are six internal events, which can be triggered by one or more sources, and which can generate up
to two jobs each when active. Input sources can be ANDed or ORed, so multiple logical inputs can be used.
For example, to send a log to the chart when any alarm on channel 1 and channel 2 and channel 4 are active, we
could set up events 1 and 2 as follows:
Event 1: Event 2: Job 1:
Enabled Enabled Log 1 to chart
Source 1(S1) AND Source 2 (S2) S1 AND S2 On going active.
S1:Alm on channel 1. S1:Alm on channel 4
S2:Alm on channel 2. S2:Event 1
4.10.1 Event sources
Event sources are:
Alarm on Ch N (any Alarm on specified channel)
Chart is online (See section 4.4.3 - Stop after One Revolution).
Clock failure
Event N (Another specified event - see figure above)
Glb Channel alarm (Alarm on any channel)
Glb UnAck Ch Alm (Unacknowledged alarm on any channel)
Operator Key (See sections 3.6 and 4.7 - Operator action)
Power up
System error (Section 3.8)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 56
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Event : Source
S1:Clock failure
S1:Chart finished
S1:Event 1
S1:Power up
S1:Operator key
S1:Alarm on channel 1
S1:Glb Channel Alm
S1:Glb Unack Ch Alm
S1:System error
S1 Only
Use cursor, then arrow keys
to select event number
Event Disabled
Event Enabled
Use cursor, then arrow keys
to select channel number
S2:System error
Conf:Events 1
Event : Job 1 See section 4.1.5 for a list of jobs.
Use arrow keys to select event
number
Source 2 list identical with Source 1
list, but appears only when both are
required (S1 AND S2 or S1 OR S2)
S1 Or S2 S1 And S2
4.10 EVENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Figure 4.10 Internal event configuration pages
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 57
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
to Save Config
Baud rate 150
to Restore Config
Conf:Transfer
Scrolls through 150, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 1800, 9600,
19200.
Config Saved
Config Restored
4.11 CONFIGURATION TRANSFER
This facility allows the transfer between recorders, or between the recorder and a host computer (running PC configu-
ration software) using a jack socket located towards the left edge of the recorder platen, near the print head rest posi-
tion. Only the Baud rate is configurable at the recorder, so data transfer with a host computer, the other settings
required are: Eight data bits, One stop bit and No parity.
The configuration transfer circuit is designed for use with TTL (0 to +5V) signals. A converter may be required with
some host computers to change the signals to the normal RS232 port with 12 Volt signals.
The Transfer function will overwrite the destination recorder's configuration, ensure that the transfer is carried out in
the correct direction (i.e. from save to restore)
Figure 4.11 Configuration transfer pages.
↵ TO SAVE CONFIG
Operation of the enter key causes the configuration to be saved to another recorder or to a host computer.
↵ TO RESTORE CONFIG
Operation of the enter key causes a new configuration to be retrieved from another recorder or from a host computer.
BAUD RATE
Specifies the number of data bits per second at which the transfer will take place. The setting (150, 300, 600, 1200,
1800, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200) must be the same for both sending and receiving devices.
For jack plug wiring, see section 1.2.2
Wiring to computers requires a cable (available from the manufacturer) that has a 9 or 25 pin serial port connector as
well as the jack plug for the recorder. Details of this wiring are provided with the available PC configuration software.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 58
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Chart On/Offline:yes
Conf:Access
Start Chart log:yes
Chan Alarm Thold:no
Use Arrow keys to scroll
through no, yes
Use Arrow keys to scroll
through no, yes
Use Arrow keys to scroll
through yes, no
4.12 OPERATOR ACCESS
For the sake of security, it is possible to enable/disable certain of the operator functions. These functions are listed
below, together with their 'default permissions' (i.e. how they are despatched from the factory).
Switch the chart drive on and off: default = Yes
Initiate Log: default = Yes
Adjust alarm thresholds: default = No
Figure 4.12 Operator permissions pages
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 59
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
Low Point is 0.00
Low point ready
Apply to Ch1..1
Conf:Adjust
High Point is 0.00
Adjustment complete
Use arrow/cursor keys to enter range of channels
Enter actual low point value
Enter actual high value
Takes a few seconds
Apply known low signal to input(s); Wait for displayed value(s) to
stabilise (view other channels using arrow keys) then 'Enter'.
High point ready
Apply known high signal to input(s); Wait for displayed value(s) to
stabilise (view other channels using arrow keys) then 'Enter'.
Adjust : Input Adjust : Chart
Apply to Ch1..1
Conf:Adjust
I/P Adjust removed
Use arrow keys to scroll through
selected channels. Text line is
'Unadjusted' or 'Adjusted' as
appropriate
to Remove
Adjust : Input
Takes a few seconds
Use up/down/cursor keys to enter relevant channel numbers
View adjust Ch1..1
Unadjusted
Remove from ch1..1
4.13 ADJUST
4.13.1 Input adjust
Note: Input boards are permanently calibrated and require no periodic calibration.
This feature allows input channels to be adjusted to make allowance for non-standard inputs.
The technique used is to apply a known input at the low end of the input range for each channel in question. Once the
reading displayed by the recorder has stabilized, the 'correct' value is entered. The process is repeated for a value
near the high end of the input range.
Figure 4.13.1a Input adjust configuration pages
Adjustments can be removed, and channels can be checked to see if they are 'adjusted' as shown in figure 4.13.1b.
Figure 4.13.1b Remove/View adjust configuration pages
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 60
MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Conf:Default
to default config
Please wait
Chan 1 Units
Sure?
4.13.2 Chart adjust
This feature is the same as the Operator Calibrate Chart feature described in section 3.10
4.14 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION
This section allows the user to return to the factory set configuration. After confirmation has been received, the re-
corder re-initialises and returns to the background display (section 2.1). As shown in figure 4.14 below, the user can
quit before confirmation by using the clear (X) key.
Figure 4.14 Default config ation
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 61
For Maths, Totaliser, Counter, Timer, Communications,
User linearisation tables and memory card functions, see
the relevant Option Section.
Select 'Log' 'PV' or 'Display'
and edit contents format.
Password _____
Set up transfer parameters
Set: Instrument tag
Password
Language
Remote CJ channel
Remote CJ Units
Top level Operator menu
OP:Configuration
Enter password
Conf:Instrument
Conf:Channel
Conf:Group
Input type/range/units/linearisation type
Alarm type, threshold, action, jobs
Trace on/off, colour, thickening
Channel tag
Set :
Chart speed
Log interval
Adaptive recording
Use cancel
key to return
to operator
menus
Conf:Transfer
Set up source(s) and jobs
N = 1 to 6
Enter message text
Set time and date
and date format
Conf:Clock
Conf:Oper Action
Enter text string for operator display.
Set action as latching or non-latching.
(Set jobs in Event configuration)
Conf:Chart
Conf:Event N
Conf:System Error
Set up operator
access permissions
Conf:Access
Conf:Adjust
Adjust input channel
Set chart zero/span
Use 'Cancel' key to ignore changes, to return to
a higher level, or to return to operator menus.
Use page up/page down keys to move from page
to page
Use 'Enter' key to enter current display page
or to confirm changes.
Use up and down arrow keys to scroll through
a flashing item's menu list.
N = 1 to 20
Conf:Message N
Conf:Default
Return recorder to factory-set
configuration
4.15 CONFIGURATION MENU SUMMARY
Figure 4.15 Top level Configuration Menu structure
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 62
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
This page is deliberately left blank
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 63
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
5 RELAY OUTPUT OPTION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The relay output option can have various numbers of relays. A relay board can have two, four or six relays. There can
be one, two or three relay boards mounted within the recorder. Each relay has change-over contacts (i.e. common,
normally closed and normally open). In alarm or power off conditions, the common and normally closed contacts
are closed.
5.1.1 Configuration
Alarm types, thresholds etc. are set up as described in section 4.5.2. Each relevant Process Variable can operate one
or more relays using jobs.
JOBS
A single job 'Drive relay N of card N' (while active/inactive) is added to the job list shown in Section 4.1.5.
5.1.2 Relay specification
The relay specification for resistive loads is given below. Derate with reactive or inductive loads in accordance with
figure 5.1.2, in which:
F1 = Actually measured on representative samples
F2 = Typical values (according to experience)
Contact life = Resistive contact life x Reduction factor.
Number of relays per board two, four or six
Estimated life 30,000,000 operations
Maximum contact voltage 250V ac
Maximum contact current 2 Amps
Maximum switching power 500 VA or 60 W
Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II, Pollution degree 2 (see page 2 for definitions).
Relay to relay: 300 V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Relay to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
F1
F2
1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
F
R
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

F
a
c
t
o
r

F
Power factor (cos φ)
Figure 5.1.2 Derating curves
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 64
NO COM NC
Relay 1 Relay 6 Relay 5 Relay 4 Relay 3 Relay 2
NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC
1 2
ON
1 2
ON
1 2
ON
Lever switch positons for:
- board 1 (relays 1 to 6)
- board 2 (relays 7 to 12)
- board 3 (relays 13 to 18)
board 1 board 3 board 2
5.2 RELAY WIRING
The following diagrams show user terminations for the relay output board. Where other options are present, they are
always mounted 'after' relay boards (i.e. relay boards always have the lowest option board numbers).
5.2.1 Six change-over (also called Form C or SPDT) relays board
Figure 5.2.1 Change-over relay option wiring
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 65
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
11.7 mV + 0.18% of Output
30.5 A + 0.21% of Output
Output Maximum Error
Performance in instrument at 20 deg. C +/- 10 deg. C
Voltage
Current
These figures do not include errors from the
customer's measuring equipment
6 ANALOG OUTPUT (RETRANSMISSION) OPTION
6.1 INTRODUCTION
The analog output option provides one card fitted with either 2 or 4 retransmissions of input or math channels, where
a configurable proportion of a selected source channel's span is linearly mapped onto a configurable output range. The
type of output (Volts or mA) and the output scale, can be set up using the configuration pages described in 6.4, follow-
ing. Additional outputs cannot be retrofitted later, therefore,
6.2 SPECIFICATION
VOLTAGE OUTPUT
Voltage:0 to 10 V calibrated (max. current limit 12.3 mA at 11.5 V)
Max. linearity error: 2.0 mV
Min. resolution: 1.6 mV
Max. output resistance: +/- 2 Ω
Temp. coeff. at zero output: 300 microvolts per deg. C max.
Temp. coeff. of gain: 70 ppm per deg. C of output
Max. output voltage for minimum setting: -0.3 V at load resistance: 2 kΩ
Min. current limit: 6.0 mA.
Max. series mode high frequency ripple: 150 mV peak to peak
Max. common mode high frequency ripple: 300 mV peak to peak
Nominal output voltage, O/P type set to OFF: - 1.1 V into open circuit
Max. line regulation (24 V +/- 10%): 370 ppm of output
CURRENT OUTPUT
Current: 0 to 20 mA (max. voltage 18 V at 23 mA )
Max. linearity error: 4.0 µA
Min. resolution: 3.2 µA
Min. output resistance: 10 M Ω
Temp. coeff. at zero output: 1.0 µA per deg. C max.
Temp. coeff. of gain: 80 ppm per deg. C of output
Max. output current for minimum setting: -0.2 mA at load resistance: 1 kΩ
Max. voltage limit: 30 V into a open circuit
Max. series mode high frequency ripple: 150 µA peak to peak
Max. common mode high frequency ripple: 300 mV peak to peak
Nominal output current, O/P set to OFF: -250 µA into a short circuit
Max. line regulation (24 V +/- 20%): 370 ppm of output
GENERAL
Update rate: 1 Hz.
Step response (10% to 90%): 250 msec maximum
Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz; BS EN61010): Installation category II; Pollution degree 2 (see page 2 for definitions)
Channel to channel: 300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Channel to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
Performance: See table below
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 66
+V –C +I
Voltage
output
connection
+ -
+ -
Current
output
connection
+V –C +I
+V -C +I +V -C +I
Output 4 Output 3
+V -C +I
Output 2
+V -C +I
Output 1
CON 1
CHAN 1
C
O
N

2

C
H
A
N

2
C
O
N

3
C
H
A
N

3
C
O
N

4

C
H
A
N

4
O/P Type Off
O/P Range Hi 20.00
Conf:O/P Channel N
O/P Range Lo 4.000
Source Ch 1
Src Span Lo 0.000
Src Span Hi 100.00
Output Enabled
Offset 0.000
O/P Type V,mA or off
Select Channel or
Derived channel
O/P Type mA
Select CH/DV number using arrow keys.
Source Ch 1
Enter descriptor for the channel
Enter Range values
Scroll through
Enabled, Disabled
Enter Span values
Scroll through Lo, Hi, Off
Enter Offset value
(mA)
(mA)
(GPM)
(GPM)
Tag INLET FLOW
On error drive Off
6.3 WIRING
Either two or four outputs are present, depending on the installed option.
Figure 6.3 Retransmission option wiring
6.4 CONFIGURATION PAGES
Figure 6.4, below, shows a typical retransmission signal configuration. Actual configurations depend on specific ap-
plications
Figure 6.4 Retransmission configuration pages
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 67
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
6.4 CONFIGURATION PAGES (Cont.)
Figure 6.4, above, shows the configuration pages for the analog output option.
O/P Type Allows V, mA or off to be selected as the output type. WHEN 'OFF', THE CHANNEL OUTPUT GOES TO -
250µA AT +I AND –C TERMINALS AND TO APPROXIMATELY -1.1 V ACROSS THE +V AND –C TERMINALS
O/P Range Lo/Hi Allows the setting of the voltage or current that is to appear at the output terminals when the source
signal is at Src Span Lo/Hi (See below).
Source Ch Allows 'Ch' (measuring channel) or 'DV' (derived channel) to be selected as input source type. When
source type is as required, use the cursor key to move to the numeric field and use the arrow keys to
scroll through the available channels or DVs.
Src Span Lo/Hi Allows the setting of the high and low values of the source Ch/DV which cause the high and low
values (O/P Range Lo/Hi) of the retransmission output signal.
Output Enabled Allows the output channel to be switched off, (Disabled) without its configuration being lost.
Offset Allows a fixed value to be added to the value of the source Ch/DV input to the retransmitter.
On error Drive Allows Drive off, Drive hi or Drive lo to be selected as an error output (e.g. if the input source is
missing). 'Off' causes the output to be set to its off state as defined in O/P type above. 'Drive hi' or
'Drive lo' cause the output to drive to approximately 1% above span or below 'zero' respectively.
Tag Allows a 14-character descriptor to be applied to the selected channel.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 68
Adjust:Input
Conf:Adjust
Adjust:Chart Adjust:Output
Apply to O/P 1
Low output LLL.LL
Low reading LLL.LL
High output HHH.HH
High reading HHH.HH
Adjustment complete
Set required low o/p value
(in engineering units)
(default = 10%)
Enter resulting indicated value
Set required high o/p value
(in engineering units)
(default = 90%)
Enter resulting indicated value
Select required o/p channel
using up/down arrow keys
View Adjust O/P 1 Remove from O/P 1
Use up/down arrow keys to select channel
to Remove
Adjustment Removed
O/P N AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA = adjusted or unadjusted.
Use up/down arrow keys to select channel
6.5 OUTPUT ADJUST
This feature allows the retransmitted output signal to be adjusted to compensate for differences between the readings
on the recorder and readings on the device connected to the retransmission output.
The adjustment can be applied or removed as required.
The technique used is:
1. The recorder outputs a known value (10%* of output span) at the analog output terminals.
2. The user takes the resulting value as indicated by the connected equipment and enters it into the recorder.
3. The recorder outputs a second value (90%* of output span).
4. The user takes the resulting value as indicated by the connected equipment and enters it into the recorder.
The recorder then calculates a linear gain and offset correction to be applied to the output.
*These are default values and can be adjusted by the user.
Figure 6.5 Output Adjust menu pages
'Remove' allows the adjustment to be removed from a selected channel.
'View' allows the user to determine whether any particular retransmission output is currently adjusted or not.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 69
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Level 1 functions Level 2 functions (additional to level 1 functions)
Off
Constant
Copy
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Modulus
Square root
Channel average
DV Group average
Rolling average
e
x
log
n
10
x
log
10
Rate of change
Sample and hold
Channel minimum
DV group latching minimum
DV group continuous minimum
Channel maximum
DV group latching maximum
DV group continuous maximum
Third order polynomial
Relative humidity
F value
Linear mass flow
Square root mass flow
Zirconia probe
Switch
High select
Low select
Stopwatch
Time stamp
O
2
Correction
Percentile
7 MATHS PACK OPTION
7.1 INTRODUCTION
The math pack option provides 16 'derived' channels (DV1 to DV16), in addition to the measuring channels.
The option comes in three levels: level 1 which provides basic arithmetic functions, level 2 which provides advanced
functions such as averaging, relative humidity calculations, mass flow etc. and level 3 which is a display format only .
Scientific notation displays calculated values using a mantissa and an exponent of 10 (e.g. 1000 = 1.00
+3
). The func-
tions for levels 1 & 2 are listed in table 7.1 below.
Table 7.1 Math functions
7.1.1 Groups
Derived channels can be added to the log and display groups described in section 4.6. The operator can edit these
groups to contain only those items which are to be logged or which are to appear at the display.
The Level 2 math pack option adds a further group, called the DV group, which can contain only derived and meas-
uring channels (i.e. not totalizers or counters). The group can be used to assemble channels which are to be part of
group averaging, group max/min, or group reset of averages, sample-and-hold, etc.
7.1.2 Jobs
The following jobs are added to the list given in section 4.5.1
Reset channel NN
Reset all DVs
Switch to B on NN
Disable channel NN
Disable all DVs
Trigger Ch NN
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 70
Op Maths 1
↵ to reset 37.54
Maths channel reset
Value: 1.00
Copy Ch 1
Add Ch 1 to Ch 1
Sub Ch 1 from Ch 1
Mult Ch1 by Ch 1
Div Ch 1 by Ch 1
Modulus of Ch 1
7.1.3 Operator pages
If allowed by operator access (section 4.13), the opera-
tor can reset any of the resettable functions in level 2
from this menu. The reset page displays the current
value of the channel to be reset.
7.2 EQUATIONS
Note - Unless otherwise stated, a "channel" can be ei-
ther an input channel or another derived calculation
channel.
7.2.1 Level 1 equations
CONSTANT
Allows the entry of a constant to be used in other equa-
tions, values between -99999 and 999999.
COPY
Can be used to duplicate input or derived channels
when more than four alarms are required. Also useful to
import totaliser or counter values so they can be traced
on the chart and/or, so that they can be used in math
calculations.
ADD
Allows one channel to be added to another.
SUBTRACT
Allows one channel to be subtracted from another.
MULTIPLY
Allows one channel to be multiplied by another.
DIVIDE
Allows one channel to be divided by another.
MODULUS
Takes the value of a channel, ignoring sign
(i.e. always positive).
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 71
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Square root of Ch 1
Average of Ch 1
Time interval 1m
DV Group average
Average of Ch 1
Sample Int 10s
Num of Points 42
e To Power of Ch 1
Natural log of Ch 1
10 to Power of Ch 1
Log base 10 of Ch 1
7.2.2 Level 2 equations
SQUARE ROOT
Takes the square root of the value of a channel. Pro-
duces a system error if signal value goes negative.
CHANNEL AVERAGE
Provides the average value of a channel over a
configurable time interval, then repeats.
GROUP AVERAGE
Provides the current average value of all the channels in
the DV group i.e.
(DVa + DVb + -------+ DVc)/R
where R is the total number of DVs in the group.
The function may be globally reset.
ROLLING AVERAGE
Takes the average value of a channel sampled a speci-
fied number of times (up to 9999) each at a specified
time period in seconds.
Example - a seven minute average can be 42 readings,
taken every 10 seconds (42X10 = 420sec = 7min). The
first reading is discarded when the 43rd one is taken
and so on.
The function may be globally reset.
E TO THE POWER
Raises e to the power of the value of the specified
channel. e ≈ 2.71828
NATURAL LOG
Takes the Naperian log of the value of the specified
input or derived channel.
10 TO THE POWER
Raises 10 to the power of the value of the specified
input or derived channel.
LOG BASE 10
Takes base 10 log of the specified input or derived
channel's value.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 72
Rate of Chg of Ch 1
Sample period 1s
Sample rate 1s
Sample & Hold Ch 1
Minimum of Ch 1
DV Grp Latch Min
DV Grp Cont Min
Maximum of Ch 1
DV Grp Latch Max
DV Grp Cont Max
Polynomial of Ch 1
A0 1.00
A1 1.00
A2 1.00
A3 1.00
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
RATE OF CHANGE
Calculates the rate at which the selected channel's value
changes over a specified time period, with a specified
sample rate which will determine the number of meas-
urements being taken during that time period.
SAMPLE AND HOLD
When triggered, retains the current value of the speci-
fied channel's value, until reset.
CHANNEL MINIMUM
Saves the lowest value that the specified channel has
reached since initiation or last reset.
DV GROUP LATCH MIN
Outputs the lowest value reached by any channel in the
DV group since initiation or last reset.
DV GROUP CONT MIN
Outputs the current value of whichever channel in the
DV group has the lowest value.
CHANNEL MAXIMUM
Outputs the highest value that the specified channel has
reached since initiation or last reset.
DV GROUP LATCH MAX
Outputs the highest value reached by any channel in the
DV group since initiation or last reset.
DV GROUP CONT MAX
Outputs the current value of whichever channel in the
DV group has the highest value.
THIRD ORDER POLYNOMIAL
Provides a third order polynomial curve fit:
A0 + A1x + A2x
2
+A3x
3
where A0 to A3 are constants and x is the specified
channel's value.
Constants less than 0.0001 or greater than 99999 re-
quire further configuration to execute, consult factory.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 73
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Wet temp Ch 1
Dry temp Ch 1
Atm Pressure Ch 1
Psych Const 6.66-4
Fval Fval T
t t
ma
t
t et temp
Z
= +
-
-
1
10 ×
arg
F value Ch 1
Ster. Temp 1.00
Z Value 1.00
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
RELATIVE HUMIDITY
To determine the relative humidity percentage using
wet and dry temperature readings in ˚F and atmospheric
pressure inputs in bars. 1 bar = 14.7 psia.
The mantissa of the psychrometric constant

times the
pressure should equal 6.66 - e.g. a 0.9 bar times a 7.40
constant equals 6.66; (the exponent "-4" is fixed).
F VALUE
To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Tempera-
ture (for temperatures below, at and above Sterilizing
Temperature) both in dry (FH) and steam (FO) sterilizing
environments, using the following equation:
Where Fval
t
= F value at time t (minutes)
Fval
t-1
= F value last iteration
T = Internal recorder iteration rate (minutes)
ma
t
= Value of temperature measuring channel
Target temp = 121.1˚C for FO; 170˚C for FH
Z = Temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 reduction in killing efficiency
= 10˚C for FO; = 20˚C for FH
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 74
Qm
K
Rg Z
x
Flow AbsP
Temp
t
t t
·
×
×
Mass flow =
md ma mb
mc
t t
t
× ×
Const =
K
Rg Z ×
Air
Ammonia
Carbon dioxide
Carbon monoxide
Ethylene
Hydrogen
Methane
Nitrogen
Oxygen
Propane
Steam
287.1
488.2
188.9
296.8
296.4
4116.0
518.4
296.8
259.8
188.5
461.4
RG
(J/kg-K)
Gas
Table 7.2 Common gas constants
K
S
ma
·
max
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
MASS FLOW LINEAR
Note: the overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the
control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy
of results obtained by using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
Independent verification is recommended before this recorder is used for custody transfer.
The equation solved is:
where: Qm
t
= mass flow at time t, in the same flow units as 'Flow
t
'.
Flow
t
= measured value from the flow meter at time t
AbsP
t
= absolute pressure of the fluid at time t
Temp = absolute temperature of the fluid in Kelvins
K = scaling factor (see below)
Rg = specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see below)
Z = compressibility factor (see below)
For the recorder user, this becomes:
where: ma
t
= the value, at time t, of the channel measuring the flow meter output
mb
t
= the value, at time t, of the channel measuring the absolute pressure of the fluid
mc
t
= the value, at time t, of the channel measuring the fluid temperature in Kelvins
md = a constant, derived from the equation:
where: K = a scaling factor (see below)
Rg = specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see below)
Z = compressibility factor (see below)
SCALING FACTOR K
This is derived from the equation:
where: S = The full scale output from the flow meter
ma
max
= the full scale input of the channel which is reading the flow
meter output
SPECIFIC GAS CONSTANT (Rg)
The specific gas constant values are available from published tables.
For convenience, the Rg values for a number of common gases are
given in table 7.2
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 75
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Flow Ch 1
Temperature Ch 1
Abs Press Ch 1
Constant 1.00
Z
P
T
· ×
1
ρ
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR (Z-FACTOR)
The compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a 'perfect' gas under
any set of temperature and pressure conditions, and is given by the equation:
Where: Z = Compressibility factor
P = Absolute pressure of the gas
T = Absolute temperature of the gas
ρ = Gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables)
Alternatively, the Z-factor can be established experimentally.
CONFIGURATION PAGES
Enter the flow rate, absolute temperature and the absolute pressure channels and the constant
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 76
Differ Press Ch 1
Temperature Ch 1
Abs Press Ch 1
Constant 1.00
Qm
K
Rg Z
DeltaP AbsP
Temp
t
t t
t
·
×
×
×
2
Mass flow =
md x ma x mb
mc
t t
t
Const
K
Rg Z
·
×
2
K
S
ma
·
max
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
MASS FLOW SQUARE ROOT
Note: the overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the
control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy
of results obtained by using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.
Independent verification is recommended before this recorder is used for custody transfer.
The equation solved is:
where: Qm
t
= mass flow at time t, in the same flow units as 'Flow
t
'.
DeltaP
t
= measured value of the differential pressure across the orifice plate at time t, in kPa.
AbsP
t
= absolute pressure of the fluid at time t
Temp = absolute temperature of the fluid in Kelvins
K = scaling factor (see below)
Rg = specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see below)
Z = compressibility factor (see below)
For the recorder user, this becomes:
where: ma
t
= the value, at time t, of the channel measuring the flow meter output
mb
t
= the value, at time t, of the channel measuring the absolute pressure of the fluid
mc
t
= the value, at time t, of the channel measuring the fluid temperature in Kelvins
md = a constant, derived from the equation:
where: K = a scaling factor (see below)
Rg = specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see linear mass flow above)
Z = compressibility factor (see linear mass flow above)
SCALING FACTOR K
This is derived from the equation:
where: S = The full scale output from the flow meter
ma
max
= the full scale input of the channel which is reading the flow meter output
CONFIGURATION PAGES
Enter the differential pressure, absolute temperature and
the absolute pressure channels and the constant
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 77
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Probe temp Ch 1
Probe EMF Ch 1
Reference 1.00
P
P
E
T
2
1
10
0 0496
·
× .
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
ZIRCONIA PROBES
A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia. At elevated
temperatures, such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe temperature and to the log of
partial pressure of oxygen difference between its two ends.
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be measured,
while the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere. For most applications, air provides a suitable reference (refer-
ence input = 20.95% for air).
The temperature of the probe is usually measured using a type K or a type R thermocouple. The temperature effect on
the thermocouple is such that for successful operation with the recorder, the probe temperature must be greater than
973K (700˚C).
The probe output obeys a law, described by the Nernst oxygen equation:
where, P2 = Partial pressure of oxygen in the sampled gas (%)
P1 = Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (%) (20.95% for air)
E = Electromotive force across the probe in mV
T = Probe temperature in Kelvins
In order to obtain a useful result, it is necessary to scale the inputs and outputs correctly. The channel measuring the
probe voltage will normally need a scale of 0 to 100 mV. The temperature measuring channel will probably be scaled
at 273 to 1800K, while the output scaling would typically be 0 to 5 % for boiler flues, and 0 to 20% in kilns.
CONFIGURATION PAGES
Enter channel numbers for Probe temperature, Probe emf and reference % measurements.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 78
Switch Ch A Ch 1
Switch Ch B Ch 1
Higher of Chs 1, 1
Lower of Chs 1, 1
Op = 0.00457 × T × logOp'
E = (10.84 × T) + 40mV
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
ZIRCONIA PROBES (Cont.)
OXYGEN POTENTIAL MEASUREMENT
The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measure of its ability to oxidise or reduce. For any element, a value of
oxygen potential (free energy of formation) is known. Above this value, the material will oxidise, below it, no oxida-
tion will occur.
Oxygen potential is given by the equation:
where, Op = Required oxygen potential (kilocalories)
T = Probe temperature (Kelvin)
Op′ = Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere in atmospheres
It can be shown that, because oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to 1450 Kelvins, the
probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere according to:
between 870 to 1450 K.
Thus it is possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe, using a standard input channel of the
recorder, scaled in units of oxygen potential.
A typical input range would be 40 to 1124 mV, with a scale of 0 to -100 kilocalories. Such scaling would be appro-
priate over the temperature range 873 to 1473 K (600 to 1200 ˚C).
SWITCH
This function copies one of two channel values according
to the state of its 'Select channel B for NN' job. I.E. if the
relevant switch is active, copy the value of source channel
B, else copy the value of source channel A.
HIGH SELECT
This function has two channel inputs, and copies which-
ever has the higher value.
LOW SELECT
This function has two channel inputs, and copies which-
ever has the lower value.
STOPWATCH
The stopwatch starts counting as soon as the function is configured. The stopwatch can be held (disabled) by a maths
pack 'job, (disable channel NN) and can also be reset to zero (Reset channel NN). The value is normally displayed as
a number of 1/4 seconds, but if one of the date/time formats described in section 7.3 is selected, the value can be
displayed in hours/minutes/seconds. When logged to the chart, it will appear in the specified format .
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 79
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
TIME STAMP
When triggered by a maths pack job (Trigger channel NN) becoming active, the time stamp reads the current time
and date from the system clock and holds it. The time or the date can be displayed according to the configured value
format.
Note: The display format selected affects only the value displayed, not the internal value of the channel. This
internal value is a number of 1/4 seconds elapsed either since enabled (stopwatch) or since the 1st January 1988
(Time stamp). This allows time stamp functions to be processed in the maths pack. For example, two channels,
each with a time stamp as its value can be subtracted from one another to give the time between the stamps, and
this can be displayed as elapsed time if so configured in the Value Format page.
OXYGEN (O
2
) CORRECTION
This function carries out O
2
correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring (CEM) ap-
plications.
The equation calculated is:
where,
Spec. O
2
= specified oxygen entered as a constant 5-digit value (prescribed for the particular process).
Meas. O
2
= measured oxygen,
,
entered as a channel number (gas analyser input)
Meas. gas = the measured gas, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input)
NOTE: If the measured O
2
% were to go below the specified O
2
%, the above calculation will result in a com-
pensated gas measurement that is less than the actual measured gas value. This may not be allowed by
some regulatory agencies.
To prevent the calculated value from going lower than the measured value, add a "High Select" DV channel with in-
puts from the measured gas channel and the O
2
calculation above (Qmt). Since this DV selects the highest of its two
input values, the actual measured gas channel value will be chosen when the Qmt calculation is lower. This High Se-
lect is now the compensated gas DV channel to be displayed, recorded, etc. rather than the above Qmt calculation.
CONFIGURATION PAGES
Fn:O2 Correction
Spec Oxygen 1.000
Meas Oxygen Ch 1
Meas Gas Ch 1
Qmt =
20.9% - Spec O
20.9% - Meas O
Meas. gas
2
2
×
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 80
Scroll through 'high' and 'low'
Use minimum number of points you can,
to save memory space.
7.2.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.)
PERCENTILE
This function looks at a specifiable number of the most recent samples of a specified channel. It continuously calcu-
lates the percentage of these samples which are equal to or which lie within a specifiable limit. The limit can be a high
limit or a low limit. (e.g. - the percentage of the last 20 samples that are equal to or less than 100˚F).
Once the specified number of samples has been reached, the oldest sample is discarded and the percentage re-calcu-
lated with each new sample. The sample rate can also be specified.
Fn:Percentile
Source Ch 1
Threshold 1.0000
Limit is High
Sample int 1s
Num of Points 1
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 81
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
7.3 CONFIGURATION
Figure 7.3 is an overview of the maths pack configuration pages
The configuration technique for derived channels is similar to that described for measuring channels in section 4.5,
above. Input and derived channels share the following parameters:
Channel units Five character user definable string
Trace On, off
Line thickening On, off
Colour Selectable from those available
Span A and B
Tag 14-character tag
Alarms Type, threshold, jobs
Value format Level 1 & 2 Functions: Five digits with configurable decimal point position.
Level 3 Functions Two digits (positive) or one digit (negative) plus the exponent (-9 to 9).
MATHS PACK UNIQUE PARAMETERS
GROUP RESET ENABLE
Allows resettable functions to be made susceptible to group reset.
LEVEL 2 VALUE FORMATS
Value format Five digits with configurable decimal point position.
Time as HH:MM:SS (Time part of time stamp function, or elapsed time for the stopwatch).
Date as DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY (Date part of Time Stamp function). Date format is defined
as a part of instrument configuration.
Elapsed time as HH:MM:SS. If the period is 100 hours or more, the format changes to
HHHHH:MM.
Note: If a DV is configured with one of the above Date, Time or Elapsed formats, it will be displayed as -----,
but will be logged on a separate line in the chosen format.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 82
This page is deliberately left blank
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 83
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Value: 1.00
Copy Ch 1
Add Ch 1 to Ch 1
Sub Ch 1 from Ch 1
Mult Ch 1 by Ch 1
Div Ch 1 by Ch 1
Modulus of Ch 1
Val Format XXX.XX
Scale Low 0.00
Scale High 10.00
Scale Units :Units
Glb Reset:enable
Tag:Derived Ch 1
Conf:DV 1
DV : Function
Fn:Off
Fn:Constant
Fn:Copy
Fn:Add
Fn:Subtract
Fn:Multiply
Fn:Divide
Fn:Modulus
A2 1.00
Psych Const 6.66
Constant 1.00
Constant 1.00
Sample Int 1s
Num of Points 1
Sample Rate 1s
A1 1.00
Atm Pressure Ch 1
Z value 1.00
Abs Press Ch 1
Abs Press Ch 1
Reference 1.00
Meas Gas Ch 1
Limit is High
A3 1.00
Num of points 1
Time Interval 1m
Sample Int 1s
Sample Period 1s
A0 1.00
Dry Temp Ch 1
Ster. Temp 1.00
Temperature Ch 1
Temperature Ch 1
Probe EMF Ch 1
Switch Ch B Ch 1
Meas Oxygen Ch 1
Threshold 1.0000
Square Root of Ch 1
Average of Ch 1
Average of Ch 1
e To Power of Ch 1
Natural log of Ch 1
10 to Power of Ch 1
Log Base 10 of Ch 1
Rate of Chg of Ch 1
Sample & Hold Ch 1
Minimum of Ch 1
Maximum of Ch 1
Polynomial of Ch 1
Wet Temp Ch 1
F Value Ch 1
Flow Ch1
Differ Press Ch 1
Probe temp Ch 1
Switch Ch A Ch 1
Highest Ch 1,Ch1
Lowest Ch 1,Ch 1
Spec Oxygen 1.000
Source Ch 1
Level two functions
To level 2 functions (if fitted) or
back to 'Off' if not.
Returns to relevant
'Fn:--- ' page
Fn:Square Root
Fn:Channel Average
Fn:DV Group Average
Fn:Rolling Average
Fn:e To The Power
Fn:Natural Log
Fn:10 To The Power
Fn:Log Base 10
Fn:Rate of Change
Fn:Sample and Hold
Fn:Channel Minimum
Fn:DV Grp Latch Min
Fn:DV Grp Cont Min
Fn:Channel Maximum
Fn:DV Grp Latch Max
Fn:DV Grp Cont Max
Fn:Third Order Poly
Fn:Reltve Humidity
Fn:F Value
Fn:Linear Mass Flow
Fn:SqrRt Mass Flow
Fn:Zirconia Probe
Fn:Switch
Fn:High Select
Fn:Low Select
Fn:Stopwatch
Fn:Timestamp
Fn:O2 Correction
Fn:Percentile
Global Reset page appears
only for Starred items
Level one functions
Figure 7.3 Maths pack configuration menu structure
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 84
This page is deliberately left blank
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 85
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
8 TOTALISERS, COUNTERS AND TIMERS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
The Totaliser, Timer/Counter and Totaliser/Timer/Counter options supply up to six each of 9-digit (8-digit when deci-
mal point used) totalizers, 8-digit counters and clock timers.
8.2 TOTALISERS
8.2.1 Source types
Each totaliser can integrate a given input or derived channel's value providing this value is between the totaliser's
configured low cut-off point and high cut-off point and within the channel's configured range.
8.2.2 Alarms
An alarm threshold can be set up for each totaliser, and each threshold can have up to two jobs associated with it. A
'limit' setting defines whether the job list is to be initiated when the totaliser value lies above (high) or below (low) the
threshold value. Up to two jobs can be initiated by the alarm.
8.2.3 Display
The Display Group (described in section 4.6) is initially empty. With the TCT option, totalizers can be included in
the display group with identifiers t1 to t6. It is up to the user to include totalizers in each group as required.
The value and units of each totaliser in the Display Group are displayed, in turn, in the 20-character text area. (The
decimal point position is set up in the 'Value Format' configuration page.) Operation of the page key displays the
totaliser tag and units instead.
8.2.4 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required)
To trace the value of a totaliser on the chart, it must be imported into a derived channel (using the 'Copy' function),
and the derived channel then traced.
8.2.5 Operator pages
If operator access is allowed, the operator can preset individual totalisers, and can edit the preset value.
Op:Totalizer 1
↵ preset nn.nn
Ed Preset 0.00
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 86
Tot : Alarm
Alarm : Set Point
Thold: 0.00
Limit Is High
Alarm : Job 1
No action
Scroll through
jobs list
Scroll through
high/low
Scroll through
1 to 2
While active
Scroll through
qualifiers
This page does not appear if
'No action' remains selected.
Function: Disabled
Units scaler 0.00
Source Ch 1
Conf:Totalizer 1
Enter
text strings
Tot : Function
Scroll through 1 to 6
Scroll through:
Enabled/Disabled
Preset Val 0.00
Scroll through:
available sources
Enter values
Period scaler 1s
Tag:14 characters
Scroll through:
Enable/Disable
Set decimal
point position
Val Fmt XXXXXXXX
CutOff Lo 0.00
Glb Reset:enable
CutOff Hi 10000.00
Units 5char
Enter
values
Enter
value
8.2.6 Totalizer configuration
Configuration is carried out using the normal techniques described in section 4. Figure 8.2.6 below, shows the con-
figuration pages.
Figure 8.2.6 Totalizer configuration
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 87
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
8.2.6 TOTALIZER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Source Allows input channels or derived channels to be selected as totalizer sources
Units scaler Allows the counting to be scaled. For example, if the input to a storage tank is gallons/min and the
totalizer value is to be gallons x 10
3
(i.e. one count for each thousand gallons), then the units scaler
would be set to 1000. A units scaler greater than 1.0 causes the totalizer to run slower by the size of the
scaler (counts divided by scaler). A units scaler less than 1.0 causes the totalizer to run faster.
Period scaler The totalizer reads the source channel value every second. The period scaler defines the time value of
the input units (/sec, /min, /hr, etc). Except as (*) below, the period scaler is ALWAYS the number
of seconds. For example, if the input is in gallons/minute, then the period scaler would have to be the
number of seconds in a minute (60). The larger the period scaler, the slower the totalizer counts.
Examples Measured Value Units Scaler Period Scaler Each Count Is
Pounds per Second 1.0000 1 1 Pound
Pounds per Second 1000.0 1 1000 Pounds
Standard Cubic Feet per Minute 1.0000 60 1 Cubic Foot
Gallons per Hour 1.0000 3600 1 Gallon
Gallons per Hour 100.00 3600 100 Gallons
Millions of Gallons per Day 10.000* 8640* 1 Million Gallons*
Millions of Gallons per Day 0.0100** 8640** 1000 Gallons**
* The period scaler would normally be 86,400 (the number of seconds in a day), but the entry for the period scaler only
allows a maximum of 4 digits. This means that 86,400 cannot be entered directly. A 4-digit period scaler of 8640 is
10 times too small and makes the totalizer count 10 times too fast. However, also changing the units scaler to 10
makes the totalizer count 10 times slower and makes the millions in the totalizer correct (10 X 8640 = 86,400).
** Since it is unlikely that anyone would want each count on a totalizer to represent a million gallons, the units scaler
can be reduced by a factor of 1000 resulting in a totalizer that counts in 1,000's of gallons (0.01 X 8640 = 86.400).
Preset value Allows the entry of a nine-digit (eight digit when decimal point is used) number from which the
totalizer will count. Totalizers can be set to their preset values, either individually or as a group, by
job action or individually by the operator, if access permission is granted. See also 'Glb Preset
Disable' immediately below. Preset to 0.000000 "resets" the totalizer.
Glb Reset Allows each totalizer to be configured to be susceptible to global reset (Enable) or not (Disable).
Val format Allows the decimal point position to be specified using the up and/or down arrow keys.
Cut Off Lo(Hi) Allows cut-off values to be entered, below (above) which the totalizing function will be disabled.
Units Allows a 5-character text string to be entered to describe the totalizer units.
Tag Allows a 14-character descriptive text string to be entered.
ALARM PAGES
Threshold Allows a value to be entered to act as an alarm trigger.
Limit Defines whether the alarm triggers when the totalizer value is ≥ the threshold (absolute high alarm)
(limit = high) or ≤ the threshold (absolute low alarm) (limit = low)
Jobs The following jobs are added to the scroll list given in section 4.1.5:
Preset Tot N
Preset all Tots
Disable all Tots
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 88
Op:Counter 1
↵ preset nn.nn
Ed Preset 0.00
8.3 TOTALIZER COUNTER OUTPUT
The totalizer counter output option provides a pulse output to an assigned relay which is scaled to the count on the
associated totalizer. There are two entries for this feature (see figure 8.2.6).
O/P (output)factor: divide the totalizer value, e.g. a factor of 100 outputs a pulse every 100 totalizer counts. A factor
of 0.00 disables the output.
Pulse Relay "n" of card "n":
8.4 COUNTERS
8.4.1 Introduction
The counter options supply six, eight-digit counters which are controlled from other recorder functions through job
lists. The following jobs are added to the list given in section 4.1.5. They can all be triggered when the source goes
active, goes inactive or on alarm acknowledgment, as configured:
1. Increment Counter N
2. Decrement Counter N
3. Preset counter N
4. Preset all counters
5. Disable all counters
Each counter can be configured with a threshold value to enable it to trigger up to two jobs itself. A 'limit' input al-
lows a job list to be initiated either when the counter value ≥ the threshold (limit high) or when it is ≤ the threshold
(limit low).
8.4.2 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required)
To trace the value of a counter on the chart, it must be imported into a derived channel (using the 'Copy' function),
and the derived channel then traced.
8.4.3 Display
The Display Group (section 4.6.3) is initially empty. With the TC or TCT option, counters can be included in the
display group with identifiers Co1 to Co6. It is up to the user to include counters in the group as required.
The value and units of each counter in the Display Group are displayed, in turn, in the 20-character text area. (The
decimal point position is set up in the 'Value Format' configuration page). Operation of the page key displays the
counter tag and units instead.
8.4.3 Operator pages
If operator access is allowed, the operator can preset
individual counters, and can edit the preset value.
Initiation of preset can also be carried out by job action
on individual channels or on all channels simultaneously.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 89
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Scroll through
jobs list
Scroll through
high/low
Scroll through
1 to 2
Scroll through
qualifiers
This page does not appear if
'No action' remains selected.
Scroll through 1 to 6
Enter
value
Counter : Alarm
Alarm : Set Point
Thold: 0
Limit is High
Alarm : Job 1
No action
On going active
Preset Val 1
Glb Reset:disable
Units: 5char
Conf:Counter 1
Counter : Function
Tag:14 characters
Enter text string
Enter text string
Scroll through
Enable/Disable
Enter preset value
8.4.4 Configuration
Configuration is carried out using the normal techniques described in section 4. Figure 8.4.4, shows the configura-
tion pages.
Preset Eight digit value of preset, entered using the up and down arrows. The preset value is loaded into the
counter by job or by operator action.
Units Allows a 5-character units string to be entered using the up/down arrows and cursor key.
Glb preset Allows each counter to be defined as being susceptible to global reset (enable) or not (disable).
Tag Allows a 14-character descriptive tag to be entered for each counter.
Figure 8.4.4 Counter configuration
ALARM PAGES
Threshold Allows a value to be entered to act as an alarm trigger.
Limit Defines whether the alarm triggers when the counter value is ≥ the threshold (absolute high alarm)
(limit = high) or ≤ the threshold (absolute low alarm) (limit = low)
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 90
Op:Timer 1
Rpt in 0d 0h 0m 0s
↵ to Start ↵ to Reset
If timer not running If timer running
Function: Disabled
Repeat 0d 0h 0m 0s
Start XX/XX/XX YY:YY
Scroll through
Enabled/Disabled
Duration 1s
Enter date (XX) and time (YY)
-see examples below
Conf:Timer 1
Timer : Function Timer : Job 1
Scroll through
1 to 6
Scroll through
1 to 2
No action
On going active
Enter repeat rate
Scroll through
jobs list
Scroll through
qualifiers
Enter duration
Global Reset disable
Start XX/XX/XX YY:YY
Scroll through
enable/disable
This page does not appear if
'No action' remains selected.
8.5 TIMERS
8.5.1 Introduction
The timer options supply six timers, each of which can be configured to start at a specific time and date relative to the
real-time clock in the recorder. Once initiated, the timer will run for a configurable time period (duration) and repeat
at a configurable rate. Alternatively, the timer can be initiated by a job, and it will then repeat at the configured rep-
etition rate. Once initiated, the timer will restart every repeat period until it is disabled.
Each timer can have up to two jobs associated with it, and continuous jobs (e.g. chart speed change) remain active for
the full time of the timer duration period. "One shot" jobs (e.g. resetting a totaliser) can be defined to occur as the
timer is "going active" or "going inactive".
The timer options add the following jobs to the list given in section 4.1.5:
Start specified timer - resets and starts timer
Reset specified timer - resets but does not start timer
8.5.2 Operator pages
If access permission is granted, the operator can start or
reset a timer
8.5.3 Configuration
Figure 8.5.3 Timer configuration pages
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 91
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
8.5.3 TIMER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Function Allows the timer to be switched on or off
Global reset Allows each timer to be configured to be susceptible to global reset (enable) or not (disable)
Start Allows a date and time to be entered for the timer to start. If an entry is left as XX, the timer will
operate at the next smallest time unit. If all entries are left as XX, the timer can be started only by job
or by operator action
Repeat Allows a repeat period to be entered. If entries are left as zeros, the timer does not repeat.
Duration Allows a duration period to be entered for the timer
JOBS PAGES
Allows up to two jobs to be entered for the timer to trigger.
8.5.4 Timer examples
1. To start a timer at mid-day on the 1st of each month:
Start XX/01/XX 12:00
2. To start a timer every hour, on the 1/2 hour, starting at 12:30 on 31st December:
Start 31/12/XX 12:30
Repeat 0d 1h 0m 0s
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 92
1 2 3 4 5 6
E
Channel alarms
Edit/Hold
03 150.2 F
RUN
MAN HOLD
RUN
MAN HOLD
OP1
OP2
SP2
REM
OP1
OP2
SP2
REM
Controller 1 Controller 2
9 CONTROLLERS OPTION
9.1 INTRODUCTION
One or two precision PID temperature controllers with self-tuning in a 1/16 DIN size can be mounted within the re-
corder (see figure 9.1). These controllers are fitted with a single-contact alarm relay and may be specified with one or
two outputs. Outputs can be either relay, triac or dc current (refer to the temperature controller manual for specifica-
tions). Controllers are fully user configurable. Controller measurements can be used as recorder inputs. Recorder
channels can not be used as controller inputs. Controllers can not be fitted on dc powered recorders.
Figure 9.1 Controller locations
9.2 VIEWING ON RECORDER CHANNEL
In the Channel Menu under Range / Input Type "Cont1" or "Cont2" can be selected. This selection couples the con-
troller measured value (PV) into the recorder channel. This value can then be traced, alarmed, used in calculations like
a direct input to a channel. Any recorder channel (1 to 6) can display a controller value even if no direct input was
ordered for that channel, (e.g. a recorder ordered as a 4-input recorder can display controllers on channels 5 and 6).
9.3 WIRING
9.3.1 Output and PV data
Controller power input, PV data and other outputs are pre-wired during manufacture. Controller output connections
are made by the user to the option controller interface pcb located in the bottom right hand area of the case interior
(see Figure 9.3.1). These terminals are identified with the same designations as are shown in the temperature control-
ler manual.
9.3.2 User input (T/C, RTD, mA, volts or mV)
Controller signal inputs are connected directly to the temperature controller terminals VI, V+ and V- (see figure
9.3.2a). Refer to the temperature controller manual - sensor input connections. The signal input connections will
accept wire sizes from 16 to 22 awg (0.5 to 1.5 square mm). Figure 9.3.2b details the recommended routing of the
signal input connections to the temperature controllers. Plastic fasteners are provided to secure signal input cable
routing.
Controller communications setup parameters are:
Protocol: .............. Modbus Data bits: .......... 8
Slave address: ...... 1 for controller 1 Stop bits: ........... 1
2 for controller 2 Parity: ............... None
Baud rate: ............ 19200
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 93
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Chan 6 Chan 5 Chan 4 Chan 3 Chan 2 Chan 1
Micro Board
Input Board
Option Boards
Option Board Power
Supply Board
Controller 1 Output Controller 2 Output
1A 1B 2A2B 3A3B
Option Boards
Option Controller
Interface Board
The number and mix of the
boards varies according to
the options fitted.
Option Board Power
Supply Board
1A 1B 2A2B 3A3B
VI
V+
V-
Controller signal input
connections - refer to
controller manual
9.3 WIRING (Cont.)
Figure 9.3.1 Controller output and PV data
Figure 9.3.2a Controller signal inputs
Figure 9.3.2b Controller signal input wiring routing
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 94
9.4 SPECIFICATION
Inputs
Range t100 mV and 0 - 10 V dc (auto ranging)
Sample rate 9 Hz (110 ms)
Calibration accuracy 0.25% of reading, t1 LSD, t1˚C/F
Resolution <1 µV for 100 mV range, <0.2 mV for 10 V dc range
Linearisation accuracy <0.1% of reading
Input filter 1.0 to 999.9 seconds
Zero offset User adjustable over the full display range
Thermocouple Types: J, K, T, L, N, C, R, S, B & Platinell II
Cold junction comp: Automatic: typically >30 to 1 rejection from 20 ˚C
RTD Types: Platinum 100, DIN std. 0.00385 Ω/Ω/˚C
Excitation current: 0.2 mA
Lead compensation: Up to 22 Ω in each of 3 equal resistance leads
V, mV ranges t 100 mV and 0 - 10 V dc (user configurable with these limits)
Outputs
Relay Rating: Min: 12V @ 100 mA, Max: 2 A @ 264 Vac resistive
Triac Rating: 1 A resistive @ 264 Vac
Analog Range: Isolated, 0 to 20 mA configurable (load 600 Ω max.), 12 V dc limit
Control Functions
Control Modes: PID or PI with overshoot inhibition, PD, PI, P only or On/Off
Auto/manual: Bumpless transfer
Setpoint rate limit: 0.01 to 99.99 degrees (or display units per minute)
Cooling algorithms: Linear, Water (non-linear), Fan (minimum on time), Oil, proportional only
Tuning One-shot tune: Automatic calculation of PID and overshoot inhibition parameters
Automatic droop comp.: Automatic calculation of manual reset value when using PD control
Alarms Types: Full scale high or low, Deviation high, low or band
Modes: Latching or non-latching, Normal or blocking action
up to 4 process alarms can be combined onto a single output
General
Display Dual, 4-digit x 7-segment high intensity LED
Dimensions & weight 48 mm W x 48 mm H x 103 mm D (1.89" x 1.89" x 4.06"); 250 g (8.82 oz)
Supply 100 to 240 Vac (-15%,+10%), 48 to 62 Hz, 10 Watts max.
Environmental Temperature: Operating: 0 to 40 ˚C (32 to 104 ˚F) (ambient with controller); Storage -10 to 70 ˚C
Humidity: 5 to 90% RH (non condensing)
Atmosphere: Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the controller cabinet
Altitude: Not suitable for use above 2000 m (6,562 ft) or in corrosive or explosive areas
Panel sealing IP65, NEMA 4X
Electromagnetic compatibility BS EN50081 general emissions for industrial environments
BS EN50082-2(95) standards for industrial environments
Safety standards BS EN61010, installation category 2 (voltage transients not to exceed 2.5 kV)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 95
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
1 X: -5.00 Y: -125.0
3 X: -3.00 Y: -27.00
5 X: -2.00 Y: -8.00
8 X: 0.00 Y: 0.00
4 X: -2.50 Y: -15.63
7 X: -1.00 Y: -1.00
6 X: -1.50 Y: -3.375
2 X: -4.00 Y: -64.00
Conf:Lin Table
Use First 2 Values
9 X: 1.00 Y: 1.00
11X: 2.00 Y: 8.00
13X: 3.00 Y: 27.00
12X: 2.50 Y: 15.63
15X: 5.00 Y: 125.0
14X: 4.00 Y: 64.00
10X: 1.50 Y: 3.375
Scroll to 15 for this example. Do not press 'Enter'
until all X-Y values have been entered.
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3 1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
+1 +2 +3 +4 +5
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
-130
-120
-110
-100
-90
-80
-70
-60
-50
-40
-30
-20
-10
0
X
Y
y

=

x
3
y

=

x
3
Figure 10.2a
Linearisation table configuration pages
Figure 10.2b y = x
3
function
10 CUSTOM LINEARISATION OPTION
10.1 INTRODUCTION
This option allows the user to enter a linearisation function of up to 32 points, which can then be used instead of the
standard linearisations supplied with the recorder ('User' added to Lin Type list in Channel Range configuration).
The curve must be monotonic (i.e. it may have only one y value for each x value entered) and the x inputs must in-
crease in value as they are entered. The points do not have to be equally spaced, so if the curve varies in gradient,
more points can be entered round any 'knees', leaving the recorder to interpolate in areas where the gradient is more
constant.
The curve is entered as pairs of points, one representing the input value which will be applied to the recorder (X), the
other the output value (Y) which is to appear on the chart.
10.2 CONFIGURATION PAGES
The following set up shows how to enter a y = x
3
output function using inputs of -5 to +5.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 96
TxB TxA CMN RxB RxA PU
11 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION
11.1 INTRODUCTION
This option provides the means for establishing an EIA422/EIA485 serial communications link with a host computer,
using the Gould Modicon MODBUS protocol. The option comes on a single board (one of three option boards). For
communication parameter (e.g. Baud rate) setting, see Section 11.3 below.
11.1.1 Safety isolation specification
Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz; BS EN61010)
Installation category II; Pollution category 2 (see page 2 for definitions)
Terminals to ground: 100 V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
11.2 WIRING
11.2.1 Pinout
Only one communications board may be mounted in any one of the three option positions. Figure 11.2.1 gives termi-
nation details for both connectors.
Note: The PU (pull up) output is 5V with a series 1000Ω resistor.
Figure 11.2.1 Communications option pinout
Communications terminal identifications vary, the following identifications are also used: TXA = (TX or TX+) and
TXB = (TX or TX-); RXA = (RX or RX+) and RXB = (RX or RX-). Terminal "PU" is supplied by the "5 Volt"
shown in Figure 11.2.2a and "CMN" is the "0 Volt" connection as well as the common connection for the transmit and
receive lines. It should be connected to all instruments and to ground at a single point
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 97
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
100k resistors built into
circuit board.
For the sake of clarity, only
Host transmit lines shown.
0 Volts
5 Volts
100k
RxA
RxB
Recorder A
220R
100k
0 Volts
100
k
5 Volts
100
k
Recorder B (Final recorder)
Transmit lines from host
TxB
TxA
RxA RxB
11.2.2 Termination and Biasing
If the communications line is left open-ended, the end of he cable acts as a reflector, returning what can appear to be
'true' data signals back down the line. A receiver cannot distinguish between 'true' and reflected data, with the result
that data is corrupted.
In order to avoid this, a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument. If the value of this resis-
tor is equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable (120 Ohms in this case), then the line appears to be of infinite
length and no reflections occur. Such a value however, does not give the best signal-to-noise ratio, so a compromise
value (220 Ohms) is chosen to give the optimum performance in reducing unwanted reflections and in improving the
signal-to-noise ratio.
The recorder communications port is terminated as shown in figure 11.2.2a, below. In a single point-to-point applica-
tion, it may be necessary to terminate the instrument with a 220Ω resistor. In multi-drop systems, only the final unit
should be terminated in this way, otherwise the transmitted signal levels may be reduced to an unacceptable level.
Figure 11.2.2a System termination and biasing
HOST COMPUTER
When not communicating, the instrument outputs go to a high-impedance state to allow multi-drop connection. This
will cause a problem if the host computer is not fitted with biasing resistors to pull these essentially open circuit lines
to their idle states as defined for the EIA422/EIA485 standards. To overcome such problems, external biasing resis-
tors can be fitted as shown in figure 11.2.2b (a) below.
With long cable runs it may also be necessary to terminate the transmission line. Figure 11.2.2b (b) shows how this
may be done using external biasing resistors. Such a circuit is for use where the host receiver does not have its own
internal biasing arrangements. Where the host does have its own internal biasing, the fitting of a 220Ω resistor
across the receive inputs (figure 11.2.2b (c)) will terminate the line correctly.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 98
Host receiver
0 Volts
5 Volts
4k7
TxB
TxA
Transmit lines from
recorder
a. Host with external bias resistors
0 Volts
5 Volts
TxB
TxA
Host receiver
Transmit lines from
recorder
b. Host with external bias resistors providing
termination.
470R
c. Host with internal bias resistors and external termination.
0 Volts
5 Volts
TxB
TxA
Host receiver
Transmit lines from
recorder
4k7
min.
220R
4k7
min.
4k7
470R
Baud rate 1200
Parity Even
Conf:Comms
Protocol ModBus
Scroll through: 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800,
1800, 9600, 19,200
Scroll through: Even, Odd, None
Address 1
Stop bits One Scroll through: One or None
Enter address 1 to 247
11.2.2 TERMINATION AND BIASING (Cont.)
Figure 11.2.2b Host computer termination and biasing
11.3 CONFIGURATION PAGES
The configuration pages (figure 11.3) allow the Baud Rate, Parity, Noº of stop bits and the instrument address to be
set up:
Figure 11.3 Configuration pages
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 99
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
11.4 GOULD MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL
11.4.1 Introduction
When connected to a host computer the recorder acts as a slave Modbus device. The unit address (1 to 247) being set
up as a part of the recorder’s communications configuration. Only a limited number of function codes have been im-
plemented (ref. Modbus protocol manual) and these are listed in section 11.4.4
11.4.2 Channel addressing
The channel 1 address listed in table 11.4.4 is the base address at which channel 1 may be accessed.
Note: Addressing starts at zero, whilst channel numbers start at 1
Example: to read a digital input at channel 4, the required address passed with the code 01 would be 03
If an alarm is set for an input or derived channel, the associated alarm parameters can be read using code 03
Example: To read the set point of absolute alarm 1 on channel 8, the required address passed with code 03 should be
1257 (1250 = channel 1; 1251 = channel 2 etc.).
The interpretation of alarm parameters (A1 to A4 and SP1 to SP4 in table 11.4.4) depends on alarm type as follow
Absolute
Absolute
Deviation
Deviation
Rate
Rate
Digital
Digital
A1 to A4
SP1 to SP4
A1 to A4
SP1 to SP4
A1 to A4
SP1 to SP4
A1 to A4
SP1 to SP4
Not used
Setpoint values
Deviation Values
Setpoint values
Rate value
Period value (secs)
Not used
0000 = Open; FFFF = Closed
ALARM TYPE PARAMETER DEFINITION
Table 11.4.2 Alarm parameter definition
Note: Any request to read a nonexistent setpoint value will result in the value 0000 being returned.
This should not be taken to mean that the setpoint is at 0.000
11.4.3 Reading analog inputs
The values read are in the range 0000 to FFFF. To obtain the scaled relative value, the following calculation must be
carried out where the analog input is in hex:
In the event of a hardware error or under-range value, the value is forced to scale zero. Should the analog value be
over range, the scaled value is forced to scale high.
Scaled value =
High range - Low range
FFFF
Analogue input + Low range
¸
¸
_
,
×

¸

1
]
1
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 100
11.4.4 Function codes
CODE FUNCTION RECORDER ACTION CHANNEL 1
ADDRESS (DECIMAL)
01 Read coil status Digital input state (true = >0.5) ................................................ 0
02 Digital read input status Digital input state (true = < 0.5) ............................................... 0
Input alarm 1 status ................................................................. 250
Input alarm 2 status ................................................................. 500
Input alarm 3 status ................................................................. 750
Input alarm 4 status ................................................................ 1000
Derived alarm 1 status............................................................ 1250
Derived alarm 2 status............................................................ 1500
Derived alarm 3 status............................................................ 1750
Derived alarm 4 status............................................................ 2000
03 Read holding register Analog input value .................................................................... 0
Analog input A1 (Table 11.4.2) .............................................. 250
Analog input A2 (Table 11.4.2) .............................................. 500
Analog input A3 (Table 11.4.2) .............................................. 750
Analog input A4 (Table 11.4.2) ............................................. 1000
Analog input SP1 (Table 11.4.2) ............................................ 1250
Analog input SP2 (Table 11.4.2) ............................................ 1500
Analog input SP3 (Table 11.4.2) ............................................ 1750
Analog input SP4 (Table 11.4.2) ............................................ 2000
Derived channel A1 (Table 11.4.2) ........................................ 2250
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 2500
Derived channel A2 (Table 11.4.2) ........................................ 2750
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 3000
Derived channel A3 (Table 11.4.2) ........................................ 3250
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 3500
Derived channel A4 (Table 11.4.2) ........................................ 3750
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 4000
Derived channel SP1 (Table 11.4.2) ...................................... 4250
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 4500
Derived channel SP2 (Table 11.4.2) ...................................... 4750
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 5000
Derived channel SP3 (Table 11.4.2) ...................................... 5250
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 5500
Derived channel SP4 (Table 11.4.2) ...................................... 5750
Reserved (always returns 0000) ............................................. 6000
Input channel status (read only) (flags - see code 04) ........... 6250
Derived channel status (read only) (flags - see code 04) ...... 6500
Instrument status (read only) (flags - see code 07) ................ 6750
Print mode .............................................................................. 7000
0 = Trace priority
1 = Text priority
2 = Text only
Table 11.4.4 Modbus implementation channel addresses (Sheet 1: codes 01 to 03)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 101
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
n Colour
1 Red
2 Green
3 Green
4 Blue
5 Blue
6 Black
Table 11.4.4 Modbus implementation channel addresses (Sheet 2)
11.4.4 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.)
CODE FUNCTION RECORDER ACTION.................................................... CHANNEL 1
ADDRESS (DECIMAL)
04 Read input register Analog input value .................................................................... 0
Input channel status ................................................................. 250
No bits set: Channel OK
Bit 0 set: Channel off
Bit 1 set: Over range
Bit 2 set: Under range
Bit 3 set: Hardware error / bad PV
Bit 4 set: Ranging error / no data
Bit 5 set: Overflow
Bits 6 to 15: Always 0.
Derived channel value ............................................................. 500
Reserved (returns 0000) .......................................................... 750
Derived channel status ........................................................... 1000
(Bits 0 to 15 as for Input channel status above)
Instrument status (flags - code 7) ........................................... 1250
05 Force single coil Sets digital input state for comms channel ............................... 0
0 = 0.000; 1 = 1.000
06 Preset single register Preset holding register ....................................................... As code 03
(Presets values for comms channels only)
07 Read exception status Read instrument status
Bit 0: System error
Bit 1: Writing system failure
Bits 2 to 7 Always 0
08 Loopback test Diagnostic code 0 (Echoes message as sent)
15 Force multiple coil Sets digital input code for comms channels in ......................... 0
address range. 0 = 0.000; 1 = 1.000
16 Preset multiple registers Preset holding register for each channel in....................... As code 03
address range.
(Presets values for comms channels only)
16 Print text string In addition to the above code 16. ........................................... 7250
Data quantity is the total number of characters in the
text string (including colour commands) divided by two
(must have an even number of characters.
The text string must consist of no more than 39 characters
and may contain no more than 10 colour commands of the
form !n, where n is a numeric character from 1 to 6 as
shown in the table below. Text is printed in black unless
otherwise commanded The '!' character may not be used
as a text character.
MSB is printed first.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 102
RXA
RXB
CMN
TXA
TXB
2
3
5
PC Serial Port
(9-pin)
Transmit
Receive
0 Volts
Transmit
Receive
0 Volts
Recorder
RS422 to
RS232
Converter
11.4.4 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.)
65 Enter XMODEM mode Holds 1 byte of data specifying which mode to enter
0 = standby; 1 = Receiver; 2 = Sender
66 Report XMODEM error Returns 1 byte of data as follows:
0: Transfer OK - no errors
1: Restore failed completely
File was incompatible or comms failed
to transfer the file,
Original configuration unchanged.
2: Restore failed on data.
Some records ignored, but transfer mostly
successful.
3: Restore failed on transfer
Some config. transferred before failure.
New configuration undefined
16: Save had no reply from comms and timed out
32: Save failed before transfer completed
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
01 Illegal function Unsupported or illegal Modbus function .................................. 0
02 Illegal data address Data address out of range for instrument config ...................... 0
Attempt to preset input value of non comms channel
Invalid configuration data
03 Illegal data Data value out of range for function
06 Illegal busy Configuration transfer in progress via another port
so unable to action function
Table 11.4.4 Modbus implementation channel addresses (Sheet 3)
11.5 XMODEM TRANSFER
XMODEM transfers take place between a host computer and a single instrument to save or restore configuration.
The transfer procedure is as follows
1. Place any other instruments on the communications link into standby mode.
2. Set the required recorder to sender or receiver mode as appropriate.
3. Send or receive file at host.
4. 10 seconds after completion, host communications is restored to normal use.
Note: 10 seconds of inactivity on the communications link, at any point in the procedure, will cause the host
communications to return to normal use for instruments in standby mode.
Figure 11.5 Recorder to PC wiring for transfer using configuration program
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 103
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
12 MEMORY CARD OPTION
12.1 INTRODUCTION
Note: Most of the memory card functions are not accessible to the operator until they have been enabled in
the Memory Card Operator Access’ configuration as described in section 12.5.
The memory card is a static RAM (Random Access Memory) with battery back-up. The battery, located within the
card, maintains the data for a period which is dependent on card type. The instructions supplied with the card give
details of storage periods and battery changing.
Files are stored in DOS format, and the card is PCMCIA version 2 compatible. Configuration software, available
from the manufacturer, to run on a PC, can be used in conjunction with the card (and a suitable reader) to create or
modify configurations for subsequent down loading to the recorder.
Memory card functions are all available both from the configuration menu and from the operator menu (unless access
permission has been denied - see section 12.5). The major functions of the Memory Card options are:
Save and restore option: Configuration save and restore.
ASCII log option: As above Save and Restore option but with ASCII Data logging.
Compressed log option: As ASCII log but with PACKED data format.
Reformatting software is included with PACKED format data to convert logs to ASCII format thus allowing manipu-
lation of the data in PCs.
12.2 MEMORY CARD INSERTION
As shown in figure 12.2a, the memory card is inserted into a slot located at the top right corner of the chart platen.
To insert the card, open the recorder door. Note that the instructions on the card "insert this edge" and "this side up"
should be on the right side of the card as it is inserted. Push the card fully into the slot until the ejector button below
the card slot moves out.
To remove the card, operate the card ejector button (shown below).
Figure 12.2a Memory card insertion
Card eject
button
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 104
Background Display
Dashed box = This page appears only if
the associated option is present.
Furnace 1 Temp Deg C
Op:Display
Op:Chart
Op:Alarm Summary
Op:Alarm thresholds
Op:DV alarm t'holds
Op:Action
Op:Clock
Op:System error
Op:Configuration
Op:DV reset
Op:Totaliser
Op:Counter
Op:Timer
Op:Memory Card
Op:Calibrate chart
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
MC:Restore Config
MC:Format
MC:Archive 1
MC Archive 2
12 MEMORY CARD (Cont.)
Figure 12.2b Memory card operator menu structure
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 105
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
'Format' deletes all data on the card
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
MC:Restore Config
MC:Format
MC:Archive 1
MC:Archive 2
Format type SRAM
to Format
Please Wait
Card is Offline
12.2.1 Card formatting
Memory cards are tested prior to shipment and the battery removed to preserve its useful life. Before a memory card
can be put into service, the battery must be installed following the instructions with the card. It then must be format-
ted by operating the 'Enter' key in the ' ↵ to FORMAT' display page as shown in figure 12.2.1 below.
Note: Any existing data on a card with a battery will be lost during format..
CHANGE
CARD WHEN
OFFLINE
Figure 12.2.1 Card format and off-line menus
12.2.2 Changing cards
CAUTION
Before inserting or removing a PC card, MC:Offline should be selected (see figure 12.2.1 above). This
ensures that data is not lost or corrupted whilst the card is inserted or removed. The card returns to the 'On-
line' state as soon as the 'Card is Offline' display is quitted (by using the 'Cancel' key).
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 106
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
Saving config
Config save complete
Save to:CONFIG .CFG
to Overwrite
Filename
already in use
Filename not previously
used with this card
Overwrite Do not overwrite
Enter 8-character (max.) filename
Use Down arrow (only) to
scroll through filenames
Recorder re-initializes using
the new configuration
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
MC: Restore Config
Restore Filename.CFG
Restoring config
Config complete
Figure 12.3.1
Figure 12.3.2
12.3 CONFIGURATION SAVE AND RESTORE
12.3.1 Save
Operation of the 'Enter' key from the Save Config
page, calls a Filename page which allows the entry
of an 8-character (max) string as the Configuration's
file name. The file extension ".CFG" cannot be
changed.
Once the file name has been entered, a further op-
eration of the 'Enter' key causes the configuration to
be written to the memory card.
Should the filename already exist, an overwrite
confirmation is requested. 'Enter' confirms
overwrite, or Cancel returns to the filename page.
See section 12.7.1 for details of permitted file name
characters (Only DOS format file names allowed).
12.3.2 Restore
NOTE: All existing configuration information
will be overwritten by the new configuration.
Operation of the 'Enter' key from the Restore Config
page, calls the filename page. This allows the
names of all the files held on the card to be scrolled
through using the down arrow key. Configuration
files can be identified as they have .CFG as their
extension
Once the required file name is displayed, a further
operation of the 'Enter' key causes the configuration
to be read from the memory card.
While the configuration is being read from the
memory card, the message 'Restoring config.' is
displayed.
Once the configuration read is complete, operation
of the Clear (X) key causes the recorder to re-initial-
ize and return to background display.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 107
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
MC:Restore Config
MC:Format
MC:Archive
to Send Log 1
to Send Log 2
Figure 12.4.1 Operator Log initiation
File containing two input channels (2 and 3) including
tags (TempVes1 and PressVes1) and units (˚C and bar
respectively), with DD/MM/YY,HH:MM:SS date format.
Column headers (Channel tags) included:
“XXXXA”, ,”2",”3"
“DD/MM/YY”,”HH:MM:SS”,”˚C”,”Bar”
“Log”,,”TempVes1",”PresVes1"
29/02/96,12:15:06,28.93,0.989
29/02/96,12:16:04,28.71,0.963
(Where XXXXA is the recorder model number)
File containing two input channels (1 and 3) NOT includ-
ing tags or units, with DD/MM/YY,HH:MM:SS date for-
mat. Column headers (Channel tags) included:
“XXXXA”, ,”1",”3"
,,
“Log”,,
29/02/96,12:15:06,28.93,0.989
29/02/96,12:15:06,28.71,0.963
(Where XXXXA is the recorder model number)
12.4 DATA LOGGING (ARCHIVE)
A log is a "snapshot" of the values within the log group at one point in time. Log
files may contain one or a large number of single logs.
12.4.1 Archive Configuration
Logging to a data card file can be initiated by job, through operator action or, for
log group 2, automatically at one of two configurable periods (archive intervals
A and B). Under normal circumstances, interval A is used, interval B being
selected by job action. More details can be found in section 4.1.4.
When archiving automatically, log group 2 is sent to the file defined in Archive
2 configuration (see section 12.4.1). The log interval and starting point can be
set (i.e. if an interval is entered as "01:00:00" at 8:27, logging will start on the
next full hour and log each hour thereafter (e.g. 9:00, 10:00, 11:00, etc).
The content of logs 1 and 2 are set up in Group Configuration as described in
Section 4.6.
According to which of the archiving options is chosen, data can be logged in
ASCII format or in PACKED format which is a compressed format for high
density data archiving. Reformatting Software for running on a PC, is included
with the packed data option to allow conversion of the compressed data into
ASCII comma-delimited format, suitable for direct use with PC spreadsheet or
word processing packages.
Note: See section 12.7 for details of permissible file names / types.
The Archiving operator pages (figure 12.4) allow only the initiation of the log. Entry of file names, archive interval,
data type etc., is carried out using the configuration menus (figure 12.4.1).
Table 12.4.1 Examples of ASCII format files
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 108
12.4.1 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
With reference to menus in figure 12.4.1 following, and table 12.4.2, below, these configuration steps are possible:
File type ASCII Produces comma delimited columns of data. File name extension is
.ASC (See table 12.4.1 above for examples)
PACKED Proprietary format. Data is stored in a compressed manner which re-
quires reformatting software to extract data from it. File name extension
is .PKD
File name type Text Fixed file name - see section 12.7.1.
Hourly New file opened hourly - see section 12.7.2.
Daily New file opened daily - see section 12.7.3.
Counter File name takes counter value - see section 12.7.4.
Include column titles Yes/No For ASCII files only. If YES, comma delimited column titles are sent
depending on the ‘Channel tag’ and ‘Instrument tag’ fields in the Log
Format Configuration described in section 4.6.1.
Date format (ASCII) DD/MM/YY,HH:MM:SS First two columns used to specify time and date of archive. (DD/MM/YY
might be MM/DD/YY according to the date format selected in Clock
configuration.
Spreadsheet Single, floating-point number. The integer part is the number of days
since 31st Dec 1899, the decimal part is the proportion of the day since
midnight. For example, Noon on the 1st Jan 1900 would be represented
by a value of 1.5, while a value of 34121.25 would represent the 6 am on
the 1st June 1993.
Integer Compresses time and date as YYMMDDHHMMSS, so that 6 am on the
1st June 1993 would be represented as 930601060000.
Compression ratio Normal For PACKED data only, compresses the data, but provides an exact
copy.
High For PACKED data only, compresses the data more than NORMAL.
Input channel values are saved to 0.02% accuracy, Totalisers, counters
and derived channels are saved to 0.000004% of display accuracy (4 parts
in 10
8
)
Table 12.4.2
JOBS
If an archiving option is present, the following jobs are added to the list given in section 4.1.5:
Log 1 to archive 1
Log 2 to archive 2
Archive interval B
Message (Msg) N to archive 1
Message (Msg) N to archive 2
All the above can be initiated 'On going active', 'On going inactive' or 'On acknowledge'
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 109
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Name Type:text Name Type:hourly Name type:daily Name type:counter N
File:NNNNNNNN.ASC File:NNMMDDHH.ASC File:NNYYMMDD.ASC File:CCCCCCCC.ASC
N--N in filenames = Editable characters
YY = Year number
MM = Month number
DD = Day number
HH = Hour number
CCCCCCCC = Value of counter N
File Type ASCII
File Type PACKED
Use up/down arrows to scroll between 'yes' and 'no'.
Appears only if 'PACKED' option fitted
MC:Archive 2
Interval A 00:00:00
Interval B 00:00:00
Conf:Memory Card
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
MC:Restore Config
MC:Format
MC:Archive 1
Name Type:text Name Type:hourly Name type:daily Name type:counter N
File:NNNNNNNN.PKD File:NNMMDDHH.PKD File:NNYYMMDD.PKD File:CCCCCCCC.PKD
Compr. Ratio Normal Compr. Ratio High
Column Titles yes
Date Fmt INTEGER Date Fmt D/M/Y,H:M:S Date Fmt SPREADSHEET
00:00:00 = archiving off
Use cursor key to move from hours to
minutes and from minutes to seconds fields.
12.4.1 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Figure 12.4.2 Archiving configuration menus
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 110
Dashed box = This page appears only if
the associated option is present.
Conf:Access
Chart Speed:yes
ChartOn/Offline:yes
Edit/Print Text:no
Send Chart Log:yes
Chan Alarm Thold:no
DV Alarm Thold:no
DV Reset:no
Tot Preset Value:no
Cnt Preset Value:no
Timer Control:no
MC Conf Save:no
MC Conf Restore:no
MC Format:no
MC Status/Dir:yes
MC Delete:no
MC Send Archive:no
MC Offline:no
12.4.2 Archive interval
In 'Archive 2' configuration page, use the cursor and numeric entry keys to enter the required archive intervals A and
B for automatic logging of log 2 group . An entry of 00:00:00 causes the automatic triggering to be inhibited. Auto-
matic archiving is carried out at interval A except when interval B is selected by job action.
If a ‘round figure’ value (e.g. 00:10:00 for 10 mins, 01:00:00 for 1 hr.) is entered at 9:03AM, the recorder will start its
automatic archiving at the next whole 10-minutes or the next whole hour (e.g. 9:10AM, or 10:00AM).
12.5 OPERATOR ACCESS
For the sake of security, each of the memory card functions can be added to or removed from the operator pages using
the OPERATOR ACCESS part of the recorder configuration. Refer to the Operator Access description in section
4.13 for further details. If all functions are removed, M CARD does not appear in the Operator Menu.
The up/down arrow keys are used to toggle the permissions between ‘yes’ and ‘no’.
Figure 12.5 Operator permissions
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 111
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
MC:Directory
RN080502.ASC 64
RICHAERT.CFG 5636
RN080610.ASC 148
CONFIG .CFG 7936
ZN080611.ASC 64
06/08/97 10:42:00
06/08/97 10:05:52
05/08/97 10:39:38
Yes
MC:Delete
Erase RN080502.ASC
Erase REICHERT.CFG
Erase RN080610.ASC
Erase CONFIG .CFG
Erase ZN080611.ASC
Sure? RN031802.ASC
Please wait
CONFIG .CFG 7938
06/08/97 15:24:38
No
12.6 MEMORY CARD GENERAL FUNCTIONS
12.6.1 Directory
The display shows the name of the oldest file on the card, together with its size in Bytes. As shown in figure 12.6.1,
the down arrow key allows the user to scroll through the file names held in the card memory. For each filename on
display, operation of the page key calls a further display page which shows the time and date of the file's last activity.
Figure 12.6.1 Directory function display pages
12.6.2 Delete
As shown in figure 12.6.2, the display shows the name of the oldest file on the card, together with a '↵ to erase' state-
ment. The down arrow key allows the user to scroll through the file names held in the card memory. For each
filename on display, operation of the 'Enter' key calls a further display page which asks for confirmation of erasure. A
further operation of the 'Enter' key removes the file from the directory.
Operation of the Page key from any of the filename pages, allows the file size, and data and time of last activity to be
viewed as shown in the figure.
Figure 12.6.2 Delete function display pages
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 112
MC:Archive 1
File type ASCII
Name Type:text
File:NNNNNNNN.ASC
Use up/down arrows and
cursor key to enter up to 8-
character file name
Name Type:hourly
File NNMMDDHH.ASC
Name Type:daily
File NNYYMMDD.ASC
Name Type:counter 1
File CCCCCCCC.ASC
Use up/down arrows and
cursor key to edit 1st two
characters
Use up/down arrows and
cursor key to edit 1st two
characters
Use cursor key then up/down
arrows to select counter number
CCCCCCCC will be the
value of the selected counter
at the time of archiving.
Filename formats for ASCII files (extension = .ASC).
PACKED names identical except extension = .PKD
MC:Status
Usage: 11/ 128K
Write Protected: no
12.6.3 Card status
This display tells the user how much memory is currently used (11kB in the example) out of the card’s total memory
(128kB in the example).
Operation of the page key calls a display which shows whether the card is write protected or not.
Figure 12.6.3 Status display pages
Note: A newly formatted card uses some space for format data,
12.6.4 Automatic file deletion
Should the card become full while chart copy or data logging / archiving activities are being carried out, the oldest
data logging / archiving file on the card is deleted. (The oldest file will be deleted whether or not it is of the same
type as the one being written.) Existing configuration files (.CFG) are not deleted.
Should the card become full while a Configuration Save is being attempted the Save will be aborted and the message
'Err:Card full' will be displayed until cleared by the 'Clear' (X) key.
12.7 ARCHIVE FILES
As shown in figure 12.7 for 'Archive 1', the following types of file name may be used when archiving data.
1. Text
2. Daily (Uses the recorder’s real-time clock)
3. Hourly (Uses the recorder’s real-time clock)
4. Counter value.
The file names consist of up to eight characters, followed by a three-character non-editable extension.
Figure 12.7 Filename selection
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 113
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
12.7.1 Text file names
With ‘Filename type’ selected as ‘Text’, the NN—NN field can be freely edited with alphanumeric characters as fol-
lows:
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9 à ê è ô ù # $ % & ( ) - _ ! ^ ‘{ } ~ â ë ï î ì ò û ÿ á í ó ú
The use of any other character will result in a fleeting 'Invalid config' message.
12.7.2 Hourly file names
With ‘Name Type’ scrolled to ‘Hourly’, only the first two characters (NN) can be edited. The remainder of the file
name will be the time and date on which the copy was initiated. Thus if an ASCII log were started some time be-
tween nine and ten a.m. on the 3rd of August, then the file name would be NN080309.ASC.
12.7.3 Daily file names
Daily filenames are similar to hourly filenames except that they contain the date rather than the time at which the file
is opened Only the first two characters (NN) can be edited; the remainder of the file name will be the date on which
the file was initiated. Thus if an ASCII log were initiated some time on the 3rd of August 1998, then the file name
would be NN980803.ASC.
12.7.4 Counter file names
With ‘Filename type’ scrolled to ‘Counter’, none of the filename characters can be edited; the file name being the
value of counter N. This allows, for example, a separate chart copy to be made for individual batches, if counter N
is set up to hold the batch number. Should the counter be incremented during data transfer, the file will be closed at
an appropriate point, and a new file opened with the counter’s new value for a file name.
12.7.5 File name extensions
All logging file names have automatic extensions of "ASC
*
" or "PKD
*
" depending on whether they are in ASCII or
PACKED format (See section 12.4).
* If a new ASCII file is created on a disk that already has a XXXXXXXX.ASC file, then the extension is
‘incremented’ from ASC to AS1. If AS1 also exists, the extension will be incremented to AS2, AS3 — A10 — 100,
and so on (up to 999), until an unused file name is found. PKD extensions are treated in exactly the same way.
Configuration file names (.CFG extensions) are different in that if an attempt is made to create a configuration file
which already exists, a warning message appears asking for overwrite permission, and if this is given, the existing
file will be overwritten and lost.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 114
12.7.6 Rules for creation of files
1. The first log generated after the disc is placed online will force a new file to be created.
2. If an Hourly or Daily file name is chosen, the first log generated during that clock hour or calendar day will create
a new file.
3. The first log generated after any change has been made to the Archive Menu will create a new file.
4. If a Counter name is chosen, the incrementing of the chosen counter will create a new file.
5. The first log generated after any change has been made to the configuration of any channel will create a new file.
If none of the above events occur, an automatic interval or timer job will add a new set of data to the open file.
12.8 OTHER INFORMATION
12.8.1 Event sources
The following event sources (depending on which option is fitted) are added to the recorder:
1. Mem Card Bat Low
2. Mem Card Full
3. M Card Near Full (80% full)
4. MCC Overdrive (Archiving buffer full and no card or available card space)
These can be used to initiate recorder jobs as described in section 4.1.5.
12.8.2 System errors
The following possible system errors are added to the recorder:
1. Memory card battery low
2. Memory card battery flat
3. MCC Overdrive error (Archiving buffer full) (Archiving options only)
Any of these will cause a message to be sent to the display and an entry to be placed in the system error list (see sec-
tion 3.7).
12.8.3 Error messages
In the event of an error occurring during card use, a message will appear for a few seconds. The following error
messages are possible, if all memory card options are present:
Directory empty Card reader fault
Card write protected Card read failure
Card changed Card write failure
Card not formatted Bad filename
Card not fitted Card data corrupted
File write protected Card full
File read protected MCC overdrive
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 115
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Operator menus
Dashed box = This page appears only if
the associated option is present.
MC:Directory
MC:Delete
MC:Status
MC:Offline
MC:Save Config
MC:Restore Config
MC:Format
MC:Archive 1
MC:Archive 2
Op:Configuration
Conf:Instrument
Conf:Chart
Conf:Channel 1
Conf:Group Display
Conf:Oper Action
Conf:Clock
Conf:Message 1
Conf:Alarm Messages
Conf:Event 1
Conf:DV 1
Conf:Totalizer 1
Conf:Counter 1
Conf:Timer 1
Conf:O/P Channel 1
Conf:Transfer
Conf:Access
Conf:Memory Card
Conf:Lin Table
Conf:Serial Comms
Conf:Adjust
Conf:Default
T
o
p

l
e
v
e
l

c
o
n
f
i
g
u
r
a
t
i
o
n

m
e
n
u
12.9 MEMORY CARD CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW
Figure 12.9 Memory card menu structure
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 116
Remove for 115Vac
Link for 230V ac
Link for 115Vac
Remove for 230V ac
Shunt
boards on
channel
inputs
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Link for 115Vac
Remove for 230V ac
Fuse type = 20mm slow-blow
Fuse value (115V) = 100mA
Fuse value (230V) = 63mA
13 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY OPTION
13.1 INTRODUCTION
This option supplies one or two sets of three isolated 25 Volt outputs. Each output is intended to supply power to a
remote transmitter in order to run a 0 to 20 mA or a 4 to 20 mA current loop.
Physically, each unit consists of a circuit board and associated channel input shunt assemblies located on the inside
back wall of the case (see figure 1.2.2). Electrically, the circuit boards contain a transformer with multiple isolated
secondary windings used to drive three simple regulators via individual rectifying/filtering circuits. Outputs from the
regulators are wired to terminal blocks for user connection.
CAUTION
Although the recorder can operate on a line voltage of 90 to 264 Vac, the transmitter power supply must be set
for the level of voltage connected. See the link identifications shown in Figure 13.1.
Figure 13.1 shows an overall view of a transmitter power supply option with inputs for three channels.
Figure 13.1 Transmitter power supply
Supply
Voltage
110/120
220/240
Fuse
value
Fuse part
Number
100 mA
63 mA
CH050012
CH050630
13.1.1 Fuses
The required fuse value depends on the supply voltage, as shown in table
13.1.1. The fuse type is 20 mm slow-blow, and one is located under a insu-
lating cover on each circuit board as shown in figure 13.1 above.
13.1.2 Safety isolation specification
Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2 (see page 2 for definitions)
Channel to channel: 100V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Channel to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
Table 13.1.1
Supply Voltage versus Fuse Values
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 117
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
I V+ V-
Channel 1 connection to
transmitter power supply.
Other channels use similar
connections.
Chan
6
I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
'Micro board'
Input board
F
u
s
e
Transmitter power
supply No. 2
F
u
s
e
Chan
5
Chan
4
Chan
3
Chan
2
Chan
1
Transmitter power
supply No. 1
-
+
Transmitter
power supply
(Internal)
Pins for input
board connector
-
+
+
-
Transmitter
-
+
-
Transmitter
Transmitter
power supply
(External)
+ -
-
+
Pins for input
board connector
13.2 SIGNAL WIRING
The transmitter outputs are connected at a terminal block as shown below. Connection between the shunt board and
the power supply are made at manufacture.
Figure 13.2a Internal Transmitter power supply wiring
Figure 13.2b Transmitter wiring (internal power supply)
Figure 13.2c Transmitter wiring (external power supply)
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 118
This page is deliberately left blank
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 119
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
14 REFERENCE
14.1 COSHH
14.1.1 Printheads
Note: The COSHH data included here is derived
directly from data sheets produced by the manu-
facturer to cover all its products. This is reflected
in the fact that the lists of part numbers may
include more than those items relevant to this
product.
REACTIVITY DATA
SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES
SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION
Eyes and skin
Ingestion
Respiratory
Ventilation
Protective clothing
Other
FIRST AID PROCEDURES
Inhalation
STABILITY
Stable Unstable
Conditions to avoid
Hazardous
decomposition
products
Hazardous
polymerisation
Flush affected areas with water. If irritation develops, consult a physician.
Yes
Strong oxidising agents and temperatures
above 90 C
None
Will not occur
Wipe up spills with towels and cloths. Remove stains with soap solution.
Dispose of waste in accordance with local environment control regulations
Normal ventilation is adequate
Use gloves when handling printheads to avoid stains on skin/clothing
When printheads are being used for recording purposes, there are
no known deletarious effects arising from the inks or pen tips.
HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS
Product:
Part numbers:
PHYSICAL DATA
FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA
HEALTH HAZARD DATA
Name % Range TLV Toxicological data
Boiling point
Vapour pressure
Odour
Specific gravity
Solubility in water
Colours
Flash point (deg C) (Method used)
Extinguishing media
Special fire-fighting procedures
Unusual fire and explosion
hazards
Threshold limit value
LD 50 Oral
Skin and eye irritation
Over-exposure effects
LD 50 Dermal
FLAMMABLE LIMIT
LEL UEL
WATER BASED INKS NOT CONTAINING FORMAMIDE
LA248163
LA249556
LA250280
Acid dye 1 to 4 Not available Not established
>212 C
1.05 to 1.1
<20 mm Hg
Complete
None
Various
Not flammable
Use medium appropriate to primary
cause of fire.
None
None
Not available Not available
Not established
> 5g/kg
None in normal use
Slight irritation of mucus membrane
Not established
If inhaled, move to fresh air. If necessary, aid breathing and obtain medical attention
If vapours are generated, use organic vapour respirator
If swallowed, dilute with water. Induce vomiting. Obtain immediate medical attention
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 120
DISPOSAL
HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS
Product:
Part numbers:
PHYSICAL DATA
FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA
HEALTH HAZARD DATA
Name % Range TLV Toxicological data
Boiling point
Vapour pressure
Odour
Specific gravity
Solubility in
water
Colours
Flash point (deg C) (Method used)
Extinguishing media
Special fire-fighting procedures
Unusual fire and explosion
hazards
Threshold limit value
LD 50 Oral
Skin and eye irritation
Over-exposure effects
LD 50 Dermal
FLAMMABLE LIMIT
LEL UEL
Rechargeable batteries
PA250331
Nickel Hydroxide
Potassium hydroxide
Not
available
8
Not
available
Highly toxic if ingested
Highly toxic, Highly corrosive.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Use medium appropriate to
primary cause of fire
Not applicable
Batteries might explode due to excessive presure build-
up which might not be self-venting. Toxic fumes might
be generated.
Not applicable Not applicable
Should cells leak, the leak material will be a caustic solution. Avoid contact.
Mischmetal alloy 10
Not
available
10
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable Not applicable
Not applicable
Chemical nature
See above. There are no risks in normal use.
REACTIVITY DATA
SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES
SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION
Eyes and skin
Ingestion
Respiratory
Ventilation
Protective clothing
Other
FIRST AID PROCEDURES
Inhalation
STABILITY
Stable Unstable
CONDITIONS TO AVOID
Hazardous
decomposition
products
Hazardous
polymerisation
If leakage occurs, wash the affected area withplenty of water and cover with dry gauze.
If eyes are affected, wash with plenty of water. Seek medical assistance.
If ingestion of leak material occurs, DO NOT induce vomiting. Give plenty of milk to drink. Obtain
immediate medical assistance, stating 'NiMHy battery'. If battery ingested, seek medical assistance.
Not applicable
Yes
Mechanical damage,
Overcharging
Short circuiting terminals
Charging temperatures outside the range 0 to 65 C
None
Will not occur
In normal use there is no risk of leakage. If batteries are abused, this may lead to the
leaking of a caustic alkaline solution which will corrode aluminium and copper. The leak
material should be neutralised using a weak acidic solution such as vinegar, or washed
away with copious amounts of water.
Not applicable
Contact should be avoided
Not applicable
Not applicable
Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations. Batteries should
not be discarded with normal refuse.
14.1.2 Batteries
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 121
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
14.2 ERROR MESSAGES
14.2.1 Invalid configuration
This message can appear under a number of circumstances, but is normally the result of the operation of the 'Enter'
key before configuration is complete. For example if you have set input type to T/C, but operate the Enter key before
you set a suitable Linearization type, the message will appear, and the attempted 'Enter'will be ignored.
14.2.2 Failure to adjust channel (Adj fail on ch NN)
Appears during the input adjust procedure (section 4.13) if the channel is in error or if there is a hardware or internal
communications fault.
14.2.3 Input adjust not available (I/P Adj n/a on ch NN)
Appears if an attempt is made to adjust an input channel which is not an analogue input.
14.2.4 Printer must be off line
Certain functions require that the chart be off line before they can take place. Op:Chart must be accessed, and the
chart drive switched off.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 122
14.3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
This (issue 6) manual consists of the following pages at their stated issue number and date
Page 1 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 2 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 3 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 4 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 5 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 6 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 7 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 8 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 9 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 10 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 11 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 12 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 13 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 14 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 15 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 16 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 17 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 18 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 19 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 20 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 21 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 22 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 23 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 24 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 25 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 26 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 27 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 28 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 29 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 30 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 31 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 32 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 33 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 34 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 35 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 36 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 37 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 38 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 39 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 40 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 41 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 42 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 43 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 44 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 45 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 46 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 47 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 48 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 49 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 50 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 51 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 52 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 53 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 54 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 55 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 56 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 57 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 58 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 59 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 60 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 61 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 62 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 63 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 64 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 65 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 66 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 67 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 68 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 69 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 70 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 71 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 72 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 73 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 74 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 75 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 76 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 77 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 78 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 79 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 80 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 81 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 82 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 83 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 84 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 85 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 86 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 87 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 88 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 89 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 90 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 91 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 92 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 93 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 94 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 95 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 96 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 97 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 98 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 99 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 100 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 101 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 102 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 103 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 104 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 105 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 106 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 107 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 108 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 109 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 110 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 111 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 112 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 113 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 114 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 115 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 116 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 117 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 118 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 119 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 120 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 121 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 122 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 123 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 124 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 125 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 126 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 127 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 128 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 129 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 130 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 131 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 132 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 133 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
Page 134 ................... Issue 7 Nov 06
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 123
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
14.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS
The following glossary is general to all the manufacturer’s products and may thus contain terms which are not appli-
cable to your particular unit. In particular, many of the terms are relevant only to configurable recorders.
Alarm A function which is triggered when an input signal or a signal derived from it reaches a cer-
tain value (absolute or deviation alarms) or changes faster than a specified rate (rate-of-
change alarms) or changes state (digital alarms). Once triggered, the alarm can initiate a
job list, such as causing a relay output to change state, sounding a buzzer, changing chart
speed etc.
Analogue input An input which changes in a smooth (non-stepped) way (e.g. thermocouples, resistance ther-
mometers).
Analogue output An output from the recorder which is a scaled and linearized copy of an analogue input or
derived channel. Also called retransmission output.
Attenuator A resistive device which reduces the signal voltage by a known ratio (usually 100:1)
Break response The recorder can detect an open circuit at its input terminals. As a part of the channel con-
figuration, the instrument’s response to an open circuit can be defined as ‘None’, ‘Drive
high’ or ‘Drive low’. If ‘none’ is selected the trace is allowed to drift according to what the
input wiring is picking up (acting as an aerial). Drive high (low) causes the trace to be
drawn at the extreme right (left) side of the chart.
Chart drive A mechanical paper rotation. Includes chart hold-down tabs and a means for gripping the
center of the chart to turn in at a specified rate..
Cold Junction Compensation Also known by the abbreviation CJC. The current generated by a thermocouple (TC) junc-
tion depends on the temperature difference between the actual bonded junction (the hot junc-
tion), and the other (non-bonded) end of the conductors (the cold junction (CJ)). Thus, for
any reading from a TC to be accurate, the temperature of the CJ must be taken into account.
This can be done in three ways: Internal, External or Remote.
Internal. The recorder has integral temperature detectors measuring the temperature near the
terminal blocks (the cold junction for directly connected TCs).
External. For remote TCs, the cold junction can be held at a known temperature. This tem-
perature is entered (in degrees) as a part of the CJC configuration.
Remote. For remote TCs, an auxiliary temperature detector can be used to measure the cold
junction temperature. This detector is then connected to a separate input channel. This input
channel number is entered as a part of the CJC configuration.
Communications Most recorders now offer a ‘Serial Communications’ option to allow a computer (PC) to
communicate directly with one or more recorders in order to configure them, or to read
information from them regarding the process variables being measured.
Configuration This is used as a verb to mean ‘the process of telling your recorder what you want it to do’,
and as a noun to mean ‘the way in which the recorder has been set up (or configured)’. Re-
corders fitted with memory card or communications options can save their configuration to
the memory card or to the host computer. This ensures against loss, and also allows configu-
rations to be copied from one recorder to another.
Counters Counters can be incremented or decremented by digital/discrete inputs or by job list action.
Counters can be preset. Each counter can have a set point which triggers a job list when the
counter value passes through the set point either incrementing (High) or decrementing
(Low).
Data acquisition A general term describing the successful reading of an input signal. The term Data Acquisi-
tion Unit describes those units which are able to read input signals and act upon them
(alarms retransmission maths functions etc) without necessarily having the facility of dis-
playing or recording them.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 124
14.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS (Cont.)
Derived channel A ‘pseudo’ channel which contains the results of maths pack operations so they can be
traced on the chart, logged, used in other calculations etc.
Derived Variable (DV) The result of one or more input channel or derived channel being acted upon by a math-
ematical function (e.g. Channel average).
Digital (discrete) input An input which has only two states (on or off). Examples are switch inputs or voltage pulse
inputs.
Event input A discrete (switch) or digital (voltage level) input. When active, an event input can initiate a
job list.
Hysteresis When an input signal is ‘hovering’ near a setpoint, then an annoying and potentially damag-
ing series of alarms can be generated, instead of just one alarm which can be acknowledged
and the cause dealt with if necessary. To avoid this, a ‘hysteresis’ value can be entered in
the alarm configuration, which effectively puts a dead band round the set point. For exam-
ple an absolute high alarm with a set point of 100 and a hysteresis value of 10, would be
triggered when the input signal value rose above 100, but would not re-trigger again until
after the alarm had been ‘cleared’ by the process value falling below 90. An attempt to de-
pict this example is given in the figure below.
Input channel An input circuit which accepts voltage, current or digital input signals from the user.
Input signal A voltage, current or digital input applied to the recorder input circuits. See also Analogue
input and Digital (discrete) input.
Job list A set of actions to be carried out by the recorder, when the job list becomes active. Typical
‘jobs’ are to activate a relay, display a message, change chart speed etc.
Linearization table Most transducers produce an output which is not directly proportional to the input. For
example, the voltage output from a thermocouple does not vary linearly with the tempera-
ture it is exposed to. The recorder uses a ‘look-up’ table to find a temperature value for any
mV input from a specified thermocouple type. Similar tables exist for other transducers
such as resistance thermometers. In most modern instruments, the user can enter one or
more tables of his/her own.
Log Logging allows process variable values to be printed numerically in tabular form on the
chart. Alternatively, logs can be sent to the memory card (if fitted).
Mathematical function With the maths pack option(s) fitted, a number of mathematical functions become available
to the user. For example, you may want to look at the difference between two input signals,
in which case a simple Subtract function would be used. The resulting Derived Variable can
be traced, using a derived channel, or could be used to trigger a job list if the difference
between the two input signal became too great or too small, and so on. A complete list of
functions is given below, but not all are available on all instruments.
Start
100
90
Input signal value
End
Al arm off only when value falls below 90.
Alarm without hysteresis
Alarm with hysteresis
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 125
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
14.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS (Cont.)
Maths functions (Cont.)
Measured value An umbrella term which means: the value of an input channel, derived channel, totaliser, coun-
ter, timer etc. measured in mathematical units as a proportion of the span. See also Process
variable.
Memory card Used to describe SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) solid state memory cards, or portable
hard or floppy disks, used to record configurations, data etc. which can then be taken to a re-
mote PC for further analysis, if required.
Multipoint recorder This is used to describe recorders which have multiple pen printheads rather than individual
pens to produce the trace on the chart. Each trace is made up of dots, produced by the printhead
as it traverses across the chart at regular intervals. Advantages are that many more traces can be
laid down on the chart, the traces can be annotated for identification and messages can be
printed on the chart. Disadvantages are that fast transients may be missed at low chart speeds.
Operator interface A term used to describe the controls (e.g. pushbuttons, keypads) and visual feedback (display)
that are used to operate and configure the unit.
Paper transport system This includes the chart cassette and the mechanical system, motors etc. needed to move the
chart through the cassette. The paper transport system is often considered to be an integral part
of the writing system.
Pen A fiber-tipped disposable stylus with an integral ink reservoir. Used to draw (trace) the value of
a single process variable on the chart in continuous trace recorders.
Printhead This is a device which, together with a disposable multi-colour cartridge, allows multi-point
recorders to mark the chart.
Process variable An umbrella term which means: the value of an input channel, derived channel, totaliser, coun-
ter, timer etc. measured in engineering units (e.g. Degrees Celsius). See also Measured value.
Relay output A set of contacts which changes state as a result of a job list being run. Relays are energised
continuously except when ‘in alarm’, so that if power to the recorder fails they go into their
‘alarm’ state.
Resistance thermometer Also known as a resistance temperature detector (RTD), a resistance thermometer is con-
structed of a material whose resistance varies in a known way on the temperature it is exposed
to. The resistance variation is non-linear, but for any given type, this non-linearity is well
known and invariable and is compensated for by linearisation tables in the recorder memory.
Retransmission output See Analogue output.
Setpoint Also known as ‘threshold’, this is the point at which an alarm becomes active or inactive. See
also hysteresis.
Shunt The input circuit of each recorder channel measures voltage signals. If current signals are con-
nected to the recorder, a low value resistor must be placed across the inputs, to convert the
current signal to Volts, according to Ohms law (Volts = Amps x Ohms). Thus, a 0 to 20 mA
(0.02 Amps) signal applied across a 250 Ω resistor produces a voltage range of
0 to (0.02 x 250) Volts = 5 Volts.
Such resistors are called ‘Shunt resistors’ or ‘Shunts’ for short, and are usually of very close
tolerance.
Constant Square root Log base 10 Latching maximum Switch
Copy Channel average Rate of change Continuous maximum High select
Add Group average Sample and hold Polynomial Low select
Subtract Rolling average Channel minimum Relative humidity Trace generator
Multiply Exponent Latching minimum Linear mass flow Stopwatch
Divide Natural log Continuous minimum Square root mass flow Time stamp
Modulus 10
x
Channel maximum Zirconia probe F value
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 126
14.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS (Cont.)
Span Span has two common meanings: the highest (or outer) grid of the chart, or the value given by
(maximum value - minimum value). The two meanings are identical where the minimum value
is zero.
Trace The line produced on the chart or display screen showing the value of the process variable be-
ing measured.
Thermocouple A junction of two dissimilar metals which produces a small voltage, the value of which depends
on the temperature of the junction. The voltage varies in a non-linear way with temperature,
but for any given type, this non-linearity is well known and invariable and is compensated for
by linearisation tables in the recorder memory.
Threshold See setpoint.
Timer Timers carry out general timing functions, and can initiate job lists.
Totalizer A mathematical function which allows flow rates (e.g. cubic feet per second) to be converted to
actual quantities (e.g. cubic feet).
Transducer A device which produces an electrical output proportional to temperature, flow rate, pressure,
speed, position etc. Common transducers are potentiometers, thermocouples, resistance ther-
mometers (RTDs) and flow meters.
Transmitter Thermocouple wire (compensation wire) is expensive, and if the thermocouple is a long way
from the measuring device, it is often cheaper to instal a ‘transmitter’ local to the thermocou-
ple. This device converts the mV signal from the thermocouple to a mA signal which can then
be wired to the recorder using normal copper wire. Transmitters can be self powered, or they
may need power generated for them. Most recorders can be fitted with Transmitter Power Sup-
plies as an option.
Writing system A general term used to describe the mechanical means of moving pens/printheads across the
chart width. The term often includes the paper transport system used to drive the chart.
Zero Zero is generally taken to mean the value associated with the lowest (or center) grid line on the
chart. Its actual value need not be zero, as long as it is less than the Span value.
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 127
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
ANNEX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE
This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree 2. These
are defined as follows:
INSTALLATION CATEGORY II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V or lower ac line voltage is 2500V. I.E. The equipment is
supplied from the fixed installation (IEC664)
POLLUTION DEGREE 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity caused by con-
densation shall be expected.
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 128
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder)
Board types (I/O)
Universal input board, 6-Changeover relay output board, 4-Channel analog output (retransmision) board
Options (See options manual)
Host Communications
Memory Card
Transmitter Power Supply
Controllers (see also separate controller manual)
Also Case Heater (not described)
Environmental Performance
Temperature limits 0 to 50˚C operating (-20 to 50˚C with case heater)
With control, 0 to ≈40˚C (depends on exact hardware configuration)
Humidity limits 10 to 90% non-condensing
Protection door and bezel - IP54 (optional IP65)
Shock BS EN61010, corner drop test & BS EN60873 edge drop test
Vibration BS EN60873 (10 to 60 Hz @ .07 mm displacement; 60 to 150 Hz @ 1g)
Altitude (max) < 2000 metres
Physical
Bezel size 360 High by 380mm wide (Bezel centreline offset 5 mm right with respect to cutout centreline - see fig 1.2.1)
Panel cutout dimensions 340.5 High by 345.5 wide (both – 0 + 2 mm)
Depth behind bezel rear face 150 mm
Weight average 7 Kg (15 lbs)
Panel mounting Vertical + 5/– 30 degrees (where + means top or recorder towards operator - see figure 1.2.1)
Printing system
Pen type Four-nib cartridge
Print resolution 0.2 mm
Default trace colours
(can be changed during configuration)
Printhead life 1.0 x 10
6
dots per color - black has extra 50%
Update rate 2 Hz (1 Hz when supplied with derived channels, timers, archiving or retransmission)
Trace rate (maximum) 1 pass every 5 seconds
Characters per line 39
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Emissions: BS EN50081-2
Immunity: BS EN50082-2
Electrical safety BS EN61010. Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Paper transport
Type Stepper motor
Chart speeds 1 to 960 hours per rev.
Chart type 12 hour; 24 hour; 7-day, not timed
Transport accuracy 0.25% single turn time accuracy
Power requirements
Line voltage Standard: 90 to 264V; 45 to 65 Hz
Low voltage option: 20 to 53V ac (45 to 400 Hz) or dc (dc inrush-15A for 10ms @ 20V dc)
Power (Max) 100VA, ac; 60W, dc
Fuse type None
Interrupt protection Standard: 40ms at 75% max. instrument load
Enhanced: 120msec at 75% max. instrument load
Channel
1
2
3
Colour Channel Colour
blue
red
green
4
5
6
black
blue/red
green/black
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 129
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Input board)
General
Termination Terminal block
Maximum number of inputs Six.
Input ranges t38mV, t150mV, t1V, t10V
Input types DC Volts, dc millivolts, dc milliamps (with external shunt), thermocouple, 2 / 3-wire resistance temperature detector
(RTD), Ohms, Contact closure (not channel 1) (Minimum contact closure = 500msec)
Input type mix Freely configurable
Noise rejection (48 to 62 Hz) Common mode: >130dB (channel - channel and channel - to - ground). Series mode: >60dB.
Maximum common mode voltage 250 Volts continuous
Maximum series mode voltage 45 mV peak at lowest range; 12 Volts peak at highest range.
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
300 V RMS or dc channel - to - channel (double insulation) and channel - to - ground (basic insulation)
Dielectric strength (BS EN61010) Channel - to ground =1350 Vac; Channel - to - channel = 2300 Vac (both 1 minute type tests).
Insulation resistance >10 MΩ at 500 V dc
Input resistance >10MΩ (38mV, 150mV, 1V); 68KΩ on 10V (always use mA input type for current inputs with shunts
as it corrects for the 68K)
Overvoltage protection 42 V rms (terminal I to terminal V-), 50 V rms (terminal V+ to terminals V- or I)
Sensor break detection t 57 nA max.
Recognition time 500 msec.
Minimum break resistance 10 MΩ
DC Input ranges
Shunt/Attenuator Resistor or voltage divider for terminal board mounting
Additional error due to shunt 0.1% of input
Additional error due to attenuator 0.2% of input
Performance @ 20 ˚C, t2˚C
(Continued)
38 mV
0.085% input + 0.051% range 80 ppm input + 18.6 ppm range
80 ppm input + 7.8 ppm range
80 ppm input + 1.6 ppm range
272 ppm input + 3.5 ppm range
Typical
Max
150 mV
1 V
10 V
Typical
Max
Typical
Max
Typical
Max
0.084% input + 0.038% range
0.084% input + 0.029% range
0.275% input + 0.030% range
1.4 V
37 V
370 V
5.5 V
0.035% input + 0.030% range
0.035% input + 0.027% range
0.035% input + 0.024% range
0.076% input + 0.024% range
37 ppm input + 1.03 ppm range
35 ppm input + 0.52 ppm range
35 ppm input + 0.16 ppm range
76 ppm input + 0.35 ppm range
Range
Res-
olution
Error at 20 C Temperature coefficient (per C)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 130
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Input board) (Cont.)
Resistance/RTD inputs
Ranges (including lead resistance) 0 to 150 Ω, 0 to 600 Ω, 0 to 6kΩ
Influence of lead resistance Error = negligible (3-wire);
Mismatch = 1 Ω/Ω (3-wire)
Temperature scale ITS90
Resolution and accuracy @ 20 ˚C, t2 ˚C
B
C
D
E
G2
J
K
L
N
R
S
T
U
Ni/NiMo
Platinel
0 to + 1820
0 to + 2300
0 to + 2495
- 270 to + 1000
0 to + 2315
- 210 to + 1200
- 270 to + 1372
- 200 to + 900
- 270 to + 1300
- 50 to + 1768
- 50 to + 1768
- 270 to + 400
- 200 to + 600
0 to + 1406
0 to + 1370
IEC 584.1
Hoskins
Hoskins
IEC 584.1
Hoskins
IEC 584.1
IEC 584.1
DIN43700:1985
(To IPTS68)
IEC 584.1
IEC 584.1
IEC 584.1
IEC 584.1
DIN 43710:1985
Ipsen
Engelhard
T/C
Type
Overall
range ( C)
Standard
0 to 400 C: 1.7 C
400 to 1820 C: 0.03 C
0.12 C
0.08 C
0.03 C
0.07 C
0.02 C
0.04 C
0.20 C
0.04 C
0.04 C
0.04 C
0.02 C
0.08 C
0.14 C
0.02 C
Max linearisation
error
0 to150
0.045% input + 0.141% range 35 ppm input + 36.6 ppm range
35 ppm input + 14.6 ppm range
35 ppm input + 1.9 ppm range
Typical
Max
0 to 600
0 to 6k
Typical
Max
Typical
Max
0.045% input + 0.069% range
0.049% input + 0.032% range
5m
148m
22m
0.030% input + 0.047% range
0.030% input + 0.036% range
0.034% input + 0.026% range
20 ppm input + 2.04 ppm range
20 ppm input + 0.97 ppm range
20 ppm input + 0.19 ppm range
Range
( )
Res-
ol ut i on
Error at 20 C Temperature coefficient (per C)
Cu10
JPT100
Ni100
Ni120
Pt100
Pt100A
Pt1000
-20 to + 400
-220 to + 630
- 60 to + 250
-50 to + 170
-200 to + 850
-200 to + 600
-200 to + 850
General Electric Co.
JIS C1604:1989
DIN43760:1987
DIN43760:1987
IEC 751
Eurotherm Recorders SA
IEC 751
RTD Type Overall range ( C) Standard Max linearisation error
0.02 C
0.01 C
0.01 C
0.01 C
0.01 C
0.09 C
0.01 C
RTD types, ranges and accuracies
Thermocouple data
Temperature scale ITS90
Bias current 1.7nA on t38mV range, 8nA on all other ranges
Cold junction types Off, internal, external, remote
CJ error 1˚C max; instrument at 25 ˚C
CJ rejection ratio 50:1 minimum
Remote CJ Via any user-defined input channel
Upscale / downscale drive Set on a PER RECORDER basis. All channels must be set (high or off) OR (low or off)
Types and ranges See table
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 131
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
INDEX
Symbols
10 to the power (Maths function) ................................. 71
A
Absolute alarms ........................................................... 48
Adaptive recording....................................................... 42
Add (Maths function) ................................................... 70
Adjust
Chart ........................................................................ 32
Input ......................................................................... 59
Alarm
Average.................................................................... 49
Change value........................................................... 49
Deviation value entry ............................................... 49
Dwell ........................................................................ 49
Enable ...................................................................... 47
Hysteresis ................................................................ 49
Indication ................................................................. 19
Jobs ......................................................................... 49
Latched .................................................................... 47
Off/On ...................................................................... 47
Operator setup page................................................ 30
Reference value entry ............................................. 49
Summary page ........................................................ 29
Threshold (setpoint) entry ....................................... 49
Trigger ...................................................................... 47
Types .............................................................. 48 to 49
Unlatched................................................................. 47
Alarms
Relay option ............................................................. 63
Analog output option.................................................... 65
Archive configuration ................................................. 108
Archive file names ..................................................... 112
Archive to memory card ............................................ 107
Average (Rate of Change alarms) .............................. 49
B
Break Response .......................................................... 45
C
Chanel minimum (maths function) .............................. 72
Change value (Rate of Change alarms) ..................... 49
Changing
Chart ........................................................................ 16
Print cartridge .......................................................... 17
Channel
Basic configuration ......................................... 22 to 27
Break Response ...................................................... 45
CJC type selection................................................... 45
Damping................................................................... 45
Display ..................................................................... 18
Hold.......................................................................... 19
Input range............................................................... 43
Input type ................................................................. 43
Input units ................................................................ 43
Line thickening......................................................... 50
Linearisation types................................................... 44
Nº of decimal places ................................................ 45
Open/closed text ...................................................... 46
Scaling ..................................................................... 45
Selection for display ................................................ 53
Shunt value .............................................................. 43
Span A/B setting ...................................................... 50
Tag ........................................................................... 46
Test waveforms ........................................................ 46
Trace colour selection ............................................. 50
Trace on/off .............................................................. 50
Value format ............................................................. 45
Channel average (Maths function) .............................. 71
Channel maximum (maths function) ........................... 72
Character set ............................................................... 35
Chart
Adjust ....................................................................... 32
Align with time datum .............................................. 28
Calibration................................................................ 32
Configuration ........................................................... 41
Replacement ............................................................ 16
Span setting ............................................................. 50
Speed
Printing on the chart ............................................ 42
User ..................................................................... 41
CJC
Remote channel Nº .................................................. 40
Type selection.......................................................... 45
Clock configuration ...................................................... 53
Colour of traces ........................................................... 50
Configuration
Alarms ............................................................. 47 to 49
Channel ........................................................... 43 to 51
Chart ............................................................... 41 to 42
Clock ........................................................................ 53
Entry to.............................................................. 21, 31
Error messages ..................................................... 121
Example .......................................................... 21 to 27
Group ....................................................................... 52
Instrument ................................................................ 40
Internal events ......................................................... 55
Log interval .............................................................. 42
Password ................................................................. 40
Return to default ...................................................... 60
Save/Restore ......................................................... 106
Techniques............................................................... 39
Transfer
Configuration ....................................................... 57
Constant (maths function) ........................................... 70
Controller option .......................................................... 92
Copy (maths function) ................................................. 70
COSHH data
Batteries ................................................................. 120
Printheads .............................................................. 120
Counters ...................................................................... 88
Custom Linearisation ................................................... 95
Channel (Cont.)
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 132
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
D
Damping....................................................................... 45
Data logging............................................................... 107
Date
Format ...................................................................... 53
Inclusion in messages ............................................. 54
Printing on the chart ................................................ 42
Setting ...................................................................... 53
View ......................................................................... 30
Decimal place position ................................................ 45
Default Configuration................................................... 60
Derived variables ......................................................... 69
Deviation alarms .......................................................... 48
Deviation value entry ................................................... 49
Display
Group ....................................................................... 53
Interpretation............................................................ 18
Divide (Maths function) ................................................ 70
Drive hi/lo ..................................................................... 45
Dump scales ................................................................ 29
DV Group cont max (maths function) .......................... 72
DV Group cont min (maths function) ........................... 72
DV Group latch max (maths function) ......................... 72
DV Group latch min (maths function) .......................... 72
Dwell (alarms) .............................................................. 49
E
e to the power (maths function) ................................... 71
Embedded sequences ................................................. 54
Entering
Configuration menus ............................................... 21
Numeric values ........................................................ 22
Text .......................................................................... 35
Error messages ......................................................... 121
Events .......................................................................... 55
F
F Value (maths function) ............................................. 73
Factory settings (return to) .......................................... 60
G
Group
Configuration ........................................................... 52
Display ..................................................................... 53
Log ........................................................................... 52
Group average (Maths function) ................................. 71
H
High select (maths function) ........................................ 78
How to
Change the chart ..................................................... 16
Change the print cartridge ....................................... 17
Hysteresis .................................................................... 49
I
Input
Adjust ....................................................................... 59
Range entry ............................................................. 43
Type selection .......................................................... 43
Units selection ......................................................... 43
Input board
Specification ............................................... 129 to 130
Installation
Chart ........................................................................ 16
Instrument tag .............................................................. 40
Internal Events ............................................................. 55
Invalid configuration message................................... 121
J
Jobs ............................................................................. 37
Maths pack .............................................................. 69
Memory card .......................................................... 108
L
Language selection ..................................................... 40
Line thickening............................................................. 50
Linearisation tables...................................................... 44
Log
Contents .................................................................. 52
Group ....................................................................... 52
Initiation ................................................................... 29
Interval ..................................................................... 42
Log base 10 (Maths function) ...................................... 71
Low select (maths function) ......................................... 78
M
Mass Flow (maths function)
Linear ....................................................................... 74
Square root .............................................................. 76
Maths pack
Menu overview......................................................... 83
Option ...................................................................... 69
Memory card option ................................................... 103
Message
Configuration ........................................................... 54
Printing ..................................................................... 42
Modbus protocol .......................................................... 99
Modulus (Maths function) ............................................ 70
Multiply (Maths function) ............................................. 70
N
Natural log (Maths function) ........................................ 71
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
Page 133
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06
O
Open/closed text .......................................................... 46
Operation
Detailed ........................................................... 27 to 32
Operator
Access to configuration ........................................... 58
Menus
Alarm setup page ................................................ 30
Chart .................................................................... 27
Clock .................................................................... 30
Configuration ....................................................... 31
Dump scales ........................................................ 29
Log ....................................................................... 29
System error ........................................................ 30
Top level .............................................................. 27
Oxygen concentration.................................................. 77
Oxygen correction (maths function) ............................ 79
Oxygen potential .......................................................... 78
P
Password
Default ............................................................... 22, 31
Entry of new............................................................. 40
Percentile maths function ............................................ 80
Power-up message...................................................... 18
Print cartridge replacement ......................................... 17
Printhead
Park.......................................................................... 17
Printing
Logs ......................................................................... 29
Scales ...................................................................... 29
Process value
Display ..................................................................... 18
Inclusion in messages ............................................. 54
PV formats (maths functions) ...................................... 81
Q
Quick scale print .......................................................... 29
R
Rate of change (maths function) ................................. 72
Rate-of-change alarms ................................................ 49
Recorder
Installation
Mechanical ........................................................... 11
Labelling symbols .................................................... 10
Specification ............................................... 128 to 130
Reference value entry ................................................. 49
Relative humidity (maths function) .............................. 73
Relay option ................................................................. 63
Remote CJ channel ..................................................... 40
Replacing
Chart ........................................................................ 16
Retransmission option ................................................. 65
Rolling average (Maths function) ................................ 71
S
Safety notes ................................................................. 10
Sample and hold (maths function) .............................. 72
Scale
Printing on the chart ................................................ 42
Scaling ......................................................................... 45
Serial comunications option ........................................ 96
Shunt value entry......................................................... 43
Span setting ................................................................. 50
Specification
Analogue outputs..................................................... 65
Controllers ............................................................... 94
Input board.................................................. 129 to 130
Recorder ..................................................... 128 to 130
Relay ........................................................................ 63
Serial Communications board ................................. 96
Transmitter power supply ...................................... 116
Square root (Maths function) ....................................... 71
Static precautions .......................................................... 9
Stopwatch (maths function) ......................................... 78
Subtract (Maths function) ............................................ 70
Switch (maths function) ............................................... 78
Symbols (Recorder labelling) ...................................... 10
System error ................................................................ 31
T
Tag
Channel .................................................................... 46
Instrument ................................................................ 40
Termination and biasing ..................................... 96 to 97
Test waveform selection .............................................. 46
Text entry ..................................................................... 35
Third order polynomial (maths function) ..................... 72
Time
Inclusion in messages ............................................. 54
Printing on the chart ................................................ 42
Setting ...................................................................... 53
View ......................................................................... 30
Time stamp (maths function) ....................................... 79
Timers .......................................................................... 90
Totalisers...................................................................... 85
Trace
Colour ...................................................................... 50
On/off ....................................................................... 50
Transfer configuration.................................................. 57
Transmitter power supply .......................................... 116
U
User chart speed ......................................................... 41
V
Value format ................................................................. 45
X
XMODEM transfer ..................................................... 102
Z
Zirconia probe maths function ..................................... 77
HA250385
Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 134
MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE
This page is deliberately left blank
Inter-Company sales and service locations
Specification subject to change without notice. ©Eurotherm Limited.
AUSTRALIA Sydney
Eurotherm Pty. Ltd.
Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099
Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288
E-mail info.au@eurotherm.com
AUSTRIA Vienna
Eurotherm GmbH
Telephone (+43 1) 7987601
Fax (+43 1) 7987605
E-mail info.at@eurotherm.com
BELGIUM & LUXEMBURG Moha
Eurotherm S.A/N.V.
Telephone (+32) 85 274080
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081
E-mail info.be@eurotherm.com
BRAZIL Campinas-SP
Eurotherm Ltda.
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345
E-mail info.br@eurotherm.com
DENMARK Copenhagen
Eurotherm Danmark AS
Telephone (+45 70) 234670
Fax (+45 70) 234660
E-mail info.dk@eurotherm.com
FINLAND Abo
Eurotherm Finland
Telephone (+358) 22506030
Fax (+358) 22503201
E-mail info.fi@eurotherm.com
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA
Telephone (+33 478) 664500
Fax (+33 478) 352490
E-mail info.fr@eurotherm.com
GERMANY Limburg
Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH
Telephone (+49 6431) 2980
Fax (+49 6431) 298119
E-mail info.de@eurotherm.com
EUROTHERM LIMITED
Faraday Close, Durrington, Worthing, West Sussex, BN13 3PL
Telephone: +44 (0)1903 268500 Facsimile: +44 (0)1903 265982
e-mail: info.uk@eurotherm.com
Website: http://www.eurotherm.co.uk
HA250385/7 (CN22887)
EUROTHERM
HONG KONG & CHINA
Eurotherm Limited North Point
Telephone (+85 2) 28733826
Fax (+85 2) 28700148
E-mail info.hk@eurotherm.com
Guangzhou Office
Telephone (+86 20) 8755 5099
Fax (+86 20) 8755 5831
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
Beijing Office
Telephone (+86 10) 6567 8506
Fax (+86 10) 6567 8509
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
Shanghai Office
Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188
Fax (+86 21) 6145 1187
E-mail info.cn@eurotherm.com
INDIA Chennai
Eurotherm India Limited
Telephone (+9144) 2496 1129
Fax (+9144) 2496 1831
E-mail info.in@eurotherm.com
IRELAND Dublin
Eurotherm Ireland Limited
Telephone (+353 1) 4691800
Fax (+353 1) 4691300
E-mail info.ie@eurotherm.com
ITALY Como
Eurotherm S.r.l
Telephone (+39 31) 975111
Fax (+39 31) 977512
E-mail info.it@eurotherm.com
KOREA Seoul
Eurotherm Korea Limited
Telephone (+82 31) 2738507
Fax (+82 31) 2738508
E-mail info.kr@eurotherm.com
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail info.nl@eurotherm.com
NORWAY Oslo
Eurotherm A/S
Telephone (+47 67) 592170
Fax (+47 67) 118301
E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com
POLAND Katowice
Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
Telephone (+48 32) 218 5100
Fax (+48 32) 217 7171
E-mail info.pl@eurotherm.com
SPAIN Madrid
Eurotherm España SA
Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001
Fax (+34 91) 661 9093
E-mail info.es@eurotherm.com
SWEDEN Malmo
Eurotherm AB
Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Fax (+46 40) 384545
E-mail info.se@eurotherm.com
SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
E-mail info.ch@eurotherm.com
UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Eurotherm Limited
Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
E-mail info.uk@eurotherm.com
Web www.eurotherm.co.uk
U.S.A Leesburg VA
Eurotherm Inc.
Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000
Fax (+1 703) 669 1300
E-mail info.us@eurotherm.com
Web www.eurotherm.com
ED52

Major Functional items
Controller A (option) Operator interface Controller B (option)

Door catch

Print head

Configuration transfer port

A
Chart retainer (three places) Chart clamp

Platen release Memory card eject

Time reference

A

A

Consumables
Charts
24-hours/rev GDTW0394Uxxx 7-days/rev GDSV0394Uxxx

Print cartridge
LA250280

xxx = n of divisions from centre to edge = 050, 060, 070, 080, 100, 150

Other items
Attenuator (100:1)........... LA244180 Shunt (100 )...................LA246779UK10 Shunt (250 )...................LA246779UK25 PC Configuration tool........... LA246843 Controller handbook *...........HA025036

* One copy supplied with each recorder fitted with controller option.

ε
EUROTHERM

Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's name: Manufacturer's address Product type: Model: Safety specification: EMC emissions specification: EMC immunity specification: Eurotherm Limited Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex, BN13 3PL, United Kingdom. Industrial chart recorder 394 (Status level B2 or higher)

EN61010-1: 1993 / A2:1995 EN50081-2 (Group1; Class A) EN50082-2

Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply with the EMC Directive 89 / 336 / EEC amended by 93 / 68 / EEC, and also with the Low Voltage Directive 73 /23 / EEC
Signed:

Dated:

Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited William Davis (General Manager)
IA249986U130 Issue 2 Sep 02

© 2006 Eurotherm Limited
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form, by any means, without the prior, written permission of the copyright owner. Eurotherm Limited reserves the right to alter the specification of its products from time to time without prior notice. Although every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained in this manual, it is not warranted or represented by Eurotherm Limited to be a complete or up-to-date description of the product.

.

................ 14 SIGNAL WIRING ............. 25 ALARM JOBS .............................2................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24 ALARM TYPE ..... 23 LINEARIZATION TYPE .......................................... 19 PAGE UP/DOWN ................... 2............................................ 20 CANCEL .......................................................................... 20 CHANNEL ALARMS .................................................................................................. 24 OFFSET ..............................................MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE CIRCULAR CHART RECORDER USER GUIDE LIST OF CONTENTS Section Page TERMINOLOGY .................1 Mechanical installation ...................................................................... 20 EDIT/HOLD .......................... 26 (Continued) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 10 10 11 11 11 1........... 2................... 21 2........ 2.... 24 TAG ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 22 TEMPERATURE UNITS .......3 Channel configuration ..... 19 ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE .......... 20 GLOBAL ALARM ............................................ 20 ENTER .............. 25 CHECKING THAT THE TRACE IS ON ...........................................................2 Electrical installation ......... 11 PANEL MOUNTING ..................1 POWER UP ............................................................................... 23 CJC TYPE .........................................................................4.................................................. 2..................................................................................3 ALARM INDICATION ....................................... 21 2....4 CHANGING THE CARTRIDGE ....... 15 1.................................... 20 2.................................................................................... 11 CONFIGURATION TRANSFER WIRING ...... 19 CURSOR .....................................................5...............5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE .................1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER ............... 9 SAFETY NOTES ...................................................................................1 Channel inputs/outputs ........... 16 17 18 18 18 19 19 2..............................................................................................................................................2 Indicators .. 1................................... 23 VALUE FORMAT ..........................................................................................................4 KEY/DISPLAY FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................3 CHANGING THE CHART ........................... 1.......................5........1 Keys .................................................................................................................. 9 STATIC ELECTRICITY ............................................................5............ 24 ALARM THRESHOLD (SETPOINT) ..........2.........................2 BACKGROUND DISPLAY ................... SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING .2 Entering configuration ........2 INSTALLATION ....................... 2 BASIC OPERATION ..................................................... 1..................... 20 2....... 19 SCROLL UP / DOWN KEYS ................ 23 SCALE PAGE ........................... 11 SUPPLY VOLTAGE (MAINS) WIRING . 21 2... 23 INPUT BREAK RESPONSE ............................. 11 1....................................4................ 1 INSTALLATION .............................................. 11 PIPE MOUNTING ......

..... 42 SCALE ........................................... 35 CHARACTER SET ............................................. 42 Log intervals A and B ........3 CHART SUBMENU ............................. 42 4...........................................................................................................................1..............1............................................... 40 Language ..........5 Jobs .................................................................... 3..... 30 3..............................5 4.....3..... 40 4...3...... 3.........................................................6 Adaptive recording .................................. 40 4.....................1 4...............................................................................3...........................................................................MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE List of contents (Cont....................................... 4 CONFIGURATION ........2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR MENUS ...... 42 MESSAGES ................... 30 3........................................................1............ 39 4... 28 3............................................................... 31 3....................................................3 Scale print (Dump Scales) ....................................... 3..............2 4.............. 41 Chart speed .. 42 Printing .....................4................................... 42 Page 2 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 ................................................. 3..........) Section Page 27 27 27 27 3 OPERATOR MENUS .......... 37 4..........1 Password ........................................................................................................ 41 Stop After One Revolution ................................ 3........................................... 28 CHART ALIGN .......................... 42 TIME/DATE/CHART SPEED ................ 35 4......................................1 INTRODUCTION ..................................7 CLOCK .............................. 3..... 37 4........................3..................................................................9 CONFIGURATION .......................3....1 Chart on/off .. 30 3... 4........................................................1 Back-up battery ......................................10 CALIBRATE CHART .... 30 3..................................................1 INTRODUCTION .........11 OPERATOR MENU SUMMARY .................................................................5 ALARM SETUP PAGE .......1 4.....4 ALARM SUMMARY PAGE ................. 29 3....................................................................4 Logs 1 and 2 ..................................4............................ 40 Instrument tag .......3 Options ......................3...........................................4................. 31 31 32 33 35 35 4..............3 4....................... 29 3.......................2 Text entry .........8 SYSTEM ERROR ......6 ACTION .........................................................................4........................................................ 29 3............................................3 4.............4 4..4................................1 Display interpretation ................................................................3.......................... 29 OPERATOR INITIATION ..3 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION .................................. 29 AUTOMATIC LOGGING ..........2 Logs .......................... 35 4.................7.................................2 4..... 3.......3...................2 CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES .........4 CHART CONFIGURATION ..................................................4........................................................................4 4..................................... 37 4............................. 40 Remote CJ units .......................................................... 41 User chart speed ........................1..1.... 40 Remote CJ Channel ...4.........................................5 Password ........ 29 JOB INITIATION ..........................

.... 43 4.......................................................................................15 CONFIGURATION MENU SUMMARY ......................... 54 TWO PART SEQUENCES .... 46 TEST WAVEFORMS ............................. 53 4.............................. 45 OPEN / CLOSED .....................................................................................11 CONFIGURATION TRANSFER .12 OPERATOR ACCESS ......... 61 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 3 .......... 58 4.....6 GROUP CONFIGURATION ........................ 52 4........................... 47 SETPOINT CONFIGURATION ...6.........................................................................................1 Set Time ......9........ 50 COLOUR .................1 Range configuration .. 53 4.......................................... 50 4...................................................................................................................) Section Page 4....... 45 DAMPING .......................14 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION ........................ 57 ↵ TO RESTORE CONFIG .......... 50 SPAN A / SPAN B ..........................13.......................................................... 45 BREAK RESPONSE ................................................. 43 LINEARISATION TYPE ................................................................................... 57 ↵ TO SAVE CONFIG .................13 ADJUST .......... 55 4............7 OPERATOR ACTION CONFIGURATION ........10 INTERNAL EVENTS ................. 49 4....2 Alarm configuration ................................................................. 53 FORMAT .................................................................................................... 54 4............................. 52 4............. 43 INPUT UNITS ............. 43 INPUT RANGE .......................................................8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION ......... 54 4....................................... 53 4.......... 60 4.......................................................8..............5....................................................1 Input adjust ........................................................................................... 60 4................. 57 BAUD RATE .................................................................3 Trace configuration .......................................... 53 4................ 45 SCALED .............................. 54 4................................. 44 CJC TYPE ........ 59 4....9 MESSAGE CONFIGURATION ....... 59 4.............................8..................................................................................................................... 53 4....3 Display Group ..........................................5............................2 DV Group ................ 46 4... 50 LINE THICKENING ......MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE List of contents (Cont......................... 43 INPUT TYPE ...................................................2 .....................10.................................................... 46 TAG ........................................................................................1 Embedded sequences ...................................................... 49 ALARM JOBS .........................................6........................................................................13................................. 54 ONE PART SEQUENCES ........................................................................................................................6........................................................................................5..........5 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION .... 57 4........................................................ 50 TRACE ................................................................................................. 43 SHUNT VALUE ..................................................................................................................................................1 Log groups 1................................2 Chart adjust ..............1 Event sources ... 45 VALUE FORMAT .2 Set Date ... 55 4.................................... 47 ALARM PARAMETERS .................

.................................................................................................. 70 MULTIPLY ..................................................... 70 SUBTRACT ................................................................................................................................................. 6.................................................................................................................................................................................. 72 THIRD ORDER POLYNOMIAL .................................... 77 SWITCH ..........4 CONFIGURATION PAGES ................... 72 DV GROUP LATCH MAX .................................................................................................................................1 Level 1 equations ...............MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE List of contents (Cont...............1............. 70 7........ 72 DV GROUP CONT MIN ...................... 69 7.........................................2........................................................................... 72 DV GROUP CONT MAX ............................................ 7...................................................................................... 63 5........................ 71 NATURAL LOG .......... 72 DV GROUP LATCH MIN ................................................................................. 70 7...................... 72 CHANNEL MINIMUM .......................................................................................... 65 65 65 66 66 68 69 69 7................................................................................................. 63 JOBS ....... 72 SAMPLE AND HOLD ..........................3 Operator pages .............................................. 71 10 TO THE POWER . 63 5.....................................2 Relay specification .. 70 COPY ............ 6.............. 71 E TO THE POWER .........2 SPECIFICATION ...........1................................................................ 63 5............................................................. 63 5...... 72 CHANNEL MAXIMUM .... 71 ROLLING AVERAGE ......... 70 DIVIDE ....................... 70 CONSTANT ................... 71 CHANNEL AVERAGE ..................................... 64 6 ANALOG OUTPUT (RETRANSMISSION) OPTION ........................1 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................1............ 6...........................................................1 Configuration ........................................................... 64 5.........................1 INTRODUCTION ... 71 GROUP AVERAGE ........................................3 WIRING ........ 6....1.................................. 7 MATHS PACK OPTION ...................................................................................................................................... 71 LOG BASE 10 .....) Section Page 5 RELAY OUTPUT OPTION ................................................................2 RELAY WIRING ................................................................................................................................1...................................................... 6........... 76 ZIRCONIA PROBES .......2 Jobs ................................. 72 RELATIVE HUMIDITY .................................................................................................................. 71 SQUARE ROOT ............2...... 71 RATE OF CHANGE .................1 Six change-over (also called Form C or SPDT) relays board ........................ 78 Page 4 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 ........................................................................ 70 ADD ......1 INTRODUCTION ............................................... 70 MODULUS .................. 73 F VALUE ....5 OUTPUT ADJUST ....2......................................................................................... 73 MASS FLOW LINEAR ..............................1 Groups ........................................................... 74 MASS FLOW SQUARE ROOT ..................................................... 70 7......................................2 Level 2 equations .....................2 EQUATIONS .............. 69 7............

............ 87 8.......4 Introduction ...............2 User input (T/C.......................................................... 90 8................... 85 Totalizer configuration ......................................................................................................................) Section 7....................................................................................... 85 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required) ...................... 89 8...........4.......... mA......................................... 94 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 5 ..............................1 INTRODUCTION ..... 9...............................6 Source types ..........................................................2........................................................................................................3 CONFIGURATION ................................................ 90 JOBS PAGES ......................3 8................................MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE List of contents (Cont..... COUNTERS AND TIMERS .............. 89 ALARM PAGES ............... 9...2...... 92 92 92 92 9.............................................5 8.................4 8.......................................................................................2 VIEWING ON RECORDER CHANNEL ................3 8.... 88 Operator pages .......... RTD........... 85 8...................1 Introduction .............. 81 8 TOTALISERS. 88 Configuration ............................................3..........................4.....3 TOTALIZER COUNTER OUTPUT ...................2............. 92 9.....................................................1 Output and PV data ..........2..... 78 TIME STAMP .... 78 LOW SELECT .......... 85 Operator pages ................3 WIRING ............4 COUNTERS ..... 80 7........ 91 8............................5........... 88 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required) ............... 88 8.............. 92 9...................................2.............................2 Operator pages .......................... 91 9 CONTROLLERS OPTION ................ 86 ALARM PAGES ..........................................................................5.................1 8............................. volts or mV) ......4 Timer examples ................. 90 8............................2 TOTALISERS ....................3...................2 8................2........................................... 90 8.......................................................... 81 MATHS PACK UNIQUE PARAMETERS ..........................................................) Page HIGH SELECT ................... 88 8................1 8....... 78 STOPWATCH ..................................................................... 85 8...................................................5 TIMERS .......... 79 OXYGEN (O2) CORRECTION ...4 SPECIFICATION ...2 8.............. 79 PERCENTILE ....... 85 8......................................... 9............. 85 Alarms .. 85 Display .......... 88 Display .5.3 Configuration ......................1 INTRODUCTION .....................................................................4......................2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (CONT................................4.............................................2.........................................3 8.......................5......................................................................................................................................4.....

.4 Introduction .................3......................1 11..............................2 11............................... 112 Text file names ................3 CONFIGURATION PAGES .......................6 Directory .................................... 111 Card status ..4 DATA LOGGING (ARCHIVE) ................................ 98 11..... 11........................4 12...............4..........3................................... 113 File name extensions ......................2 CONFIGURATION PAGES ....4 GOULD MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL ............ 113 Hourly file names ...................................1 12...................1 Save ..............7.........7.......................................................... 99 Reading analog inputs ......9 MEMORY CARD CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW . 97 HOST COMPUTER .................... 108 12........................................................) Section Page 95 95 95 96 96 10 CUSTOM LINEARISATION OPTION ..................................................2......... 114 12................4................1 INTRODUCTION ....... 112 12............................2 Changing cards ..........................................................................2 Restore .................. 105 12.....................8 OTHER INFORMATION ..............4 12................................ 96 11..............2 WIRING...............................................................3 12................. 100 11...........................................................7................................ 97 11...3 Error messages .8. 102 103 103 103 12..1 Pinout .............................1 Safety isolation specification .........................................4.......................1 12.............................................................................. 111 Delete ................ 96 11..7...........5 XMODEM TRANSFER .....................................................................7..................8................................. 115 Page 6 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 ...................... 99 Channel addressing ...........................MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE List of contents (Cont........................5 OPERATOR ACCESS .... 106 12.........................2...4....................................8.........................................4..... 107 JOBS ..................2........................................6............................................................... 12............................. 113 Daily file names ........................................... 12 MEMORY CARD OPTION ... 12...............................2 MEMORY CARD INSERTION ................................................3 12........ 113 Rules for creation of files .................7 ARCHIVE FILES .1 Event sources ...........2 Archive interval ......6................ 11................. 106 12.. 114 12............................................................... 114 12.................. 10.......... 114 12..... 11 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION ...............................................1 Card formatting ..........................1 INTRODUCTION . 10..........................2 12................................ 111 12...................................................... 107 12. 114 12.........6 MEMORY CARD GENERAL FUNCTIONS ....................................................... 110 12.................................... 105 12.. 99 11.......................................................................6.......1..................... 113 Counter file names ...........7....2 12..........................................................................................................................4........1 Archive Configuration .............. 112 Automatic file deletion ...........3 CONFIGURATION SAVE AND RESTORE ........ 96 11.............. 110 12.....................1 INTRODUCTION ..............3 11...............2 System errors ......................................2....6............................................2 Termination and Biasing ........ 99 Function codes ............................................5 12.................... 106 12.................................

.................................... 116 13....................1.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE List of contents (Cont............. 116 13.. 119 14....................3 14.......................2................2 Safety isolation specification .................................... ANNEX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ....... 119 14................................... 116 13.................................................... 117 14 REFERENCE ........1..........................................2 14.........................................................................................1 Fuses ................................ 121 Input adjust not available (I/P Adj n/a on ch NN) .......................................................4 Invalid configuration .... 121 14........................................................................1 COSHH ...............2 SIGNAL WIRING ....4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS ...................... 121 Printer must be off line .................................1 14....... 121 14........................................) Section Page 13 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY OPTION ................... 119 14......... 120 14..........2 ERROR MESSAGES ..................1 Printheads ..............3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES ..........................2......1..................................... 14.............................................2..................... 122 123 127 128 129 131 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 7 ...........................................1 INTRODUCTION . A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (RECORDER) .........................1...... INDEX ..........2 Batteries ......................... A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (INPUT BOARD) .............2.................................... 121 Failure to adjust channel (Adj fail on ch NN) .............. 116 13.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 8 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

2. 3. it fails. eventually. for storage. and separation of similar materials (e. should wear a wrist strap connected (via a safety resistor) to the bench top. to a suitable grounding point on the rack. and can be damaged by voltages as low as 60 Volts. initially at the recorder chassis potential. The gate-oxide region of all metal oxide semiconductors (MOS) is extremely thin. should wear antistatic materials such as cotton. 6. Before re-fitting the board. 1. Static safe This means that the material in question: a) does not generate static electricity. to produce a small rupture in the oxide layer. Modern MOS devices have built-in clamp diodes which reduce the incidence of obvious static damage considerably. or boards containing them. This might not destroy the device immediately. or if appropriate. Leads of MOS devices removed from circuit should be shorted together using conductive foam or similar. nylon and skin).g. TERMINOLOGY Antistatic This term means that the material in question does not of itself generate static electricity. or circuit boards containing them. even with such clamping diodes. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 9 . MOS devices should not be extracted from or inserted into circuit whilst the circuit board has power applied. such as friction between different materials (e. It is possible however. For this reason. 5. All bench tops should be covered with conductive material (104 to 105 Ohms per square) maintained at the recorder chassis potential. and b) any device enclosed in such material is safe from the effects of external electric fields. Circuit boards removed from a recorder should be placed into a static-safe bag. Such materials do not afford protection against external electric fields. the containing bag should again be returned to the recorder chassis potential. nylon sheet). 4. Nylon clothing should be avoided. masking tape. Personnel handling MOS devices. Personnel handling MOS devices. but it may result in a gradual reduction in the performance of the device until. the following precautions should be taken when handling any recorder circuit board.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE STATIC ELECTRICITY High voltages (tens of kilo-volts) can be generated on the human skin through a number of mechanisms.g.

the protective earth ground terminal must remain connected (even if the recorder is isolated from the supply voltage). under fault conditions) hazadous voltages *. A switch or circuit breaker shall be included when installing this instrument.4V peak) or >60V dc. the Earth ground wire would be the last wire to become disconnected. In the case of portable equipment.g. the unit shall be made inoperative and secured against unintended operation. condensation. 3. Where conductive pollution (e. SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING One or more of the symbols below may appear on the recorder labelling. adequate air conditioning/filtering/sealing etc. 10. The supply voltage (mains) wiring must be terminated in such a way that. 4. carbon dust) is likely. the protective earth ground terminal shall be connected to a protective conductor. Before any other connection is made. The battery is not individually replaceable. under normal operating conditions Hazardous voltage levels are defined as >30V RMS (42. or disconnection of the protective earth ground terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault conditions. 6. ! Refer to the Manual for instructions Protective Earth This recorder for ac supply only This recorder for dc supply only. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. must be installed in the recorder enclosure. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired. should it slip in the cable clamp. 8.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE SAFETY NOTES 1. 2. if inevitable. double insulation should be used. Where signal wiring is carrying (or could carry. Any adjustment. 5. * A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ Voltages appears under ‘Hazardous Live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly. should be avoided as far as possible and. If it is suspected that the fuse is faulty. The line voltage fuse within the power supply unit is not replaceable. the manufacturer's local service center should be contacted for advice. 9. Intentional interruption is prohibited. Where this is impractical. It shall be in close proximity to the instrument and within easy reach of an operator. This recorder for either ac or dc supply Risk of electric shock Page 10 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . The nearest manufacturer's service center should be consulted for advice. WARNING! Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus. 7. if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous voltages*. maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage. If the battery does not function. shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer. It shall be marked to indicate that it will disconnect this instrument. the protection provided by the equipment might be impaired. consult the manufacturer for service information. shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved.

If there is evidence of damage. Inner: Terminal transmit Outer: 0 Volts Recorder 1 Inner Receive Recorder 2 Receive Inner Centre Transmit Transmit Centre Outer 0 Volts 0 Volts Outer Centre: Terminal receive Jack . With the weight of the recorder supported. the packing should be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed. 1.1 PANEL MOUNTING The recorder is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 1 INSTALLATION 1.jack wiring for transfer between recorders Jack plug wiring for transfer with host computer/dumb terminal HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 11 . and stored with the external packing against future transport requirements. the recorder is secured using the two clamp brackets supplied .11 for details of the configuration transfer facility. it should be opened immediately and the recorder examined. See section 4.2.1 Mechanical installation Mechanical installation details are shown in figure 1.2. the instrument should not be operated and the local representative contacted for instructions.2.2. 1.2 INSTALLATION 1. Once the recorder has been installed. Should the outer box show signs of damage. A user supplied and mounted switch for the supply voltage must be included with the installation.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER The recorder is despatched in a special pack designed to give adequate protection during transit.2.2 Electrical installation Details for connecting the line supply and for signal wiring are shown in figure 1.to . any internal packing should be removed. After the recorder has been removed from its packing. either at the top and bottom or at the right and left sides of the recorder. PIPE MOUNTING Mounting brackets to suit a 50mm (2 inch) pipe are also available. CONFIGURATION TRANSFER WIRING Wiring for the configuration port jack plug is as shown below.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

22.5 mm

345 mm

12.5 mm

Top view

Max. panel thickness = 25.4 mm

Note: Bezel and panel cutout are offset from one another horizontally

Door opens 100

360 mm.

Front view
Configuration Port

Lift latch to operate

Right side
148 mm 36 mm 2 mm

380 mm

340 mm

345.5mm Wide x 340.5mm High 2 both + 0 mm 13.60 inches Wide x 13.41 inches High 0.08 both + 0 in.

Bezel/door outline Panel cutout

Bolt Spring washer Washer

Panel cutout

Mounting Technique

5

30

Panel mounting angles

Figure 1.2.1 Mechanical installation

vertical

Page 12

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

1.2.2 ELECRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.)

Controller A

Controller B

1A 1B 2A 2B 3A3B V- V+ VI 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A3B V- V+ VI

+ + + -

4 5 6
Transmitter power supply Nº2

O/P 1 O/P 2 Alarm

Input

O/P 1 O/P 2 Alarm

Input

Print needles

Arm lift

Pen motor

Chart motor

Display Con 17

Con 7 Con 4
Con 12 Memory card Con 13 Config. port Con 3 Edge detect Con5 Internal comms

Con 8 Con 9

+ + + -

1 2 3
Transmitter power supply Nº1

'Micro' board

Con 15 I/O and Power

Con 16 Con10 I/O Board

Option board 3 (Re-transmission connections shown)
Output 1
+V -C +I

Output 2
+V -C +I

Output 3
+V -C +I

Output 4
+V -C +I

Output 5
+V -C +I

Output 6
+V -C +I

Input board

Option board 2 (Comms connections shown)
TX TX COM RX RX PU

Option board 1 (Relay connections shown)
I V+ VI V+ VI V+ VI V+ VI V+ VI V+ VNO COM NC NO COM NC NOCOM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC

Chan 6

Chan 5

Chan 4

Chan 3

Chan 2

Chan 1

Relay 1

Relay 2

Relay 3

Relay 4

Relay 5

Relay 6

Cable clamp for mains lead Connect supply voltage here (90-264V 50/60Hz)

N

L

E

Figure 1.2.2 Electrical installation - overview

Notes: 1. Access to terminals is by opening the door, then undoing the securing screw to release the platen. 2. Option boards are shown as 1 = relays, 2 = serial communications, 3 = retransmission (analogue output). In fact any option board can be fitted in any of the three positions. Up to three relay boards can be fitted, if no other options are fitted.

Undo this screw to release platen. Lift latch to release door catch

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

Page 13

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

1.2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.) SUPPLY VOLTAGE (MAINS) WIRING
Leave the Earth lead longer than the others, so it would be the last to become disconnected should the cable be pulled out of the connector.

N
Blue (White)
Figure 1.2.2b Supply voltage wiring

L
Brown (Black)

E
Grn/Ylw (Green)

The supply voltage cable is terminated at the terminal block located near the bottom right-hand corner of the case (see figure 1.2.2a). Care should be taken to ensure that only the earth ground wire (green or green with a yellow stripe) is connected to the Earth (right-most) terminal. The fuse in the main recorder power supply is not user replacable. If fuse may have been blown, consult manufacturer for service information.

Caution Although the recorder is designed to work from any 50 or 60Hz voltage between 90 and 264V, the transmitter power supply option is not. When sold with a new order, the transmitter power supply will come with the correct links and fuse for the specified line voltage. When supplied as a retrofit option, or if the supply voltage to the recorder changes, each transmitter power supply board must have its links and fuse correctly selected, or the fuse may rupture when power is applied. Figure 1.2.2c gives details of links and fuse types.

Link for 115V ac Remove for 230V ac

See figure 1.2.2a for board location

Link for 230V ac Remove for 115V ac Link for 115V ac Remove for 230V ac

Fuse type 115V = 100mA 230V = 63mA 20 mm Anti-surge

Figure 1.2.2c Transmitter Power Supply link/fuse details

Page 14

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

2d Input / output wiring Note: See section 11 for Serial communications and section 6 for analogue output (retransmission) wiring.5 mm2 (max) Figure 1.2.) SIGNAL WIRING I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- Shunt assembly Attenuator assembly + – + DC mA – + – DC V (-2V<Vin<10V) DC mV Thermocouples DC V (– 20 to +100V) I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- Min closure = 250 msec 3-wire resistance thermometer 2-wire resistance thermometer Potentiometer Contact closure (not channel 1) Input wiring Coil energisation controlled by Events Internal wiring NO Com NC Relay output (shown in alarm / power off position) Relay output wiring Wire sizes: Power: 0.5 mm2 (min) Signal: 2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (Cont.2.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 1. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 15 . For controller wiring details see section 9 and the controller handbook.

3a Open the recorder door Fig 1. Lift the paper locking tab at the center of the chart hub ('A' in figure 1.3a) and operate the cancel (x) key to call the Op: Display page. then use the page key to call the Op: Chart page.3b).3b) and onto the hub ('A') WITHOUT YET LOWERING THE LOCKING TAB. Operate the 'Enter' key twice to switch the chart drive off. Press repeatedly.3b Change chart Page 16 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . or hold continuously the enter key to rotate the chart counter-clockwise until the current time. as printed on the chart. Place the new chart under the hold-down tabs ('B' in figure 1.e above) the time reference mark ('C' in the figure). Lower the locking tab onto the chart. and remove the old chart by lifting it out from under the hold-down tabs ('B') and off the hub. Rotate the chart until the current as time printed on the chart is just clockwise (i. If there is currently no chart fitted. Op:Chart ↵ for Fast Chart Off ↵ to Align Chart ↵ for Chart On ↵ to Park Chart locked B A Chart unlocked C B B Fig 1. If there is a chart fitted. ignore the rest of this paragraph.3 CHANGING THE CHART Op:Display Open the recorder door (fig 1.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 1. Carry out the alignment procedure described in section 3.10 before returning the recorder to service. Use the page key to call the ↵ to align page. is aligned with the time reference point.

Lift arm Remove cartridge Figure 1. Lift the printhead arm and pull the print cartridge down and away (figure 1.4 Changing the cartridge HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 17 . switch the chart drive off as described in section 1. then the Enter key. Operation of the enter key re- Note: If the arm is lifted during normal tracing. When the printhead is lowered. before trending restarts.3 above. Then use the page key twice. Subsequent lowering of the pen will set the pen to its normal rest position.4).4 CHANGING THE CARTRIDGE Note: Care should be taken to avoid cartridge ink contact with skin or clothing Before changing the cartridge. the pen drive will stop.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 1. but the chart will continue to rotate. to park the printhead. the chart backs up 2-3 degrees and then comes forward to its original position to ensure chart motor start-up time accuracy. Use the page key repeatedly until the ↵ for Chart On starts tracing. page appears. Fit the new cartridge and lower the arm.

3) any option channels (derived variables.2345 Units D01 1. input channel 1 is returned to. For details about alarms in general. the display can be made to show alarm types or the channel identifier (tag) instead of its current value. the display enters what is called a 'background' display. Initially. When either of these alternative displays are selected.7 and 3.4) For example:09:15 29/02/96 12 Hour Chart or 29/02/96 7 Day Chart See sections 3. totalisers and counters) will be scrolled through in the same manner. Channels 'scroll' in this manner until all input channels have been displayed.e.03 Deg C Furnace 1 temp A Alarm 1 on channel 1 and alarm 3 on channel 2 are active. 2. This remains on display for 5 seconds. 01 1. showing the value of a channel in a format similar to that shown below. Which (if any) of these is required is set up in Chart Configuration (section 4. the normal scrolling process is stopped). the first channel on display is measuring channel 1.2 Alarms: 11 23 Page 18 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . an example configuration is given to show you how to set up an input channel to a known set of parameters. and chart speed. When all channels have been scrolled-through. the relevant channel is held (i. a power-on message can be printed on the chart giving any of: time. After the display and key descriptions.2345 Units T1 123456789 Units C1 12345678 Units (Measuring channel) (Derived (maths) channel) (Totaliser) (Counter) By operating the page up/down keys. 2. for full information about the Operator and Configuration display see sections 3 and 4 respectively.1 POWER UP At power up. so you can start recording your own traces with the minimum of effort.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 2 BASIC OPERATION This section is designed to help you as a new user to understand the display and key operations. 01 586. or if the recorder has not been configured.5. after which. if the display group has been edited to include them (section 4.6. the channel will be OFF. Only those items which are necessary to get you going are explained.8 if a system error is indicated.2 BACKGROUND DISPLAY After initialization is complete. If this is the first switch-on. after which channel 2 appears. see section 4. date.

2. The 'E' LED is illuminated while channel hold is in operation. unacknowledged alarms. Alarms can be acknowledged at any time by using the Alarm acknowledge key (the left-most key of the eight).4 KEY/DISPLAY FUNCTIONS Channel alarms Channel alarms 1 Global Channel alarm 2 3 4 5 6 20 Character Display E Edit/Hold Alarm Page up acknowledge key Page down key Cursor key Scroll up key Scroll down key Cancel key Enter key Figure 2. In operator and configuration pages.g. Figure 2.3) CURSOR The cursor key can be used in background mode to stop the normal scrolling-through of channels' values i.4 Operator interface 2. to display a single channel's value continuously (Channel hold) until the cursor key is operated again. to move round the Operator and Configuration top level menus b.section 3.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 2. Log Int 0hrs 0mins Log Int 0hrs 0mins HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 19 . The symbols flash until the alarm is acknowledged or are steadily illuminated if the alarms are still active but have been acknowledged.1 Keys ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE This key acknowledges all active. the Log interval page (part of chart configuration) has both hours and minutes fields (shown underlined below) which are moved between using the cursor. the cursor key is used to move from field to field where there is more than one item whose value can be changed. Operator Chart submenu .3 ALARM INDICATION Each of the six input channels has its own LED indicator on the display. A further alarm icon situated to the left of the display line indicates whenever there is an active alarm. PAGE UP/DOWN The Page up and down keys are used a.4 shows the operator interface with the locations of the channel alarm indicators and the operating keys. to move round sub menus (e.e.4. The cursor position is shown by the selected field's flashing on and off. For example.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 2. If the alarm trigger is still active when the alarm is acknowledged. totalizers etc. c. CANCEL This is used a.g. EDIT/HOLD During operation it is possible to hold one channel permanently on display (i. During configuration. To enter numeric values. To initiate changes in the Operator menus (section 3) c. The LED comes on (flashing) when any one of the four alarms are triggered and stays on for a period determined by the type of alarm (section 4. Again the icon flashes if the alarm is unacknowledged. b.e. to go to the next lowest menu level). To move you to the next highest menu level.1 KEYS (Cont.4. For latching alarms.2).4. the LED will be illuminated (flashing if unacknowledged) only until the trigger returns to a non active state. To enter sub menus (i. you can disable the normal scrollingthrough of all the items in the display group) by operating the cursor (right arrow) key while the required channel is on display.e. To cancel all changes made since the last operation of the 'Enter' key (described below). thermocouple types). To return to the background display from the Op:Display b. To confirm changes made to configuration. b. c. the LED will stay illuminated until the cause (trigger) of the alarm has returned to a non-alarm state AND the alarm has been acknowledged. To scroll through all menu items associated with a parameter (e. To enter the Operator menus from the background display. If the alarm trigger has already returned to a non-active state by the time the alarm is acknowledged.) SCROLL UP / DOWN KEYS This key is used a. 2. then the LED will extinguish immediately on acknowledgement. the LED will stop flashing and remain steadily illuminated until the trigger goes inactive. ENTER This is used a. GLOBAL ALARM This alarm symbol to the left of the display line becomes active if there is any alarm which is active (on input and derived channels. the 'E' indicator illuminates if a change has been made to the configuration. Page 20 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .).2 Indicators CHANNEL ALARMS Each input channel has a dedicated LED indicator to show alarm status. page. which has not been written to the recorder memory by operation of the 'Enter' key. For non-latching alarms. To scroll through text characters when entering text strings. d.5.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

2.5 CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
This section gives you a step-by-step guide to the basic configuration of a single channel (Nº2) to an imaginary set of input conditions. If you are new to recorders, it is recommended that you first follow this example, and then modify it to suit your own particular requirements. Section 4.5 gives details for each entry. Notes 1. Because of the difficulties involved in representing items which flash on and off, the cursor position is shown in this manual by an underline character. 2. The 'Page up' key is used in this description to scroll through page menus. The page down key can also be used, but the scroll order is reversed and will therefore not match the description.

2.5.1 Channel inputs/outputs
Before starting to configure any part of the recorder, it is essential that you know exactly what you want it to do with the input signal you are supplying it with. For our channel, a list of parameters can be written as follows: Channel number Input range Input type Input break response Trace Tag Alarm 2 0 to 1000 degrees C Type J thermocouple Drive high On Furnace1 tempA Tripped immediately if temperature exceeds 780 degrees C. Remains active until acknowledged. Log channels 1 to 6 on the chart on alarm.

2.5.2 Entering configuration

From the background display, operate the Cancel key 01 OFF

The data display area changes to the first of the operator pages. Repeated operation of the Page up key scrolls through the top level operator pages. (The page down key scrolls in the opposite direction, but is omitted here for the sake of clarity.)

Op: Display Op:Chart Op:Alarm Summary Op:Channel 1 Alarm 1 Op: Action Op:Clock Op:System Error

When the configuration page is reached, operate the 'Enter' key

Op:Configuration Password 00000

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

Page 21

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

2.5.2 Entering Configuration (Cont.) The password is set to '10' at the factory. The password can be edited in Instrument Configration. To enter '10', press the cursor key three times, then the up arrow and 'enter' keys. Password 00000 Password 00000 Password 00000 Password 00000 Password 00010

2.5.3 Channel configuration
Conf: Instrument Operate the Page up key twice, to call the top level channel configuration page. Conf:Chart

Use the up arrow key to change the channel number to '2' and operate the 'Enter' key.

Conf:Channel 1

Conf:Channel 2 Use the Enter key again to enter 'Range' configuration. Operate the up arrow key to change 'Off' to 'T/C' (Thermocouple). Note the other input type choices. The 'E' LED illuminates to remind you that you have made a change which has not yet been entered into the data base. Operate the Page up key to call the Range low page. The low range is 0 as required, so operate the page key again to call the Range High page Enter the value 1000 as follows: I/P Range Hi 1. Operate the up arrow key until '1' appears in the display. 2. Operate the cursor key, and repeat step 1, but stop when '0' appears in the display. 3. Repeat step 2. 4. Repeat step 2. 5 Repeat step 2 but stop when the decimal point appears.
'E'

Channel : Range

I/P Type Off
'E'

I/P type T/C

I/P Range Lo

0.00
'E'

0.00

'E'

I/P Range Hi 1000.0

Note: If you do not enter the decimal point, the recorder will interpret the entry as 100000

Page 22

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

2.5.3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.) TEMPERATURE UNITS Operate the page key to call the input units page Lin Type Type B Units are ˚C as required. Other units (˚F, K or R could be scrolled to using the arrow keys) Lin Type Type C Operate the Page up key to call the linearisation type page. LINEARIZATION TYPE Use the up arrow key to scroll from Type B through to Type J thermocouple. Operate the Page up key to call the CJC page.
'E' 'E' 'E' 'E'

I/P Units ˚C
'E'

Lin Type Type E
'E'

Lin Type Type J

CJC TYPE Use the up arrow key to scroll from 'Off' to 'Internal'. This is the usual CJC type choice. SCALE PAGE Use the page key to call the scaling page. As our scale range is the same as the input range, we can leave it 'Unscaled' and continue by operating the Page up key. Scaling is used where an input signal (e.g. 4-20 mA) is used to represent another type of input (e.g. 0-500 gal/min), or where, a potentiometer wiper voltage may be required to appear as, say, 0 to 100% instead of 0-1 Volts. VALUE FORMAT This page allows us to set the position of the decimal point for display. Use the up arrow key to move the decimal point to our required position (two decimal places)

CJC Type Off
'E'

CJC Type Internal
'E'

Unscaled

'E'

Val Format XXXXX.
'E'

Val Format XXXX.X
'E'

Val Format XXX.XX

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

Page 23

3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont. 'Absolute Low' appears at the display. Use of the up and down arrow keys allows us to scroll through the available character set for whichever of the 14 characters is currently flashing. alarm 1 of the four alarms is already selected. OFFSET Used to add a fixed value (in engineering units) to measurements. and we will use this for convenience. operate the page key to call the Channel : Alarm page.0.5. TAG This page allows entry of a 14-character text string to describe the channel. thus making it obvious that there is a problem. This is normally set to 0. When tag editing is complete.2 for a description of different types of alarm. the pen will move to the outer edge of the chart and trace at Full Scale. This page allows us to set Drive high. ·See section 4.) INPUT BREAK RESPONSE Use the Page up key twice to call the Break Response page.1. Operate the up arrow key to select 'Absolute High'.5. to re-call the Channel Config page Tag: Furnace1 tempA This completes the Channel Range configuration. operate the Enter key. The cursor key is used to move you along the string to the position to be edited.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 2. By default. Use the Enter key to call the Setpoint page. then Channel Trace. ALARM TYPE From the Channel :Range page. Use the Page up key to call the alarm type page. 'E' 'E' Damping None 'E' Brk Rsp None 'E' Brk Rsp Drive Hi 'E' Offset 0.2 for characters. By default.00 Tag: Channel 1 'E' Tag: Furnace1 tempA Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Alarm : Setpoint Enable Off 'E' Enable Unlatched 'E' Enable Latched 'E' Type Absolute Low 'E' Type Absolute High Page 24 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . The tag can appear at the display and in logs. Use the up arrow key to scroll through 'Unlatched' to 'Latched'. followed by the Cancel key. then again to call the enable page. See section 4. We now need to go to Channel Alarm configuration. such that if the wiring to the thermocouple breaks.

3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont. then operate the Cancel key twice to return to the Channel : Alarm 1 page.1.5.3 above). 0.6. 'E' On going active On going active Alarm : Job 1 Channel : Alarm 1 Use the Page up key to call the Channel : Trace page Channel : Trace HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 25 . The 'On going Active' action is as required. then the Cancel key to return to the Alarm : Setpoint page. and our alarm configuration is now complete.) ALARM THRESHOLD (SETPOINT) Type Absolute High Threshold Operate the Page up key to call the Threshold page.00 Threshold 780. Operate the Enter key to enter the changes made so far. until 'Send log 1 to chart' appears. 'E' Threshold 780. ALARM JOBS Use the Page up key to call the Alarm Job 1 page. Initially. Operate the Enter key to confirm the setting.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 2. 'E' Chart span B Ch 1 'E' Chart Span B for All 'E' Disable all alarms 'E' Ack all alarms 'E' Send log 1 to chart Page to the actions choice. then operate the page key.00 Use the up arrow and cursor keys to set the threshold to 780.00 Alarm : Setpoint Alarm : Job 1 No Action 'E' Chart Online Use the up arrow key repeatedly to scroll through the available jobs.5. The contents can be changed in log configuration as described in section 4. In this case the decimal point is in the right place and does not need to be entered. log 1 contains input channels 1 to 6. using the technique described for input range (section 2.00. and operate the Enter key.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

2.5.3 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION (Cont.) CHECKING THAT THE TRACE IS ON Use the Enter key to call the trace on/off page If the trace is off, use either arrow key to scroll to 'On'. Trace On Use the Enter key to confirm the changes, then the Cancel key repeatedly, until the Operator menus are reached. Trace On Channel : Trace

Trace Off
'E'

Use the page or cancel key repeatedly until the 'Op: display' screen is displayed, then press the Enter key to return to the background display.

Channel : Trace

Conf:Channel 2

Op: Configuration

OP:Display Since your input signals will almost certainly be different from those described above, the recorder will display its over or under range display. To cure this you must re-enter the configuration menus and set all your channels to suit your particular input signals. 02 < Range If you want to do more than the very basic configuration given above, details are to be found in section 4 of this manual, or in the relevant option sections as appropriate. deg C

02 > Range

deg C

Page 26

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

3 OPERATOR MENUS 3.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the operator menu structure of the basic recorder. For details of Options such as relays, analog retransmission, derived variables (math), memory card or serial communications; see the relevant option section.

3.2 TOP LEVEL OPERATOR MENUS
As described in section 2, the recorder goes into 'background mode' on power-up, showing the value of a channel or other process variable, as configured. In order to enter the operator menus, the 'Cancel' (X) key is used. This brings the following to the display: Op:Display This allows a return to the background display using the enter key or entry to other Operator pages, using the 'Page' keys. The other Top level operator pages (excluding options) are: Op:Chart Op:Alarm Summary Op:Alarm setup OP:Action Op:Clock
Page up key Cancel key

Op:System error Op:Configuration OP:Calibrate chart
Page down key

3.3 CHART SUBMENU
This allows the operator to carry out the following functions, unless his access is restricted as described in Section 4.13 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Switch the chart drive on and off Park the printhead for the replacement of chart or print head Align the chart time. Display current chart speed To initiate logging to chart. To print scales on the chart immediately instead of waiting for their normal cycle time to come round.

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

Page 27

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE

3.3 CHART SUBMENU (Cont.)
Op:Chart

for Fast Chart Off

for Chart Off Please wait Speed is HHH hour for Chart On to Send Log 1 Please wait

to Send Log 2

to Park

Printhead parks

to Dump Scales

to Align Chart

Speed is HHH hour

Chart advances 0.2mm per operation or at 1 rev/hr if held continuously.

Figure 3.3 Chart Operator Menus

3.3.1 Chart on/off
If access is allowed (section 4.13), the operator can switch the chart drive on and off as required. When the chart is off, the printhead can be 'Parked' for replacement. 'Chart fast off' allows the recorder to complete the current line of printing (if any) before switching chart drive off. 'Chart off' causes the recorder to print any queued messages before switching off. CHART ALIGN This function is used to align the pre-printed time marks on the chart with the time reference point of the recorder (see section 1.3). Single operations of the enter key cause the chart to move approx 0.2 mm at its edge. Continuous operation of the key causes the chart to move continuously at 1 rev/hr until the key is released. Chart drive must be off.

Page 28

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06

disables the automatic printing of the log at interval A (B). During 'Group configuration' (section 4. interval B being selected by job action. ↵ to Dump Scales 3.4 Alarm summary page This Operator page allows the status of all current alarms to be viewed. OPERATOR INITIATION The contents of either group can be printed on the chart at any time by the operator from the display page: ↵ to Send Log N JOB INITIATION The contents of Log 1 group and/or Log 2 group can be sent to chart and/or memory card (if present) using 'jobs' as described in section 4.3. If this is done. and if the relevant options are present. Two archive intervals (A and B) can be configured in 'Memory card configuration' if the relevant option is present.3 3.5.3 Scale print (Dump Scales) Operating the 'Enter' key from this page causes the recorder to print all channels' scales on the chart as quickly as it can. derived variables. Setting interval A (B) to 0hr. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 29 . 0 min.3. totalisers and counters can be added.6) these items can be deleted individually. log group 2 will be sent to memory card automatically at archive interval A or B. The log format can be set up to include tags or not as required. 0 min. see next page. Log groups 1 and 2 contain all the recorder's input channels.2 Logs When delivered form the factory.5. Setting interval A (B) to 0hr. Logs are printed in black with values in alarm shown in red.see figure 3.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 3. log group 1 will be printed on the chart automatically at log interval A or B.1. Figure 3. interval B being selected by job action. Where N = 1 or 2 .4 ALARM SUMMARY PAGE Op:Alarm Summary 11 43 13 22 31 34 For more details of alarm types and actions see section 4.2 For a description of the alarm display. disables the automatic archiving of the log at interval A (B). AUTOMATIC LOGGING Two log intervals (A and B) can be configured in 'Chart configuration' and if this is done.

Deviation value for Deviation alarms Period for Rate-of-Change alarms Dev in Ref 10.10). and the defining of the action to be carried out as latching or not latching is set up in the Operator Action part of configuration (Section 4.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 3.4. If access is allowed (Section 4.5 ALARM SETUP PAGE This page allows the operator to view the alarm type.6 ACTION This page allows the 'Enter' key to be used as an event trigger (Section 4.2) Figure 3. and are flashing if not acknowledged. followed by a subscript alarm number (1 to 4) .7 CLOCK This page allows the user to view the current system time and date.00 Dev 1.000 Figure 3. ROC rise/fall or Deviation in/out. Op:Clock 13:52:25 29/02/96 Date format (DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY) set up in Clock configuration (Section 4. As despatched from the factory.7).1 Display interpretation The alarms appear in channel order. it is non-latching and its jobs list is to acknowledge all alarms 3. Op:Channel 1 Alarm1 Use up/down arrows and cursor to select channel number and alarm number. View alarm type: Abs high/low.13) the operator may adjust the threshold settings. the label is 'Ack All'.5 Alarm setup page 3. The label which appears. threshold settings etc. Each alarm is presented as a channel number (full size).8. Edit setpoint if necessary using arrow up/down keys. 3.7 Operator clock display page Page 30 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

consult factory for service information. Configuration pages are entered directly without having to enter a password. will provide a minimum of 48 hours of backup protection at a maximum of 40˚C. Op:Configuration Password 00000 The password set to 00010 by manufacturer. the Page key is used to scroll through the list: Bad Remote CJ Temp Writing system fail Disk overdrive (archiving buffer full with no disk present or no more disk space available).MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 3. Note: The battery on the main circuit board is not a user replaceable item. If more than one is active.8 SYSTEM ERROR This page allows the user to view any system errors which have occurred. A fully charged battery will provide backup protection for a minimum of one month at a maximum temperature of 40˚C. If set to 00000. by a re-chargeable Nickel-metal hydride battery.7. 3.9 CONFIGURATION Operation of the Enter key from this page followed by a password. the battery is discharged. As despatched from the factory. Conf:Instrument To further config pages Figure 3. A discharged battery. the following errors can be reported.9 Entry to configuration HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 31 . the battery will maintain the time and date for approximately one month. If the relevant options are fitted. Battery Failure Clock failure EEPROM DB Cleared Battery-backed RAM cleared Memory Card Battery Low Memory Card Battery Flat DV Run Time Error 3. When fully charged. charged for one hour.1 Back-up battery The system date and time are maintained under power-off conditions. If the battery does not function. but it can be edited in Instrument Configuration. allows the user access to the configuration pages described in Section 4.

M 10 . M A. Note: Zero (center of chart) setting should always be carried out before the span (outer edge of chart) setting.M. 05 60 Up arrow moves trace right. If incorrect. or the down arrow to move it to the left.M.10a Chart calibration pages Use up/down keys to adjust trace position (Effects shown much exaggerated for clarity) -2 10 A. On initiation. The chart must be turned OFF to access this function. the printhead traces lines on the chart where it thinks zero and span are. Down arrow moves trace left . 20 . -2 0 Adjust zero first. Use / Figure 3. 9A 9 0 100 80 60 40 Figure 3. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .M. 8 08 20 0 20 40 80 0 6A . Op:Calibrate Chart Paper zero.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 3.10b Zero and Span adjustments (simulated chart sample) Page 32 5 A.10 CALIBRATE CHART This page allows the printhead zero and span positions to be set to chart zero and span. 100 7 A 0 7 .M 06 . Use / Paper span. the positions can be adjusted using the up arrow key to move the trace slightly to the right.

.11 Top level Operator Menu structure HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 33 . or to enter operator menus from PV display. Chart Alarm Log Switch on / off line..37 Deg C Use 'Cancel' key to enter Operator menus Use 'Enter' key to enter 'Page'. to confirm changes or to return to PV display.... (Password is 10 when despatched but can be edited in 'Instrument' configuration) Op:Alarm summary View alarm types View alarm status OPERATOR PERMISSIONS For security purposes....13) such that operator access to the items listed below is disabled (i. Set printhead to chart Op:Chart Turn chart drive on/off if permitted Park printhead Align chart time Display current speed Initiate log if permitted Print scales Basic menu only. A = 1 to 4 Op:Clock View time and date Op:Channel C Alarm A View alarm types View alarm thresholds Change threshold if permitted.e. N Initiate.. Y/N indicates whether the item appears (Y) or (N) in the menus as despatched from the factory...11 OPERATOR MENU SUMMARY Background Process Variable (PV) display Use 'Page' keys to move from page to page.... Op:Display Use 'Enter' key to return to PV display Op:Calibrate chart Use 'Cancel' key to ignore changes. Options not shown) Op:Configuration Enter configuration menu structure if password known.. Y C = 1 to 4 or 6.. 1 568...... to return to a higher level.... (I.............. they cannot be changed from the Operator menus)....MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 3..... Op:Action Use enter key as event trigger Figure 3.E.............. This list does not include options.. it is possible for the recorder to be configured (Section 4... Y Adjust setpoints (thresholds). Use Up and Down arrows to scroll through underlined items in page..

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 34 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

number or symbol appears. This process is repeated for all the characters in the text string. The above categories are listed in the order in which they appear when the page key is being used.2 Text entry A number of items (messages.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4 CONFIGURATION Note: In order to help new users. 4. CHARACTER SET The characters available are: A to Z. tags.. 1 2 3 4 5 Instrument Chart Channel Group Operator action 6 7 8 9 10 Clock Messages Alarm Messages Events Configuration Transfer In addition to the above.1. . but it is not necessary to carry out the configuration in that order. Note: A configuration tool.3 Setting the password to a 00000 subsequently allows direct access from the operator menu without further need for a password. < = > _ £ ˚ 0 to 9 (Space) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 35 .1 overleaf relates 'what you can do' with 'where you do it' and where in the manual you can find details of it for basic recorder functions (i. Ä ä à ç ê è é Ö ö ô Ü ü ù β Σ µ Ω δ 2 3 ! ❝ ❜ [ \ ] ^ ❛ { | } ~ Ç â å ë ï î ì Å É æ Æ ò û ÿ ¢ ¥ á í ó ú ñ Ñ a o ¿ ¡ « » α Γ π σ τ φ θ ∞ ∈ ∩ ≡ # $ % & ( ) * + .) require text to be entered or modified. to run on a PC.1.1 INTRODUCTION The configuration of the basic recorder is divided into the following categories.1 Password In order to prevent unauthorised access to the recorder's configuration. / : . In order to help you find your way around the table 4. Options are described in later sections. and then using the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the character set until the required letter. a to z. Diagnostics and Operator Access are included in the configuration menus. this password is set to 00010. but this can be modified as a part of the Instrument configuration described in section 4. This guide gives step-by-step instructions to show an example configuration of a single input channel. Text entry is achieved by using the 'Cursor' key to move the underline to the character to be edited. 4. a password protection system operates. units strings etc. options are not included). a brief configuration guide appears as section 2 of this manual. is available from the manufacturer to speed configuration and text entry. 4.e. When despatched from the factory.

6 Section 4.1 Section 4. to be edited Adaptive recording Adjust input Alarm Jobs Alarm Parameters Break response CJC (remote) channel CJC type selection Channel colour Channel parameters Channel scroll list Channel span Channel trace on/off Channels displayed Chart speed Clock setting Configuration read/write Damping Date setting/format Date embedding in messages Decimal point position Diagnostics Displayed channels Dwell period Event sources / jobs External CJ temp Hysteresis Input adjust Input range Input scaling Input type Instrument tag Language Line thickening Linearisation type Log contents Log interval Messages Operator action key Operator permissions Password Pen zero/span setting Printing on the chart Process value in messages Reference (deviation alarms) Remote CJ Restore configuration Save configuration Shunt Value Tag Text entry/embedding Time embedding in messages Time set Value format Configuration page name Chart Adjust Channel: Alarm: Jobs Channel : Alarm : Setpoint Channel : Range Instrument Channel : Range Channel : Trace Channel: Range Group Channel : Trace Channel : Trace Group Chart Clock Transfer Channel : Range Clock Message Channel : Range Diagnostics Group Channel : Alarm: Setpoint Events Channel: Range Channel : Alarm: Setpoint Adjust Channel : Range Channel : Range Channel : Range Instrument Instrument Channel : Trace Channel : Range Group Chart Messages Operator action Access Instrument Calibrate chart Chart Message Channel : Alarm : Setpoint Instrument Transfer Transfer Channel : Range Channel : Range Various Message Clock Channel : Range Where to look Section 4.5 Section 4.6 Section 4.9 Sections 3.12 Sections 3.4.3.3. 4.5.9.5.3 Section 4.5.5.1 Sections 4.1 Section 4.5.5.1 Table 4.1 Configuration parameter locator Page 36 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .1 Section 4.5.2 Section 4.1 Section 4.2.1 Sections 4.5.6.4.5.9.2.1 Section 3.3 Section 4.2 Section 4.3 Sections 4.3 Section 4.5.1.4.5.8 Section 4.9.5.3.1 Section 4.1.5.1.3.1 Section 4.8 Section 4.10 Section 4.5.3.4.1 Section 4.14 Section 4.12 Section 4.2 Section 4.2 Section 4.8 Section 4.4 Section 4.2.3.3 Section 4.4 Sections 1.10 Sections 4.5.5.4.9. 4. 4.6 Sections 4.5.1 Section 4. 4.1 Section 4.9. 4.1 Section 4.5 Section 4.14 Section 4.1 INTRODUCTION (Cont.11 Sections 1. 4.5.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.4.10 Section 4. 4.3.1 Section 4.11 Section 4.1 Section 4.11 Section 4.1 Section 4.2 Sections 4.4 Section 4.1 Section 4.5. 4.2.2.1 Section 4.5. 4.2 Section 4. 4.7.3.) Parameter etc.5.3.5.6 Section 4.

1. Group configuration also allows the group format to be defined.e. To include option PVs such as totalisers.3). 4. whether Process variable (PV) tags and instrument tag are to be included. they can be sent to memory card–. an event input.1. Normally.5 following. Logs can be initiated in the following ways: a. Normally. derived channels etc.4 Logs 1 and 2 Logs are alphanumeric reports showing the current values of a number of process variables. A list of job actions and 'modifiers' is given in figure 4. If a memory card archive option is fitted.3 Options Option descriptions appear in later sections of this manual. While active..MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. As despatched from the factory. interval B is selected by job action (section 4. Log 2 saves its group contents to the memory card at one of two archive intervals (A or B) set up in the Memory Card configuration (described in section 12).5).1. interval A is used.3. i.5) Note: When logging automatically: Log 1 prints contents on the chart at one of two logging intervals (A or B) set up in Chart configuration (section 4. Logs can either be printed on the chart. A modifier defines when the relevant action is to occur (e. the two log groups contain input channels 1 to 6.1. From the Operator menu (section 3.6.(section 4. By job action .3) b. 4.1. or if the appropriate (archiving) memory card option is fitted.3. Automatically at fixed time periods (section 3. a totaliser reaching a previously specified value and so on.g.5 Jobs Jobs cause the operation of the recorder to change as the result of an initiating trigger which can be an alarm going active.1.1).5). HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 37 . While inactive). interval B is selected by job action (section 4.1. archive interval A is used.3) c. the user can edit the log groups as described in Group configuration (section 4.4.

1.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.5 JOBS (Cont.) No Action Chart online N = Channel number (use up/down arrow keys) Chart Span B Ch N Chart Span B for All Disable all alarms While Active While Inactive While UnAck'ed Ack All Alarms Log 1 to chart On Going Active Log 2 to chart On Going Inactive Log 1 to archive 1 On Acknowledge Log 2 to archive 2 Log interval B Archive interval B Dump Scale Print Message Display Message Log Message N N N Figure 4.5 Jobs and modifiers Page 38 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .1.

2 Configuration techniques HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 39 . with the page and enter keys being used to select a parameter.2 below shows the alarm setpoint sub-menus in an attempt to illustrate these techniques. Page down and Scroll down keys reverse the order in which the menu items appear. Type Deviation in Reference 10. Per second Average 1s Only Page up and Scroll up keys shown.00 Type Rate of Ch Fall Change 1. Dwell 0s Returns to whichever 'enable' is currently selected. Figure 4. the Cancel key returns to the Alarm:Setpoint page from anywhere in these sub-menus.00 Type Deviation out Deviation 1.2 CONFIGURATION TECHNIQUES Configuration menus are treated in the same way as operator menus. Figure 4.00 Type Rate of Ch Rise Hysteresis 0.00 If the Edit indicator is not lighted.00 Type Absolute High If the Edit indicator is lighted. To return to a higher menu level the cancel (x) key is used. Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Alarm : Setpoint Alarm : Job 1 Channel : Trace Enable off Enable Unlatched Use page keys to move from parameter to parameter Use arrow keys to scroll through parameter choices Enable Latched Enable Trigger Type Absolute Low Threshold 10. and the arrow keys being used to edit it.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. the Cancel key cancels all changes made since the last 'Enter'. Conf : Channel 1 Characters shown underlined flash on and off when available for edit.

) string. K.3 Instrument Configuration pages 4. R Use Cursor and arrow keys to enter instrument tag (appears in logs if configured to do so . German Set Password: 00010 Language: English Remote CJ Disabled Scrolls through Enabled. linearisation etc.3 Remote CJ Channel When 'Enabled'.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.3. F.1 Password The password can be any five-character (max. In such a case.1. 4. if so configured. must be set up in the channel configuration (section 4.5) for the selected channel. ˚F. 4. The setting of a new password 2.2.2 Language English.3 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION Instrument configuration allows: 1. range.3.3. Kelvins or Rankine. You can set the password to 00000 to disable password protection. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 40 .section 4.5 Instrument tag A 16-character max. French or German can be selected as the language for subsequent operations. The temperature units set up in the channel's configuration must match those set up in 'Remote CJ Units' described immediately below. French. The setting of a different language for subsequent displays and chart printing 3. any other input channel can use it as a 'Remote' CJ input. Configuration of remote cold junction input Conf:Instrument Use Cursor and arrow keys to enter new password.1) Tag:Instrument Figure 4.4 Remote CJ units Scrollable through ˚C.2 for text entry techniques. Scrolls through English. any input channel can be selected for use as a remote cold junction measuring channel. the remote CJ units must match the units configured for the Remote CJ channel.3. Disabled Remote CJ Channel: 1 Use Arrow keys to enter channel number Remote CJ units C Scrolls through C. 4. the selected input type. descriptive tag can be entered. 4. thus allowing access to the configuration menus without further need of a password.6. entered using the cursor and arrow keys as described in section 4. Once a remote CJ channel has been configured.1. See section 4.3.

72 hour. Adaptive recording on/off. 3. Scroll through yes/no Log Int A 0hr 0min Use arrow keys to enter hours and minutes Log Int B 0hr 0min Log Int B 0hr 0min Speed: 24 hr User Speed: 24 hour Stop after 1 rev: no Log Int A 0hr 0min Print time: Yes Scroll through no. yes Print scales: Yes Scroll through no. 72 hours.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. 12 hour. This speed is used if 'User' is selected in the Chart speed page described above. from 1 to 960. off Figure 4. yes Adaptive Record Off Scroll through on. yes Print speed: Yes Scroll through no. 2.1 Chart speed Standard chart speeds of 1 revolution per: 12 hours. can be entered here. If 'User' is selected. 7-days or 'User' can be selected. yes Print date: Yes Scroll through no. Use up/down arrows and cursor to enter chart speed between 1 and 960 hours/rev. 24 hours. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 41 . Time/date/scale/chart speed etc. 7 day. data. Conf:Chart Scrolls through 48 hour.4. the recorder will use the speed entered on the following page. 24 hour.2 User chart speed A number of hours per revolution. All annotation stops (tracing continues) at chart speeds faster than 6 hr/rev.4. 4. 48 hours.4 CHART CONFIGURATION Chart configuration allows the following to be set up: 1. Chart speed.4 Chart configuration pages 4. User. Log interval for logging Log 1 Process Variables automatically on the chart. 4.

and they will thus not appear on the chart (even though they might trigger an alarm).section 4. The cursor key is used to move from 'hr' to 'min' fields.5) 4. When adaptive recording is enabled. and chart speed can be printed on the chart at chart on-line. 0 minutes stops automatic logging to chart at that interval (i. An entry of 0 hours. The tracing will stop. 4. it is possible that a spike or other brief disturbance in the measured signal will be picked up by the input circuit between chart increments. this feature causes the chart to complete one turn from the point at which it was last placed online and then stop. For log content and format. it applies to all channels.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. the recorder will put an extra dot on the chart without the chart being moved. date. if a sudden change in the input signal is detected.4.6 Log interval A is used under normal conditions.5 Printing TIME/DATE/CHART SPEED If individually selected 'yes'.e. time.4.4. A or B). SCALE If selected 'Yes' low and high end scale values will be printed at regular intervals on the chart. This means that even at the slowest chart speeds. fast signals can still be traced on the chart. the "Chart online" event source will become inactive and any demand annotation will print at maximum speed. 4. MESSAGES Twenty user messages of 20 characters each can also be printed as a result of job action. With adaptive recording enabled. Interval B can be selected only through job action (section 4. Page 42 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .6 Adaptive recording At slow chart speeds.3 Stop After One Revolution When selected. see Group configuration .4 Log intervals A and B Two log intervals can be entered here for the automatic periodic printing of log group 1 on the chart. and the up/down arrow keys to enter the required value.1.4.

Best accuracy can be achieved by using a current loop shunt of 50Ω or less (1. Linearisation type 3. The entered value must match that of the fitted shunt. mA. K(elvins) or R(ankine) to be selected. The appearance of some subsequent display pages is dependent on this selection.0 Volts at 20 mA). INPUT TYPE Allows an input type of Thermocouple (T/C). Ohms. Cont 1/2 (if controller(s) fitted) or 'Test' to be selected.5.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. Other input types are similar. Input damping 6. Shunt value for mA inputs 10. See specification section (Annex A) for accuracy information. or if the selected Input Type is 'Test'. HA250385 Issue 73 Nov 06 Page 43 . Alarms and Trace.5. Digital input.e. Scaling 4. INPUT RANGE The low and high settings should match the lowest and highest values which the recorder will have applied to its inputs. These pages do not appear for Digital or Comms (if fitted) inputs. allows a shunt value to be entered (normally 100 or 250Ω). This allows the recorder to select the best (i. mV. Value format (decimal point position) 5. most accurate) electronic range for your input. Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD). Open/Closed text strings for digital inputs Figure 4. and any parameters unique to a particular input type are indicated in the accompanying descriptions. The up arrow and cursor keys are used to enter the value (including the decimal point). NOTE: To ensure best accuracy. range and units 2. Channel tag (identifier or descriptor) 8. Input type. ˚F. V.1 shows the configuration menu for Input Type = volts (from a 4-20 mA input using a 250Ω shunt. 4. CJ type for thermocouple inputs 9. INPUT UNITS This page appears only for thermocouple and RTD inputs and allows ˚C.1 Range configuration This sub section allows the setting up of the following: 1. Comms (if communications fitted). Input break response 7. SHUNT VALUE For mA input type only.5 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION Channel configuration is in three parts: Range. ALWAYS use mA input type with current input through a shunt resistor.

4. Platinel.. MoRe. Comms (if fitted). F.00 Damping None Scale Units : V Brk Rsp None Use arrow and cursor keys to enter offset Use arrow keys and cursor key to enter channel name Offset 0. K.00 Use arrow and cursor keys to enter values and units text I/P Units C Lin Type Type B CJ Type Off Unscaled Scrolls through decimal point positions for displayed value. Val Format XXXXX. J. Drive lo(w). E.1 Channel configuration pages for thermocouple inputs Page 44 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . S.. Cont1 (if fitted). N. square root. U. x5/2. Scale low 0. Ni/NiMo. mA. G2. T. S. Drive hi(gh). D. C. Ohms. K. Scrolls through 2. Scale high 10. NiNi/mo. x 3/2. U. V.00 Enter low and high input range values. G2. External. Thermocouple types B. MoRe. I/P type Off I/P type T/C I/P Range Lo 0. Scrolls through Off.00 Scrolls through C. The complete list is: Linear.) LINEARISATION TYPE The linearisation types (if any) which appear on the scroll list depend on the Input Type selected.00 Tag Channel 1 Figure 4.5. Platinel. I/P Range Hi 0. RTD types Pt100. Pt1000. Remote.128. R Scrolls through Types B. RTD. R. Test.5. E. N. J. Cu10 Conf:Channel 1 Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Channel : Trace Scrolls through T/C. mV. Ni100. Cont2 (if fitted).1 RANGE CONFIGURATION (Cont. L.. Dig. D. T. 8. Internal. R. Scrolls through None.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. K. 256 seconds. Pt100A. JPt100. L. C.

operation of the Page key calls a further page where the known temperature is to be entered.1. 4. The up/down arrow keys are used to move the decimal point from XXXXX.4).g. The scaling low and high values are entered using the cursor and up arrow keys as for input values. VALUE FORMAT Allows the decimal point position to be chosen for the process value. thermocouples and voltages less than 150 mV) the recorder can be made to respond in a known way if a break in the input circuit is detected. DAMPING For 'noisy' slowly changing signals. The Scale units are entered using the text entry technique described in section 4. Internal. above. External or Remote to be selected as cold junction type. 32. SCALED This allows the input to be scaled (e.1 RANGE CONFIGURATION (Cont. Upscale and downscale CANNOT BE MIXED on a recorder Break response can be set to a. 8. 64. damping can be used to filter noise so that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly. When 'External' is chosen as CJC type.3.The break response for ALL CHANNELS on any single recorder must be selected as either: (upscale or none) OR (downscale or none). 16. External is used where the cold junction of one or more thermocouples is maintained at a known temperature.) CJC TYPE For thermocouple inputs only.XXXX. The arrow keys allow selection of 2.5. Drive lo (trace is placed at the inside edge of chart) Input 97% 3x Damping Recorder response Effect of damping on step change in input signal HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 45 . 4 to 20 mA input = 0 to 100%). Drive hi (trace is placed at the outside edge of the chart) c.XXXX (when set to X. Remote uses a temperature sensor connected to a separate input channel to measure the cold junction temperature of one or more remote thermocouples. 128 or 256 seconds.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.2. It is not recommended that damping be used on quickly changing signals. Internal uses the recorder's internal temperature sensor to apply cold junction compensation. None (trace drifts with input wiring acting as an aerial) b.e. the decimal point will "float" to the right as the number increases). allows Off. The input channel for the CJ temperature measurement is defined in 'Instrument' configuration (Section 4. instead of high cost compensation cable. Note:. BREAK RESPONSE For lower ranges only (i. This allows copper cable to be used from the remote location to the recorder. to X.

2 for text entry techniques.) OPEN / CLOSED For Input Type digital (not available on Channel 1). Hi.1 RANGE CONFIGURATION (Cont. the PV display consists of a text string or an open/closed representation.5. TEST WAVEFORMS When Input Type is selected as 'Test'.5 hrs or 40 mins Sine . These text strings are: Open. See section 4. the following four test waveforms can be selected and scaled both for tracing on the chart and for the displayed value: Triangle . _____. The strings which are to appear under open (logic low) and closed (logic high) conditions can be scrolled through using the up/down arrow keys. Page 46 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. Close. In. Lo.__-__.5 hrs or 40 mins TAG This allows a 14-character descriptive name (tag) to be associated with each channel. Out.1. This tag is used both for display and for logging.

SETPOINT CONFIGURATION Allows you to set up alarm type. For absolute and deviation alarms.5.00 Use up/down arrows and cursor to enter values. and for continuous jobs (e.g. Rate of change rise/fall.2a Alarm configuration pages: Absolute alarms. then stay permanently on until the alarm is no longer active. latched or trigger can be selected for the alarm.5. Dwell 10s Max 2047s Figure 4. Enable Off Type Absolute low Threshold 100.1.5 above. a hysteresis value can be entered to prevent spurious triggering should the process value 'hover' around the alarm threshold. When triggered. some of the display pages will be different from those shown. Trigger alarms are not annunciated. hysteresis etc. a dwell (or waiting) period can be configured. For all types of alarm. then stay permanently on until the alarm is no longer active. ENABLE Off. Unlatched. any jobs associated with the alarm are initiated.00 1442443 Hysteresis 0. Alarm indicators flash until acknowledged. For deviation and rate-of-change alarms. Deviation in/out.2a shows display pages for absolute alarms. change chart speed) continue until the triggering source returns to a non-alarm state. Continuous jobs remain active only until the source has returned to a non-alarm state (whether or not the alarm has been acknowledged).MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. the alarm stays active until the triggering source returns to a non-alarm state. When triggered. and if the alarm clears within this period. Latched Trigger HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 47 . using the up or down arrow key. Each alarm can initiate up to two jobs. Unlatched. Alarm messages are printed on the chart. the alarm is ignored. Alarm messages can be printed on the chart if alarm jobs trigger Customer Messages. threshold value.5. Off Unlatched The alarm is disabled When triggered. Latched. the alarm stays active until it has been acknowledged and the triggering source returns to a non-alarm state. Figure 4.2 Alarm configuration Up to four alarms can be configured for each channel. NOTE . Alarm indicators flash until acknowledged. Trigger Scrolls through Absolute low/high.relay action does not latch when alarm is no longer active. Use arrow keys to select channel Conf:Channel 1 Use arrow keys to select alarm 1 to 4 Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Channel : Trace Alarm : Setpoint Alarm : Job 1 Scrolls through Off. as described in section 4.

'Deviation out' alarms are active a. The alarm remains active until the measured value falls below (setpoint . The alarm remains active until the measured value rises above (setpoint + hysteresis) Deviation alarms Latest part of chart Absolute Low setpoint Absolute High setpoint Absolute Low alarm active Measured value Absolute High alarm active Hysteresis Hysteresis Earliest part of chart Figure 4.5.Deviation) + Hysteresis. as shown in the sketch below.2c 'Deviation out' alarm definition Figure 4. and remains above {(Reference + deviation) .5.Deviation) and remains active until the PV value rises above. 'Deviation in' alarms are the inverse of the above.) For clarity.2d 'Deviation in' alarm definition Page 48 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . ALARM TYPES Absolute alarms An absolute high alarm becomes active when the PV value rises above the alarm threshold value.5.hysteresis).5. the following alarm diagrams are shown with straight rather than curved value lines.2b Absolute alarm definition Deviation alarms require a reference value and deviation value and can have a hysteresis value entered if required. or b. An absolute low alarm becomes active when the PV value falls below the alarm threshold value.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. Deviation value Deviation value Latest part of chart Deviation value Latest part of chart Deviation value Deviation-in alarm active Deviation-out alarm active Deviation-in alarm active Measured value Reference value Deviation-out alarm active Measured value Reference value Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis Hysteresis Earliest part of chart Earliest part of chart Figure 4. when the PV value falls below (Reference . (Reference . when the PV value rises above (Reference + Deviation).hysteresis}. PV values increase from the right (inner) to left (outer) portion of the chart.2 ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.

2c and 4.rise alarm active 0 Earliest part of chart 0 2 4 6 8 10 Litres x 1000 THRESHOLD Sometimes called 'setpoint'.5. this is a value each side of the reference value. 1 minute or 1 hour to be selected as the period. ALARM PARAMETERS 50 Latest part of chart Rate of change . HYSTERESIS Allows a 'deadband' to be entered for absolute and deviation alarms. entered using the up and down arrow keys.2 ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont. PER For Rate-of-Change alarms. AVERAGE Allows a period of 0 to 9 seconds to be entered for Rate-of-Change alarms. the Value is 200 litres and the Time Period is one minute. both rise and fall alarms are triggered at 200 litres per minute Rate of change .2d. and the actions they can carry out are as shown in the Jobs description in section 4. This has the effect of preventing spurious alarms being triggered by transient changes in the PV value. a value.5. If the change in the channel value (∆PV) over the specified time period T (see below) is greater than D (∆PV/T > D) then the alarm is tripped. The value is entered using the up/down arrow keys. See figures 4.2a. The up arrow key allows 1 second. DEVIATION For Deviation alarms only. more than 200 litres/minute in the sketch) The averaging period can be used to change the sensitivity of the alarm. The dwell period is entered using the up/down arrow keys.5 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Figure 4. Two jobs can be set up for each alarm.e.5. The value is entered using the up and down arrow keys. this sets a 'central' value on each side of which the Deviation Value (see immediately below) is to operate.1. CHANGE For Rate-of-Change alarms only. If the alarm source returns to a non-alarm state during the Dwell period.5. allows a time period to be selected for the above change value. the jobs page is reached by operating the page key from the Alarm : Setpoint page.5. a time period and an averaging period have to be configured. In the accompanying sketch. such that noise spikes or normal oscillations in the input signal do not trigger false alarms.fall alarm active 20 10 Rate of change .fall alarm active In this example. the alarm is ignored. within which a Deviation IN alarm is active. DWELL This feature allows the triggering of any alarm to be delayed for a period configurable up to 2047 seconds.rise alarm active 40 Measured value 30 Minutes Rate of change . to prevent alarms being continuously triggered if the process variable value hovers around the trip point. REFERENCE For Deviation alarms. ALARM JOBS As shown in figure 4. and outside which a Deviation OUT alarm is active. The alarm is triggered if the PV changes by more than the configured Value in less than the configured Time Period (i.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. this allows a value (D) to be entered using the up/down arrow keys.) Rate-of-change alarms With rate-of-change alarms. this is the trip point for absolute alarms.2e Rate-of-change alarm definitions Page 49 .

3 Trace configuration This section of configuration allows you to: a. Line thickening With line thickening enabled. green.) and the scales are printed in blue for blue/red traces and green for green/black traces. the channels' scales are printed on the chart in the same colour as the trace. blue/red and green/black . For example you may wish to record a process warming up from say 20˚C to its operating temperature of 700˚C.5.5. an extra-wide trace (3 x standard width) is produced to aid long-distance viewing.g. In order to do this for channel 1. the input scale range will be used for chart span. Page 50 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . Trace Scrollable through Off and On. when the channel goes into alarm). c. a reduction in the life of the pen can be expected. Set Trace on-off Select trace colour Set line thickening on/off Set chart spans A and B for the channel Figure 4. Colour The following colours can be selected: blue. red. Span A / Span B This allows two spans (A and B) to be selected for the chart trace so that a certain part of the trace can be magnified under certain circumstances (e. b. For bi-colour traces. If Span A/Span B are left 'Unspanned'.3 on the next page shows typical Channel Trace pages.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. An alarm could then be set up as a trigger (to avoid alarm light coming on) at say. d. 600˚C with an associated job: 'Span B for 1' 'while active'. If line thickening is used for protracted periods. black. Span A could be set to 0 to 900˚C and span B to 600 to 800˚C. the traces swap colour every 6 mm (approx. and then to look more carefully at any small variations. For single colour traces.

00 Span A:Unspanned Span B:Unspanned Figure 4. blue/red.5. green. red.5. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 51 . black.3 Channel Trace pages.3 TRACE CONFIGURATION (Cont. On Trace Off Scroll through blue. On Line Thickening Off Span A:Spanned Span B similar Span A:Low 0.) Use arrow keys to select channel Conf:Channel 1 Channel : Range Channel : Alarm 1 Channel : Trace Scroll through Off.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. green/black Colour Blue Scroll through Off.00 Use cursor and arrow keys to enter high and low values Span A:High 0.

1 Log groups 1.6. archive intervals A and B can also be set up (see section 12) to cause automatic archiving of log group 2.3) or by job action (section 4. Log group 1 can be sent to chart and log group 2 can be sent to the memory card (if fitted) automatically. and display. Adding an item uses exactly the same procedure. optional derived variables. with the 'XX' being replaced by the PV number. * Note: DV appears only if the maths option is fitted. or to memory card (if fitted). In order to edit the list. Conf:Group Display Conf:Group Log 1 01 02 03 04 05 06 Option PVs (if fitted) Conf:Group DV 01 02 03 04 05 06 Conf:Group Log 2 Option PVs (if fitted) Include item tag yes Note: DV Group appears only if maths option fitted Include inst tag yes Figure 4. the log group contains all input channels. at fixed intervals as described below. Conf:Group Log 01 02 03 04 05 06 01 02 03 04 05 06 ’E’ 01 XX 03 04 05 06 Page 52 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . See section 4. and the arrow keys used to change its status from included (PV number shown) to excluded (XX shown). Log2.5.3.4.5).1. and section 4. If the memory card option is fitted. DV*.3) to allow automatic printing of log group 1 on the chart.3.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. When present. Two logging intervals (A and B) can be set up in Chart configuration (Section 4. Both log groups can be printed on the chart by operator action (section 3. The example shows how to delete channel 2 from log group 1.6 GROUP CONFIGURATION This allows contents and format of four* groups to be set up: Log1. totalisers and counters can be added to any log.5 for instrument tag. the cursor key is used to move the underline to the item to be added.1 for channel tags.2 Two log groups are available for sending tabular data to the chart. LOG FORMAT Allows channel tag and /or instrument tag to be included in the log groups 1 and 2.6 Group Configuration pages 4. LOG CONTENTS Initially.

then the arrow keys to set minutes to the next whole minute.10 (Internal events) for more details Conf:Oper Action Use arrow keys and cursor key to enter text string Latched yes Label:ACK ALL Latched no Figure 4. The seconds are set to zero and the clock starts on operation of the enter key.8. the 'Enter' key acts as a trigger to an 'internal event'. but cannot be printed to the chart. except that it determines which PVs appear in the scroll list at the display instead of which PVs are printed on the chart or sent to memory card. Use the cursor key to underline the minutes field. Date format MM/DD/YY Set Time 13:52:00 Set Date 22/04/02 Date format DD/MM/YY Figure 4.6 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont. The time and date are maintained.8.8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION This part of the recorder's configuration allows you to set the current time and date. 4. and the date format.8 Clock configuration pages 4.see section 7 for details.) 4.3 Display Group The Display group is similar to the Log group described above.1 Set Time Use the up/down keys to set the hours.g Group Average) .7.2 Set Date Use the up/down and cursor keys to set the current date HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 53 .MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.7 Operator action configuration 4. See section 4. and whether the trigger is to be latching or non-latching.6). 4. by a nickel-cadmium battery as described in section 3.6.6.7 OPERATOR ACTION CONFIGURATION This defines the text string (↵ to -----.1 Conf:Clock Use arrow keys and cursor key to enter hrs and mins. under power-off conditions. 4. When used from the Operator Action page. Use arrow keys and cursor key to enter date. and can initiate up to two jobs.)which appears in the Operator Action page (section 3. This group can contain all values available to the display and the two logs.2 DV Group Allows a number of items to be grouped together for action by a Derived Variable (e.

8) Embeds time and date TWO PART SEQUENCES The remaining sequences require an Item and a Type to be entered either as <Item. the embedded sequences will expand fully on the chart or at the memory card (packed data only) if present. 4. and may contain one or more 'Embedded sequence' each of which causes the current value of a particular variable (e. for display and/or to be printed on the chart as the result of operator or Job action. The sequences are embedded using < and > as delimiters to separate them from one another and from normal text. the 'Type' will be highlighted if in alarm. these messages can include 'embedded sequences' as described below.) FORMAT Use the up arrow key to scroll through Day/Month/Year and Month/Day/Year as date formats. Page 54 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . value of channel N) to be automatically included in the message when printed. t2.g.Type> or as <Item–Type>.g. 06) Causes the Item's process value to be embedded Causes the item's tag to be embedded Causes the Item's units string to be embedded Causes the items process value and units to be embedded. which must be entered as shown. The available sequences. Uses totaliser n as the source if TCT option fitted Uses counter n as the source if TCT option fitted Uses timer n as the source if TCT option fitted Uses event n as the source. It should be noted that if a valid date has not been set up. ITEMS Blank n Dnn Tn Cn tn En TYPES NO PV TA UN VU Uses the triggering item (e. 4.8 CLOCK CONFIGURATION (Cont.g. time.9 MESSAGE CONFIGURATION This part of the configuration allows up to 20 messages to be entered. Causes the Item's ID to be embedded (e.2. date. If the latter (hyphen) format is used.1 Embedded sequences Message text is freely editable. date format change will not work.9. alarm) itself as the message triggering source Uses measuring channel n as the message triggering source Uses derived channel nn as the triggering source.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.1. Entered using the text entry method described in section 4. are as follows: ONE PART SEQUENCES <TIME> <DATE> <TMDT> Embeds the current time in hh:mm:ss format Embeds the current date in the format (DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY) defined in clock configuration (section 4. Although the message is limited to 20 characters at the display.

MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.9.see figure above) Glb Channel alarm (Alarm on any channel) Glb UnAck Ch Alm (Unacknowledged alarm on any channel) Operator Key (See sections 3. If. Clock failure Event N (Another specified event .10.S2 4.10 INTERNAL EVENTS As standard.TA><-PV> then the current time and the tag and process value of channel 3 would be printed on the chart. and which can generate up to two jobs each when active.S2 S1 Event 2 Event Job 1 Send log 1 to chart S1. Message 1 were <TIME><6. there are six internal events.8) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 55 .Operator action) Power up System error (Section 3. If Message 1 were set up to be: <TIME><. which can be triggered by one or more sources. 4. Event 2: Enabled S1 AND S2 S1:Alm on channel 4 S2:Event 1 Job 1: Log 1 to chart On going active.4. For example.6 and 4. so multiple logical inputs can be used. Input sources can be ANDed or ORed.3 .) EXAMPLES An alarm going active on channel 3 has 'Print Message 1 on going active' as one of its jobs. instead.TA><6-PV> then the current time and the tag and process value of channel 6 would be printed on the chart when the channel 3 alarm went active.Stop after One Revolution). S2:Alm on channel 2. we could set up events 1 and 2 as follows: Event 1: Enabled Source 1(S1) AND Source 2 (S2) S1:Alm on channel 1.7 .1 EMBEDDED SEQUENCES (Cont.1 Event sources Event sources are: Alarm on Ch N (any Alarm on specified channel) Chart is online (See section 4. Ch 4 Event 1 Ch 2 Ch1 S1 S2 S2 S1. to send a log to the chart when any alarm on channel 1 and channel 2 and channel 4 are active.

then arrow keys to select channel number S1:Alarm on channel 1 S1:Glb Channel Alm S1:Glb Unack Ch Alm Figure 4.5 for a list of jobs.10 Internal event configuration pages Page 56 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.10 EVENT CONFIGURATION (Cont. but appears only when both are required (S1 AND S2 or S1 OR S2) S1:Chart finished S1:Clock failure S1:Power up Use cursor. Event : Source Event Disabled Event Enabled S1 Only S1 And S2 S1 Or S2 S1:System error S2:System error Source 2 list identical with Source 1 list.1. then arrow keys to select event number S1:Event 1 S1:Operator key Use cursor.) Conf:Events 1 Use arrow keys to select event number Event : Job 1 See section 4.

The Transfer function will overwrite the destination recorder's configuration. near the print head rest position.e.11 Configuration transfer pages.11 CONFIGURATION TRANSFER This facility allows the transfer between recorders.2. or between the recorder and a host computer (running PC configuration software) using a jack socket located towards the left edge of the recorder platen. 1200.2 Wiring to computers requires a cable (available from the manufacturer) that has a 9 or 25 pin serial port connector as well as the jack plug for the recorder. 4800. 9600. 2400. 9600. ↵ TO RESTORE CONFIG Operation of the enter key causes a new configuration to be retrieved from another recorder or from a host computer. see section 1. 300. from save to restore) Conf:Transfer to Save Config Config Saved to Restore Config Config Restored Scrolls through 150. 600. 2400. the other settings required are: Eight data bits. ↵ TO SAVE CONFIG Operation of the enter key causes the configuration to be saved to another recorder or to a host computer. 19200. ensure that the transfer is carried out in the correct direction (i. BAUD RATE Specifies the number of data bits per second at which the transfer will take place. 1800. 600. 4800. For jack plug wiring. Only the Baud rate is configurable at the recorder. 1200. so data transfer with a host computer. A converter may be required with some host computers to change the signals to the normal RS232 port with 12 Volt signals. Baud rate 150 Figure 4. 300. Details of this wiring are provided with the available PC configuration software. The setting (150. The configuration transfer circuit is designed for use with TTL (0 to +5V) signals. or 19200) must be the same for both sending and receiving devices. 1800. One stop bit and No parity.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 57 .

together with their 'default permissions' (i. These functions are listed below. no Chart On/Offline:yes Start Chart log:yes Chan Alarm Thold:no Figure 4. Switch the chart drive on and off: default = Yes Initiate Log: default = Yes Adjust alarm thresholds: default = No Conf:Access Use Arrow keys to scroll through no.e. how they are despatched from the factory). it is possible to enable/disable certain of the operator functions.12 Operator permissions pages Page 58 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. yes Use Arrow keys to scroll through yes.12 OPERATOR ACCESS For the sake of security. yes Use Arrow keys to scroll through no.

The process is repeated for a value near the high end of the input range. High point ready High Point is 0..1 Input adjust Note: Input boards are permanently calibrated and require no periodic calibration.1 View adjust Ch1. Once the reading displayed by the recorder has stabilized. and channels can be checked to see if they are 'adjusted' as shown in figure 4..13.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. Conf:Adjust Adjust : Input Use up/down/cursor keys to enter relevant channel numbers Apply to Ch1. the 'correct' value is entered..1a Input adjust configuration pages Adjustments can be removed.13 ADJUST 4. Text line is 'Unadjusted' or 'Adjusted' as appropriate Figure 4.1b.. Wait for displayed value(s) to stabilise (view other channels using arrow keys) then 'Enter'.00 Enter actual high value Takes a few seconds Adjustment complete Figure 4.00 Enter actual low point value Apply known high signal to input(s).1 Remove from ch1. Low point ready Low Point is 0.13. Conf:Adjust Adjust : Input Adjust : Chart Apply to Ch1.1 Use arrow/cursor keys to enter range of channels Apply known low signal to input(s). This feature allows input channels to be adjusted to make allowance for non-standard inputs.13. Wait for displayed value(s) to stabilise (view other channels using arrow keys) then 'Enter'.13. The technique used is to apply a known input at the low end of the input range for each channel in question.1 to Remove Takes a few seconds I/P Adjust removed Unadjusted Use arrow keys to scroll through selected channels.1b Remove/View adjust configuration pages HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 59 .

As shown in figure 4.MULTI-POINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4.10 4. After confirmation has been received.13. Conf:Default to default config Sure? Please wait Chan 1 Units Figure 4.14 DEFAULT CONFIGURATION This section allows the user to return to the factory set configuration.1).2 Chart adjust This feature is the same as the Operator Calibrate Chart feature described in section 3. the user can quit before confirmation by using the clear (X) key.14 below. the recorder re-initialises and returns to the background display (section 2.14 Default config ation Page 60 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

Totaliser. to return to a higher level. see the relevant Option Section. Top level Operator menu OP:Configuration Password _____ Use 'Cancel' key to ignore changes. Communications. thickening Channel tag Conf:Access Set up operator access permissions Conf:Group For Maths. jobs Trace on/off. Conf:Transfer Set up transfer parameters Conf:Oper Action Enter text string for operator display. Timer. User linearisation tables and memory card functions. colour.15 CONFIGURATION MENU SUMMARY Use page up/page down keys to move from page to page Use 'Enter' key to enter current display page or to confirm changes. Counter.15 Top level Configuration Menu structure HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 61 . Set action as latching or non-latching. Use up and down arrow keys to scroll through a flashing item's menu list. threshold.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 4. action. Return recorder to factory-set configuration Enter password Set : Chart speed Log interval Adaptive recording Conf:Instrument Conf:Chart Set: Instrument tag Password Language Remote CJ channel Remote CJ Units Use cancel key to return to operator menus Conf:Default Conf:Adjust Adjust input channel Set chart zero/span Conf:Channel Input type/range/units/linearisation type Alarm type. or to return to operator menus. Select 'Log' 'PV' or 'Display' and edit contents format. (Set jobs in Event configuration) Conf:System Error N = 1 to 6 N = 1 to 20 Conf:Clock Set time and date and date format Conf:Event N Set up source(s) and jobs Conf:Message N Enter message text Figure 4.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 62 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

6 0.1.2 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 63 . two or three relay boards mounted within the recorder.4 Power factor (cos φ) Figure 5.7 0. are set up as described in section 4. In alarm or power off conditions.2 Derating curves 0. 300 V RMS or dc (double insulation) 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation) Reduction Factor F F 1 0. Derate with reactive or inductive loads in accordance with figure 5. A relay board can have two.4 0.8 F2 F1 0.5. four or six relays. Number of relays per board Estimated life Maximum contact voltage Maximum contact current Maximum switching power Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz.1 Configuration Alarm types.000.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 5 RELAY OUTPUT OPTION 5.1.6 0. BS EN61010) Relay to relay: Relay to ground: two. There can be one. Pollution degree 2 (see page 2 for definitions).9 0. thresholds etc.2. the common and normally closed contacts are closed.5 0. 5. 5.5. normally closed and normally open).2 Relay specification The relay specification for resistive loads is given below. Each relay has change-over contacts (i.8 0. four or six 30.3 1 0.1. JOBS A single job 'Drive relay N of card N' (while active/inactive) is added to the job list shown in Section 4.1.1.1 INTRODUCTION The relay output option can have various numbers of relays.2. in which: F1 = Actually measured on representative samples F2 = Typical values (according to experience) Contact life = Resistive contact life x Reduction factor.e. Each relevant Process Variable can operate one or more relays using jobs. common.000 operations 250V ac 2 Amps 500 VA or 60 W Installation category II.

1 Change-over relay option wiring Page 64 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .board 2 (relays 7 to 12) .2.e. Where other options are present.board 3 (relays 13 to 18) board 1 board 2 2 ON 1 2 ON 1 board 3 2 ON 1 NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC NO COM NC Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 Relay 5 Relay 6 Figure 5.2.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 5.2 RELAY WIRING The following diagrams show user terminations for the relay output board. relay boards always have the lowest option board numbers).1 Six change-over (also called Form C or SPDT) relays board Lever switch positons for: . 5.board 1 (relays 1 to 6) . they are always mounted 'after' relay boards (i.

5 A + 0.5 V) Max. current limit 12. therefore.2 mA at load resistance: 1 kΩ 30 V into a open circuit 150 µA peak to peak 300 mV peak to peak -250 µA into a short circuit 370 ppm of output GENERAL Update rate: Step response (10% to 90%): Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz. C max. current limit: Max. series mode high frequency ripple: Max.0 µA per deg. 250 msec maximum Installation category II.2 SPECIFICATION VOLTAGE OUTPUT Voltage:0 to 10 V calibrated (max. can be set up using the configuration pages described in 6. line regulation (24 V +/. common mode high frequency ripple: Nominal output current. series mode high frequency ripple: Max. C of output -0. C +/. C of output -0.10 deg.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 6 ANALOG OUTPUT (RETRANSMISSION) OPTION 6. 70 ppm per deg. output resistance: Temp. C max. voltage limit: Max.21% of Output These figures do not include errors from the customer's measuring equipment HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 65 . BS EN61010): Channel to channel: Channel to ground: Performance: 1 Hz. linearity error: Min.3 V at load resistance: 2 kΩ 6. The type of output (Volts or mA) and the output scale.3 mA at 11. 80 ppm per deg. 6. voltage 18 V at 23 mA ) 4. at zero output: Temp.7 mV + 0. linearity error: Min. where a configurable proportion of a selected source channel's span is linearly mapped onto a configurable output range. following.1 V into open circuit 370 ppm of output CURRENT OUTPUT Current: Max. coeff. 150 mV peak to peak 300 mV peak to peak . coeff.0 µA 3. Pollution degree 2 (see page 2 for definitions) 300V RMS or dc (double insulation) 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation) See table below Performance in instrument at 20 deg. coeff.1. common mode high frequency ripple: Nominal output voltage.1 INTRODUCTION The analog output option provides one card fitted with either 2 or 4 retransmissions of input or math channels. of gain: Max.0 mV 1. resolution: Min.4.10%): 2. coeff. output voltage for minimum setting: Min. O/P set to OFF: Max. output resistance: Temp. O/P type set to OFF: Max. C Output Voltage Current Maximum Error 11. resolution: Max.0 mA. output current for minimum setting: Max. at zero output: Temp.6 mV +/. Additional outputs cannot be retrofitted later.2 Ω 300 microvolts per deg.18% of Output 30.2 µA 10 M Ω 1.20%): 0 to 20 mA (max. of gain: Max. line regulation (24 V +/.

000 Scroll through Lo. Hi.4 CONFIGURATION PAGES Figure 6.00 Scroll through Enabled.000 Enter Span values Src Span Hi 100.3 WIRING Either two or four outputs are present.mA or off O/P Type mA O/P Range Lo 4. Disabled Enter Offset value (GPM) (GPM) Output Enabled Offset 0.4 Retransmission configuration pages Page 66 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . Actual configurations depend on specific applications Conf:O/P Channel N O/P Type Off O/P Type V. shows a typical retransmission signal configuration.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 6. +V –C +I CON 2 CHAN 2 CON 4 CHAN 4 +V –C +I + - +V -C +I CON 1 CHAN 1 +V -C +I +V -C +I +V -C +I Voltage output connection + Current output connection Output 1 Output 2 CON 3 CHAN 3 Output 3 Output 4 Figure 6.000 Enter Range values O/P Range Hi 20.3 Retransmission option wiring 6. Select Channel or Derived channel Source Ch 1 Source Ch 1 Src Span Lo 0. Off On error drive Off Enter descriptor for the channel Tag INLET FLOW Figure 6. depending on the installed option.4. below.00 (mA) (mA) Select CH/DV number using arrow keys.

WHEN 'OFF'. Allows the setting of the high and low values of the source Ch/DV which cause the high and low values (O/P Range Lo/Hi) of the retransmission output signal. Allows a 14-character descriptor to be applied to the selected channel. shows the configuration pages for the analog output option. 'Off' causes the output to be set to its off state as defined in O/P type above.1 V ACROSS THE +V AND –C TERMINALS Allows the setting of the voltage or current that is to appear at the output terminals when the source signal is at Src Span Lo/Hi (See below).4. if the input source is missing). above. (Disabled) without its configuration being lost.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 6. use the cursor key to move to the numeric field and use the arrow keys to scroll through the available channels or DVs. Src Span Lo/Hi Output Enabled Offset On error Drive Tag HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 67 . When source type is as required.) Figure 6. Allows the output channel to be switched off. THE CHANNEL OUTPUT GOES TO 250µA AT +I AND –C TERMINALS AND TO APPROXIMATELY -1. O/P Type O/P Range Lo/Hi Source Ch Allows V. Allows 'Ch' (measuring channel) or 'DV' (derived channel) to be selected as input source type.4 CONFIGURATION PAGES (Cont. mA or off to be selected as the output type. Allows a fixed value to be added to the value of the source Ch/DV input to the retransmitter. Allows Drive off. 'Drive hi' or 'Drive lo' cause the output to drive to approximately 1% above span or below 'zero' respectively.g. Drive hi or Drive lo to be selected as an error output (e.

Conf:Adjust Adjust:Input Use up/down arrow keys to select channel Adjust:Chart Use up/down arrow keys to select channel Adjust:Output View Adjust O/P 1 Remove from O/P 1 Apply to O/P 1 Select required o/p channel using up/down arrow keys O/P N AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAA = adjusted or unadjusted.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 6.5 OUTPUT ADJUST This feature allows the retransmitted output signal to be adjusted to compensate for differences between the readings on the recorder and readings on the device connected to the retransmission output. The user takes the resulting value as indicated by the connected equipment and enters it into the recorder.HH Set required high o/p value (in engineering units) (default = 90%) High reading HHH. The recorder outputs a known value (10%* of output span) at the analog output terminals. 3.HH Enter resulting indicated value Adjustment complete Figure 6. The user takes the resulting value as indicated by the connected equipment and enters it into the recorder. The recorder outputs a second value (90%* of output span). 2.LL Set required low o/p value (in engineering units) (default = 10%) Adjustment Removed Low reading LLL. Page 68 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . 'View' allows the user to determine whether any particular retransmission output is currently adjusted or not. *These are default values and can be adjusted by the user.LL Enter resulting indicated value High output HHH.5 Output Adjust menu pages 'Remove' allows the adjustment to be removed from a selected channel. to Remove Low output LLL. The technique used is: 1. The adjustment can be applied or removed as required. The recorder then calculates a linear gain and offset correction to be applied to the output. 4.

The functions for levels 1 & 2 are listed in table 7. Scientific notation displays calculated values using a mantissa and an exponent of 10 (e.00 +3 ). called the DV group. etc. in addition to the measuring channels.1 Reset channel NN Reset all DVs Switch to B on NN Disable channel NN Disable all DVs Trigger Ch NN HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 69 .1.g. sample-and-hold.1 Groups Derived channels can be added to the log and display groups described in section 4.5. level 2 which provides advanced functions such as averaging. Level 1 functions Off Constant Copy Add Subtract Multiply Divide Modulus Level 2 functions (additional to level 1 functions) Square root Channel average DV Group average Rolling average ex logn 10x log10 Rate of change Sample and hold Channel minimum DV group latching minimum DV group continuous minimum Channel maximum DV group latching maximum Table 7.e. and level 3 which is a display format only .1 INTRODUCTION The math pack option provides 16 'derived' channels (DV1 to DV16).MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7 MATHS PACK OPTION 7. mass flow etc. The group can be used to assemble channels which are to be part of group averaging. The operator can edit these groups to contain only those items which are to be logged or which are to appear at the display. The option comes in three levels: level 1 which provides basic arithmetic functions.1 below.2 Jobs The following jobs are added to the list given in section 4.6. group max/min. relative humidity calculations.1. 1000 = 1. The Level 2 math pack option adds a further group. 7. not totalizers or counters).1 Math functions DV group continuous maximum Third order polynomial Relative humidity F value Linear mass flow Square root mass flow Zirconia probe Switch High select Low select Stopwatch Time stamp O2 Correction Percentile 7. which can contain only derived and measuring channels (i. or group reset of averages.

Div Ch 1 by Ch 1 MODULUS Takes the value of a channel.e.1 Level 1 equations CONSTANT Allows the entry of a constant to be used in other equations.00 Copy Ch 1 SUBTRACT Allows one channel to be subtracted from another. ADD Allows one channel to be added to another.Unless otherwise stated. values between -99999 and 999999. Mult Ch1 by Ch 1 DIVIDE Allows one channel to be divided by another. Maths channel reset 7. Op Maths 1 ↵ to reset 37. Modulus of Ch 1 Page 70 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .1.2 EQUATIONS Note .54 7. Also useful to import totaliser or counter values so they can be traced on the chart and/or. COPY Can be used to duplicate input or derived channels when more than four alarms are required. Sub Ch 1 from Ch 1 MULTIPLY Allows one channel to be multiplied by another. ignoring sign (i.3 Operator pages If allowed by operator access (section 4. always positive). a "channel" can be either an input channel or another derived calculation channel. The reset page displays the current value of the channel to be reset. so that they can be used in math calculations. Add Ch 1 to Ch 1 Value: 1.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. the operator can reset any of the resettable functions in level 2 from this menu.13).2.

taken every 10 seconds (42X10 = 420sec = 7min).2 Level 2 equations SQUARE ROOT Takes the square root of the value of a channel.71828 NATURAL LOG Takes the Naperian log of the value of the specified input or derived channel. 10 TO THE POWER Raises 10 to the power of the value of the specified input or derived channel.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. The first reading is discarded when the 43rd one is taken and so on. Square root of Ch 1 Average of Ch 1 Time interval 1m GROUP AVERAGE Provides the current average value of all the channels in the DV group i.e.2.a seven minute average can be 42 readings. ROLLING AVERAGE Takes the average value of a channel sampled a specified number of times (up to 9999) each at a specified time period in seconds. The function may be globally reset. LOG BASE 10 Takes base 10 log of the specified input or derived channel's value. Produces a system error if signal value goes negative. Example . CHANNEL AVERAGE Provides the average value of a channel over a configurable time interval. The function may be globally reset. (DVa + DVb + -------+ DVc)/R where R is the total number of DVs in the group. e To Power of Ch 1 Natural log of Ch 1 10 to Power of Ch 1 Log base 10 of Ch 1 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 71 . e ≈ 2. DV Group average Average of Ch 1 Sample Int 10s Num of Points 42 E TO THE POWER Raises e to the power of the value of the specified channel. then repeats.

2. until reset. Rate of Chg of Ch 1 Sample period 1s Sample rate SAMPLE AND HOLD When triggered.00 Page 72 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. CHANNEL MAXIMUM Outputs the highest value that the specified channel has reached since initiation or last reset. CHANNEL MINIMUM Saves the lowest value that the specified channel has reached since initiation or last reset. with a specified sample rate which will determine the number of measurements being taken during that time period. DV GROUP LATCH MAX Outputs the highest value reached by any channel in the DV group since initiation or last reset.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont. consult factory. Constants less than 0.) RATE OF CHANGE Calculates the rate at which the selected channel's value changes over a specified time period. DV GROUP CONT MAX Outputs the current value of whichever channel in the DV group has the highest value. DV GROUP CONT MIN Outputs the current value of whichever channel in the DV group has the lowest value.0001 or greater than 99999 require further configuration to execute. retains the current value of the specified channel's value. 1s Sample & Hold Ch 1 Minimum of Ch 1 DV Grp Latch Min DV Grp Cont Min Maximum of Ch 1 DV Grp Latch Max DV Grp Cont Max THIRD ORDER POLYNOMIAL Provides a third order polynomial curve fit: A0 + A1x + A2x2 +A3x3 where A0 to A3 are constants and x is the specified channel's value.00 A2 1.00 A1 1. DV GROUP LATCH MIN Outputs the lowest value reached by any channel in the DV group since initiation or last reset.00 A3 1. Polynomial of Ch 1 A0 1.

1˚C for FO.66. using the following equation: Fvalt = Fvalt -1 + T × 10 Where Fvalt = Fvalt-1 = T= mat = Target temp = Z= = mat .66-4 F VALUE To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Temperature (for temperatures below. Wet temp Ch 1 Dry temp Ch 1 Atm Pressure Ch 1 Psych Const 6.00 Z Value 1. = 20˚C for FH HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 73 .e. (the exponent "-4" is fixed).2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. at and above Sterilizing Temperature) both in dry (FH) and steam (FO) sterilizing environments.t arg et temp Z F value Ch 1 Ster. The mantissa of the psychrometric constant times the pressure should equal 6. 1 bar = 14.7 psia.g. Temp 1.2. a 0. 170˚C for FH Temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 reduction in killing efficiency 10˚C for FO.66 .9 bar times a 7.00 F value at time t (minutes) F value last iteration Internal recorder iteration rate (minutes) Value of temperature measuring channel 121.40 constant equals 6.) RELATIVE HUMIDITY To determine the relative humidity percentage using wet and dry temperature readings in ˚F and atmospheric pressure inputs in bars.

4 296. this becomes: Mass flow = where: mat = mbt = mct = md = md × ma t × mb t mc t the value. of the channel measuring the absolute pressure of the fluid the value. Flowt = measured value from the flow meter at time t AbsPt = absolute pressure of the fluid at time t Temp = absolute temperature of the fluid in Kelvins K = scaling factor (see below) Rg = specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see below) Z = compressibility factor (see below) For the recorder user. The equation solved is: K Flowt × AbsPt Qmt = x Rg × Z Temp where: Qmt = mass flow at time t.2 Common gas constants Page 74 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .4 4116.4 Table 7.8 259. at time t. derived from the equation: K Rg × Z Const = where: K = a scaling factor (see below) Rg = specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see below) Z = compressibility factor (see below) SCALING FACTOR K This is derived from the equation: S K= mamax where: S = The full scale output from the flow meter mamax = the full scale input of the channel which is reading the flow meter output SPECIFIC GAS CONSTANT (Rg) The specific gas constant values are available from published tables. at time t. For this reason.2 Gas Air Ammonia Carbon dioxide Carbon monoxide Ethylene Hydrogen Methane Nitrogen Oxygen Propane Steam RG (J/kg-K) 287. the manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of results obtained by using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. Independent verification is recommended before this recorder is used for custody transfer. in the same flow units as 'Flowt'. of the channel measuring the fluid temperature in Kelvins a constant.5 461. the Rg values for a number of common gases are given in table 7.0 518.8 296.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.) MASS FLOW LINEAR Note: the overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. of the channel measuring the flow meter output the value.2 188.1 488. For convenience.9 296.2. at time t.8 188.

00 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 75 .2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont. absolute temperature and the absolute pressure channels and the constant Flow Ch 1 Temperature Ch 1 Abs Press Ch 1 Constant 1. the Z-factor can be established experimentally.2. CONFIGURATION PAGES Enter the flow rate.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. and is given by the equation: Z= Where: Z= P= T= ρ= P 1 × T ρ Compressibility factor Absolute pressure of the gas Absolute temperature of the gas Gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables) Alternatively.) COMPRESSIBILITY FACTOR (Z-FACTOR) The compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas deviates from a 'perfect' gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions.

2. at time t. Independent verification is recommended before this recorder is used for custody transfer. the manufacturer takes no responsibility for the accuracy of results obtained by using the mass flow equations implemented in the maths pack. absolute pressure of the fluid at time t absolute temperature of the fluid in Kelvins scaling factor (see below) specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see below) compressibility factor (see below) For the recorder user.) MASS FLOW SQUARE ROOT Note: the overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. of the channel measuring the flow meter output the value. in the same flow units as 'Flowt'.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. of the channel measuring the fluid temperature in Kelvins a constant. derived from the equation: K2 Rg × Z a scaling factor (see below) specific gas constant in J/(kg-K) (see linear mass flow above) compressibility factor (see linear mass flow above) SCALING FACTOR K This is derived from the equation: S K= mamax where: S = The full scale output from the flow meter mamax = the full scale input of the channel which is reading the flow meter output Differ Press Ch 1 CONFIGURATION PAGES Enter the differential pressure. at time t. absolute temperature and the absolute pressure channels and the constant Temperature Ch 1 Abs Press Ch 1 Constant 1. measured value of the differential pressure across the orifice plate at time t. of the channel measuring the absolute pressure of the fluid the value. this becomes: Mass flow = where: mat = mbt = mct = md = Const = md x ma t x mb t mc t where: K= Rg = Z= the value.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont. The equation solved is: Qmt = where: Qmt = DeltaPt = AbsPt = Temp = K= Rg = Z= K2 DeltaPt × AbsPt × Rg × Z Tempt mass flow at time t. in kPa. at time t.00 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 76 . For this reason.

10 0. CONFIGURATION PAGES Enter channel numbers for Probe temperature.95% for air).MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. The temperature measuring channel will probably be scaled at 273 to 1800K.95% for air) E = Electromotive force across the probe in mV T = Probe temperature in Kelvins In order to obtain a useful result. At elevated temperatures. while the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere.2. and 0 to 20% in kilns. Probe emf and reference % measurements. The probe output obeys a law. OXYGEN CONCENTRATION MEASUREMENT In order to measure oxygen concentrations. The channel measuring the probe voltage will normally need a scale of 0 to 100 mV. it is necessary to scale the inputs and outputs correctly. such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe temperature and to the log of partial pressure of oxygen difference between its two ends. air provides a suitable reference (reference input = 20. described by the Nernst oxygen equation: P2 = P 1 E where.00 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 77 . The temperature of the probe is usually measured using a type K or a type R thermocouple. The temperature effect on the thermocouple is such that for successful operation with the recorder. one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be measured.0496 × T P2 = Partial pressure of oxygen in the sampled gas (%) P1 = Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (%) (20. Probe temp Ch 1 Probe EMF Ch 1 Reference 1.) ZIRCONIA PROBES A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia. the probe temperature must be greater than 973K (700˚C). while the output scaling would typically be 0 to 5 % for boiler flues.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont. For most applications.

with a scale of 0 to -100 kilocalories. A typical input range would be 40 to 1124 mV. Above this value. it will appear in the specified format .MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. (disable channel NN) and can also be reset to zero (Reset channel NN). For any element. if the relevant switch is active. but if one of the date/time formats described in section 7. the value can be displayed in hours/minutes/seconds.2. no oxidation will occur. Switch Ch A Ch 1 Switch Ch B Ch 1 Higher of Chs 1. the probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere according to: E = (10. scaled in units of oxygen potential. I.2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont. HIGH SELECT This function has two channel inputs. LOW SELECT This function has two channel inputs. The stopwatch can be held (disabled) by a maths pack 'job.84 × T) + 40mV between 870 to 1450 K.00457 × T × logOp' where. using a standard input channel of the recorder.) OXYGEN POTENTIAL MEASUREMENT The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measure of its ability to oxidise or reduce. because oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to 1450 Kelvins. and copies whichever has the lower value.E. copy the value of source channel B. the material will oxidise. 1 STOPWATCH The stopwatch starts counting as soon as the function is configured.) ZIRCONIA PROBES (Cont. below it. Oxygen potential is given by the equation: Op = 0. SWITCH This function copies one of two channel values according to the state of its 'Select channel B for NN' job. When logged to the chart. and copies whichever has the higher value. 1 Lower of Chs 1. Op = Required oxygen potential (kilocalories) T = Probe temperature (Kelvin) Op′ = Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere in atmospheres It can be shown that. Such scaling would be appropriate over the temperature range 873 to 1473 K (600 to 1200 ˚C). Thus it is possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe. Page 78 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . a value of oxygen potential (free energy of formation) is known.3 is selected. The value is normally displayed as a number of 1/4 seconds. else copy the value of source channel A.

2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont. To prevent the calculated value from going lower than the measured value.) TIME STAMP When triggered by a maths pack job (Trigger channel NN) becoming active. OXYGEN (O2) CORRECTION This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring (CEM) applications. The time or the date can be displayed according to the configured value format. gas = the measured gas. O2 = specified oxygen entered as a constant 5-digit value (prescribed for the particular process). Spec. add a "High Select" DV channel with inputs from the measured gas channel and the O2 calculation above (Qmt). This may not be allowed by some regulatory agencies. two channels.9% . etc. gas 20. Meas. Note: The display format selected affects only the value displayed. This internal value is a number of 1/4 seconds elapsed either since enabled (stopwatch) or since the 1st January 1988 (Time stamp). the actual measured gas channel value will be chosen when the Qmt calculation is lower. CONFIGURATION PAGES Fn:O2 Correction Spec Oxygen 1. each with a time stamp as its value can be subtracted from one another to give the time between the stamps.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. entered as a channel number (gas analyser input) Meas. The equation calculated is: Qmt = 20. the above calculation will result in a compensated gas measurement that is less than the actual measured gas value. This High Select is now the compensated gas DV channel to be displayed.Spec O2 × Meas.2.9% .000 Meas Oxygen Ch 1 Meas Gas Ch 1 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 79 . entered as a channel number (gas analyser input) NOTE: If the measured O2% were to go below the specified O2%. not the internal value of the channel. recorded. O2 = measured oxygen. and this can be displayed as elapsed time if so configured in the Value Format page. For example.Meas O2 where. the time stamp reads the current time and date from the system clock and holds it. Since this DV selects the highest of its two input values. This allows time stamp functions to be processed in the maths pack. rather than the above Qmt calculation..

(e. The limit can be a high limit or a low limit. to save memory space.the percentage of the last 20 samples that are equal to or less than 100˚F).2 LEVEL 2 EQUATIONS (Cont.2.) PERCENTILE This function looks at a specifiable number of the most recent samples of a specified channel.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. The sample rate can also be specified. It continuously calculates the percentage of these samples which are equal to or which lie within a specifiable limit. the oldest sample is discarded and the percentage re-calculated with each new sample.0000 Limit is High Scroll through 'high' and 'low' Sample int 1s Num of Points 1 Use minimum number of points you can. .g. Page 80 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . Fn:Percentile Source Ch 1 Threshold 1. Once the specified number of samples has been reached.

off Selectable from those available A and B 14-character tag Type. MATHS PACK UNIQUE PARAMETERS GROUP RESET ENABLE Allows resettable functions to be made susceptible to group reset. or elapsed time for the stopwatch).5. but will be logged on a separate line in the chosen format.3 CONFIGURATION Figure 7. Input and derived channels share the following parameters: Channel units Trace Line thickening Colour Span Tag Alarms Value format Five character user definable string On. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 81 . LEVEL 2 VALUE FORMATS Value format Five digits with configurable decimal point position. jobs Level 1 & 2 Functions: Five digits with configurable decimal point position. Date format is defined as a part of instrument configuration. Time as HH:MM:SS (Time part of time stamp function.3 is an overview of the maths pack configuration pages The configuration technique for derived channels is similar to that described for measuring channels in section 4.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 7. the format changes to HHHHH:MM. If the period is 100 hours or more. above. Level 3 Functions Two digits (positive) or one digit (negative) plus the exponent (-9 to 9). Date as DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY (Date part of Time Stamp function). off On. Time or Elapsed formats. Elapsed time as HH:MM:SS. it will be displayed as -----. Note: If a DV is configured with one of the above Date. threshold.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 82 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

XX back to 'Off' if not.00 A2 1.0000 Meas Gas Ch 1 Limit is High Sample Int 1s Num of points 1 Figure 7.66 A3 1.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE Level one functions Fn:Square Root Fn:Channel Average Fn:DV Group Average DV : Function Fn:Rolling Average Fn:Off Fn:e To The Power Fn:Constant Value: 1.00 Scale Units :Units Dry Temp Ch 1 Ster.00 Temperature Ch 1 Abs Press Ch 1 Constant 1.00 Atm Pressure Ch 1 Z value 1.00 Constant 1.Ch1 Lowest Ch 1.00 Psych Const Global Reset page appears only for Starred items Glb Reset:enable Fn:Linear Mass Flow Tag:Derived Ch 1 Fn:SqrRt Mass Flow Fn:Zirconia Probe Temperature Ch 1 Probe EMF Ch 1 Switch Ch B Ch 1 Abs Press Ch 1 Reference 1.' page Fn:Switch Fn:High Select Fn:Low Select Fn:Stopwatch Fn:Timestamp Fn:O2 Correction Fn:Percentile Spec Oxygen 1.000 Source Ch 1 Meas Oxygen Ch 1 Threshold 1.Ch 1 A0 1.00 Returns to relevant 'Fn:--.00 Fn:DV Grp Latch Max Fn:DV Grp Cont Max Fn:Third Order Poly Fn:Reltve Humidity Fn:F Value Polynomial of Ch 1 Wet Temp Ch 1 F Value Ch 1 Flow Ch1 Differ Press Ch 1 Probe temp Ch 1 Switch Ch A Ch 1 Highest Ch 1.00 Fn:Natural Log Fn:Copy Copy Ch 1 Fn:10 To The Power Add Ch 1 to Ch 1 Fn:Log Base 10 Fn:Rate of Change Fn:Sample and Hold Fn:Channel Minimum Fn:Divide Div Ch 1 by Ch 1 Fn:DV Grp Latch Min Fn:Modulus Modulus of Ch 1 Fn:DV Grp Cont Min Fn:Channel Maximum Maximum of Ch 1 10 to Power of Ch 1 Log Base 10 of Ch 1 Rate of Chg of Ch 1 Sample & Hold Ch 1 Minimum of Ch 1 Sample Period 1s Natural log of Ch 1 e To Power of Ch 1 Average of Ch 1 Sample Int 1s Square Root of Ch 1 Average of Ch 1 Time Interval 1m Level two functions Conf:DV 1 Num of Points 1 Fn:Add Fn:Subtract Sub Ch 1 from Ch 1 Sample Rate 1s Fn:Multiply Mult Ch 1 by Ch 1 To level 2 functions (if fitted) or Val Format XXX. Scale Low 0.00 Scale High 10.00 A1 1.00 6.3 Maths pack configuration menu structure HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 83 . Temp 1.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 84 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

00 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 85 . COUNTERS AND TIMERS 8. The value and units of each totaliser in the Display Group are displayed. in the 20-character text area.2 Alarms An alarm threshold can be set up for each totaliser.) Operation of the page key displays the totaliser tag and units instead.1 INTRODUCTION The Totaliser. A 'limit' setting defines whether the job list is to be initiated when the totaliser value lies above (high) or below (low) the threshold value. and the derived channel then traced. 8.3 Display The Display Group (described in section 4. in turn.2. and can edit the preset value. (The decimal point position is set up in the 'Value Format' configuration page. 8.1 Source types Each totaliser can integrate a given input or derived channel's value providing this value is between the totaliser's configured low cut-off point and high cut-off point and within the channel's configured range. and each threshold can have up to two jobs associated with it. Timer/Counter and Totaliser/Timer/Counter options supply up to six each of 9-digit (8-digit when decimal point used) totalizers. 8-digit counters and clock timers.2 TOTALISERS 8. Op:Totalizer 1 ↵ preset nn.2.4 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required) To trace the value of a totaliser on the chart.6) is initially empty.5 Operator pages If operator access is allowed. totalizers can be included in the display group with identifiers t1 to t6.2. With the TCT option. It is up to the user to include totalizers in each group as required. 8.2.2. it must be imported into a derived channel (using the 'Copy' function).MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8 TOTALISERS. 8. the operator can preset individual totalisers. Up to two jobs can be initiated by the alarm.nn Ed Preset 0. 8.

6 Totalizer configuration Configuration is carried out using the normal techniques described in section 4. Figure 8.00 Enter value Scroll through high/low Units scaler 0.2.2. CutOff Hi 10000.00 Limit Is High Period scaler 1s Enter values Preset Val 0.00 Enter values While active This page does not appear if 'No action' remains selected. Scroll through 1 to 6 Conf:Totalizer 1 Tot : Function Scroll through: Enabled/Disabled Scroll through: available sources Tot : Alarm Function: Disabled Alarm : Set Point Source Ch 1 Thold: 0.2.6 below.00 Units 5char Enter text strings Tag:14 characters Figure 8.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8.6 Totalizer configuration Page 86 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . shows the configuration pages.00 Scroll through: Enable/Disable Set decimal point position Scroll through 1 to 2 Scroll through jobs list Scroll through qualifiers Glb Reset:enable Alarm : Job 1 Val Fmt XXXXXXXX No action CutOff Lo 0.

0 1.000000 "resets" the totalizer. Defines whether the alarm triggers when the totalizer value is ≥ the threshold (absolute high alarm) (limit = high) or ≤ the threshold (absolute low alarm) (limit = low) The following jobs are added to the scroll list given in section 4. then the units scaler would be set to 1000. /min. the period scaler is ALWAYS the number of seconds. if access permission is granted.2.01 X 8640 = 86. The larger the period scaler.400).0100** Period Scaler 1 1 60 3600 3600 8640* 8640** Each Count Is 1 Pound 1000 Pounds 1 Cubic Foot 1 Gallon 100 Gallons 1 Million Gallons* 1000 Gallons** Period scaler Examples * The period scaler would normally be 86. A units scaler less than 1.0 causes the totalizer to run slower by the size of the scaler (counts divided by scaler).1. A units scaler greater than 1. etc). Allows each totalizer to be configured to be susceptible to global reset (Enable) or not (Disable).00 10. See also 'Glb Preset Disable' immediately below. also changing the units scaler to 10 makes the totalizer count 10 times slower and makes the millions in the totalizer correct (10 X 8640 = 86. For example. below (above) which the totalizing function will be disabled.000* 0.000's of gallons (0.0000 1000. the units scaler can be reduced by a factor of 1000 resulting in a totalizer that counts in 1. The period scaler defines the time value of the input units (/sec. Glb Reset Val format Cut Off Lo(Hi) Units Tag ALARM PAGES Threshold Limit Allows a value to be entered to act as an alarm trigger. Allows the decimal point position to be specified using the up and/or down arrow keys. /hr. Allows cut-off values to be entered.6 TOTALIZER CONFIGURATION (Cont.400). Preset to 0. Allows a 14-character descriptive text string to be entered.5: Preset Tot N Preset all Tots Disable all Tots Jobs HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 87 .e. Preset value Allows the entry of a nine-digit (eight digit when decimal point is used) number from which the totalizer will count. the slower the totalizer counts. ** Since it is unlikely that anyone would want each count on a totalizer to represent a million gallons. Allows a 5-character text string to be entered to describe the totalizer units. if the input is in gallons/minute. Except as (*) below. A 4-digit period scaler of 8640 is 10 times too small and makes the totalizer count 10 times too fast. For example.400 cannot be entered directly. if the input to a storage tank is gallons/min and the totalizer value is to be gallons x 103 (i. but the entry for the period scaler only allows a maximum of 4 digits. by job action or individually by the operator.) Source Units scaler Allows input channels or derived channels to be selected as totalizer sources Allows the counting to be scaled.400 (the number of seconds in a day). Measured Value Pounds per Second Pounds per Second Standard Cubic Feet per Minute Gallons per Hour Gallons per Hour Millions of Gallons per Day Millions of Gallons per Day Units Scaler 1. either individually or as a group.0000 1. This means that 86. then the period scaler would have to be the number of seconds in a minute (60). However. Totalizers can be set to their preset values.0 causes the totalizer to run faster. one count for each thousand gallons).MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8.0000 100. The totalizer reads the source channel value every second.

(The decimal point position is set up in the 'Value Format' configuration page).4. goes inactive or on alarm acknowledgment. e. Initiation of preset can also be carried out by job action on individual channels or on all channels simultaneously. Operation of the page key displays the counter tag and units instead.2.3) is initially empty. With the TC or TCT option. 8.4. and the derived channel then traced. as configured: 1. the operator can preset individual counters. Increment Counter N Decrement Counter N Preset counter N Preset all counters Disable all counters Each counter can be configured with a threshold value to enable it to trigger up to two jobs itself. It is up to the user to include counters in the group as required. in the 20-character text area. The value and units of each counter in the Display Group are displayed.6).3 TOTALIZER COUNTER OUTPUT The totalizer counter output option provides a pulse output to an assigned relay which is scaled to the count on the associated totalizer. They can all be triggered when the source goes active. Op:Counter 1 ↵ preset nn. A factor of 0. it must be imported into a derived channel (using the 'Copy' function).g. in turn. There are two entries for this feature (see figure 8.3 Operator pages If operator access is allowed. eight-digit counters which are controlled from other recorder functions through job lists.1. O/P (output)factor: divide the totalizer value.1 Introduction The counter options supply six.4. 8. A 'limit' input allows a job list to be initiated either when the counter value ≥ the threshold (limit high) or when it is ≤ the threshold (limit low). The following jobs are added to the list given in section 4. counters can be included in the display group with identifiers Co1 to Co6. and can edit the preset value. 2.3 Display The Display Group (section 4.5.6. a factor of 100 outputs a pulse every 100 totalizer counts. 4.4.00 disables the output. Pulse Relay "n" of card "n": 8.00 Page 88 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . 3. 5.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8.2 Tracing on the chart (maths pack level 1 required) To trace the value of a counter on the chart.nn Ed Preset 0. 8.4 COUNTERS 8.

4. shows the configuration pages.4 Configuration Configuration is carried out using the normal techniques described in section 4.4. Figure 8. Allows each counter to be defined as being susceptible to global reset (enable) or not (disable). Allows a 5-character units string to be entered using the up/down arrows and cursor key.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8. The preset value is loaded into the counter by job or by operator action. Allows a 14-character descriptive tag to be entered for each counter. Defines whether the alarm triggers when the counter value is ≥ the threshold (absolute high alarm) (limit = high) or ≤ the threshold (absolute low alarm) (limit = low) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 89 . Preset Units Glb preset Tag Eight digit value of preset. On going active Figure 8. entered using the up and down arrows.4 Counter configuration ALARM PAGES Threshold Limit Allows a value to be entered to act as an alarm trigger.4.4. Scroll through 1 to 6 Conf:Counter 1 Counter : Function Counter : Alarm Preset Val 1 Alarm : Set Point Enter preset value Units: 5char Enter text string Scroll through Enable/Disable Thold: 0 Enter value Scroll through high/low Glb Reset:disable Limit is High Tag:14 characters Enter text string Alarm : Job 1 Scroll through 1 to 2 Scroll through jobs list Scroll through qualifiers No action This page does not appear if 'No action' remains selected.

1. the timer will restart every repeat period until it is disabled. resetting a totaliser) can be defined to occur as the timer is "going active" or "going inactive". each of which can be configured to start at a specific time and date relative to the real-time clock in the recorder.5 TIMERS 8.g.3 Configuration Conf:Timer 1 Scroll through 1 to 6 Timer : Function Timer : Job 1 Scroll through 1 to 2 Scroll through jobs list Scroll through qualifiers Function: Disabled Scroll through Enabled/Disabled Scroll through enable/disable Enter date (XX) and time (YY) -see examples below Enter repeat rate No action Global Reset disable On going active This page does not appear if 'No action' remains selected. The timer options add the following jobs to the list given in section 4. Each timer can have up to two jobs associated with it.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8. "One shot" jobs (e. Once initiated.2 Operator pages Op:Timer 1 If access permission is granted.5. chart speed change) remain active for the full time of the timer duration period.5. Alternatively.5. the operator can start or Rpt in 0d reset a timer If timer not running ↵ to Start 0h 0m 0s If timer running ↵ to Reset 8. and continuous jobs (e.resets and starts timer Reset specified timer . and it will then repeat at the configured repetition rate. the timer can be initiated by a job. Start XX/XX/XX YY:YY Repeat 0d 0h 0m 0s Duration 1s Enter duration Figure 8.g.5: Start specified timer .3 Timer configuration pages Page 90 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . the timer will run for a configurable time period (duration) and repeat at a configurable rate. Once initiated.1 Introduction The timer options supply six timers.5.resets but does not start timer 8.

4 Timer examples 1. 8. Allows a duration period to be entered for the timer Repeat Duration JOBS PAGES Allows up to two jobs to be entered for the timer to trigger. If entries are left as zeros. the timer can be started only by job or by operator action Allows a repeat period to be entered. starting at 12:30 on 31st December: Start 31/12/XX 12:30 Repeat 0d 1h 0m 0s HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 91 . on the 1/2 hour.) Function Global reset Start Allows the timer to be switched on or off Allows each timer to be configured to be susceptible to global reset (enable) or not (disable) Allows a date and time to be entered for the timer to start. the timer will operate at the next smallest time unit. If all entries are left as XX.5. To start a timer at mid-day on the 1st of each month: Start XX/01/XX 12:00 2.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 8. To start a timer every hour. If an entry is left as XX. the timer does not repeat.5.3 TIMER CONFIGURATION (Cont.

2b details the recommended routing of the signal input connections to the temperature controllers.....2 User input (T/C..3....2 VIEWING ON RECORDER CHANNEL In the Channel Menu under Range / Input Type "Cont1" or "Cont2" can be selected...sensor input connections...... V+ and V.. Recorder channels can not be used as controller inputs..1 Output and PV data Controller power input...5 square mm)..1).3. a recorder ordered as a 4-input recorder can display controllers on channels 5 and 6)... 9. used in calculations like a direct input to a channel... Controller measurements can be used as recorder inputs. 9. mA.3 WIRING 9. Controllers are fully user configurable. This selection couples the controller measured value (PV) into the recorder channel.g...3..2a). Any recorder channel (1 to 6) can display a controller value even if no direct input was ordered for that channel.. Controller communications setup parameters are: Protocol: ... volts or mV) Controller signal inputs are connected directly to the temperature controller terminals VI... Controllers can not be fitted on dc powered recorders. triac or dc current (refer to the temperature controller manual for specifications). RTD.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 9 CONTROLLERS OPTION 9...5 to 1... Refer to the temperature controller manual ... These terminals are identified with the same designations as are shown in the temperature controller manual.. Controller output connections are made by the user to the option controller interface pcb located in the bottom right hand area of the case interior (see Figure 9.. None Page 92 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .. Outputs can be either relay... (e.. PV data and other outputs are pre-wired during manufacture..1 Controller locations Controller 2 9. Figure 9. 1 for controller 1 2 for controller 2 Baud rate: . 19200 Data bits: .. This value can then be traced.1).. 1 Parity: ........ These controllers are fitted with a single-contact alarm relay and may be specified with one or two outputs. 8 Stop bits: . Plastic fasteners are provided to secure signal input cable routing.. OP1 OP2 SP2 REM Channel alarms OP1 OP2 1 2 3 4 5 6 03 RUN MAN HOLD 150. alarmed.3....(see figure 9.3.1 INTRODUCTION One or two precision PID temperature controllers with self-tuning in a 1/16 DIN size can be mounted within the recorder (see figure 9..2 F E Edit/Hold SP2 REM RUN MAN HOLD Controller 1 Figure 9. Modbus Slave address: . The signal input connections will accept wire sizes from 16 to 22 awg (0....

) Option Board Power Supply Board Option Board Power Supply Board Micro Board The number and mix of the boards varies according to the options fitted.3.2a Controller signal inputs HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 93 .3 WIRING (Cont.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 9. Option Boards Input Board Option Boards Controller 1 Output 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B Controller 2 Output 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B Chan 6 Chan 5 Chan 4 Chan 3 Chan 2 Chan 1 Option Controller Interface Board Figure 9.2b Controller signal input wiring routing Figure 9.refer to controller manual Figure 9.3.1 Controller output and PV data VI V+ V- Controller signal input connections .3.

DIN std.00385 Ω/Ω/˚C 0. 10 Watts max. 0 to 20 mA configurable (load 600 Ω max. T. Storage -10 to 70 ˚C 5 to 90% RH (non condensing) Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the controller cabinet Not suitable for use above 2000 m (6. 0.82 oz) 100 to 240 Vac (-15%.0 to 999.).01 to 99. Water (non-linear).06").+10%). 4-digit x 7-segment high intensity LED 48 mm W x 48 mm H x 103 mm D (1. ±1˚C/F <1 µV for 100 mV range.25% of reading. N.89" x 4. Deviation high. NEMA 4X BS EN50081 general emissions for industrial environments BS EN50082-2(95) standards for industrial environments BS EN61010.89" x 1. P only or On/Off Bumpless transfer 0.10 V dc (user configurable with these limits) Outputs Relay Triac Analog Rating: Rating: Range: Min: 12V @ 100 mA. Normal or blocking action up to 4 process alarms can be combined onto a single output General Display Dimensions & weight Supply Environmental Temperature: Humidity: Atmosphere: Altitude: Panel sealing Electromagnetic compatibility Safety standards Dual.1% of reading 1. S.9 seconds User adjustable over the full display range J.5 kV) Page 94 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . B & Platinell II Automatic: typically >30 to 1 rejection from 20 ˚C Platinum 100. Max: 2 A @ 264 Vac resistive 1 A resistive @ 264 Vac Isolated. C. L.: Types: Modes: PID or PI with overshoot inhibition. ±1 LSD. mV ranges ±100 mV and 0 . K. R. Operating: 0 to 40 ˚C (32 to 104 ˚F) (ambient with controller).99 degrees (or display units per minute) Linear. proportional only Automatic calculation of PID and overshoot inhibition parameters Automatic calculation of manual reset value when using PD control Full scale high or low. Fan (minimum on time).562 ft) or in corrosive or explosive areas IP65. 12 V dc limit Control Functions Control Modes: Auto/manual: Setpoint rate limit: Cooling algorithms: Tuning Alarms One-shot tune: Automatic droop comp. Oil.2 mV for 10 V dc range <0. PI. low or band Latching or non-latching. PD.4 SPECIFICATION Inputs Range Sample rate Calibration accuracy Resolution Linearisation accuracy Input filter Zero offset Thermocouple RTD Types: Cold junction comp: Types: Excitation current: Lead compensation: V. installation category 2 (voltage transients not to exceed 2. 250 g (8.2 mA Up to 22 Ω in each of 3 equal resistance leads ± 100 mV and 0 . <0. 48 to 62 Hz.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 9.10 V dc (auto ranging) 9 Hz (110 ms) 0.

00 1.50 Y: -15.00 15X: 5. more points can be entered round any 'knees'.2 CONFIGURATION PAGES The following set up shows how to enter a y = x3 output function using inputs of -5 to +5.e.375 2.00 Y: -8.63 5 X: -2.63 y = x3 144444444444244444444443 X 13X: 3.00 Y: 1.00 9 X: 10X: 1. it may have only one y value for each x value entered) and the x inputs must increase in value as they are entered. The curve must be monotonic (i.00 14X: 4.00 Y: -1.00 Y: 125. leaving the recorder to interpolate in areas where the gradient is more constant. the other the output value (Y) which is to appear on the chart.00 Y: 27.00 12X: 2.375 7 X: -1.00 Y: -64.00 6 X: -1. Do not press 'Enter' until all X-Y values have been entered. The curve is entered as pairs of points. so if the curve varies in gradient.0 y = x3 Figure 10. Conf:Lin Table 110 100 80 90 70 Use First 2 Values 144444444444424444444444443 1 X: -5.00 Y: -125.00 8 X: 0.50 Y: 3.2b y = x3 function HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 95 . which can then be used instead of the standard linearisations supplied with the recorder ('User' added to Lin Type list in Channel Range configuration). one representing the input value which will be applied to the recorder (X).00 Y: 0.00 Y: -27.50 Y: -3.50 Y: 15.00 Y: 64. The points do not have to be equally spaced.00 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 +1 +2 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 -110 +3 +4 +5 11X: 4 X: -2.1 INTRODUCTION This option allows the user to enter a linearisation function of up to 32 points.00 3 X: -3. 10.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 10 CUSTOM LINEARISATION OPTION 10.2a Linearisation table configuration pages -120 -130 Figure 10.0 2 X: -4. 130 120 Y Scroll to 15 for this example.00 Y: 8.

It should be connected to all instruments and to ground at a single point Page 96 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .2. see Section 11. BS EN61010) Installation category II. TxB TxA CMN RxB RxA PU Figure 11.1 INTRODUCTION This option provides the means for establishing an EIA422/EIA485 serial communications link with a host computer.1 Communications option pinout Communications terminal identifications vary.2.2a and "CMN" is the "0 Volt" connection as well as the common connection for the transmit and receive lines. Figure 11. using the Gould Modicon MODBUS protocol.1 gives termination details for both connectors. the following identifications are also used: TXA = (TX or TX+) and TXB = (TX or TX-). Pollution category 2 (see page 2 for definitions) Terminals to ground: 100 V RMS or dc (basic insulation) 11. Note: The PU (pull up) output is 5V with a series 1000Ω resistor.2. RXA = (RX or RX+) and RXB = (RX or RX-).g.2. Baud rate) setting. 11. Terminal "PU" is supplied by the "5 Volt" shown in Figure 11.1.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OPTION 11. The option comes on a single board (one of three option boards).1 Safety isolation specification Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz.1 Pinout Only one communications board may be mounted in any one of the three option positions.3 below. For communication parameter (e.2 WIRING 11.

In a single point-to-point application. The recorder communications port is terminated as shown in figure 11. Such a circuit is for use where the host receiver does not have its own internal biasing arrangements.2. In order to avoid this. the fitting of a 220Ω resistor across the receive inputs (figure 11.2b (c)) will terminate the line correctly.2b (a) below. With long cable runs it may also be necessary to terminate the transmission line. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 97 . it may be necessary to terminate the instrument with a 220Ω resistor.2a. only the final unit should be terminated in this way.2b (b) shows how this may be done using external biasing resistors.2. To overcome such problems. A receiver cannot distinguish between 'true' and reflected data.2a System termination and biasing HOST COMPUTER When not communicating. so a compromise value (220 Ohms) is chosen to give the optimum performance in reducing unwanted reflections and in improving the signal-to-noise ratio. returning what can appear to be 'true' data signals back down the line. the end of he cable acts as a reflector. the instrument outputs go to a high-impedance state to allow multi-drop connection. This will cause a problem if the host computer is not fitted with biasing resistors to pull these essentially open circuit lines to their idle states as defined for the EIA422/EIA485 standards.2.2.2. In multi-drop systems. only Host transmit lines shown.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11. with the result that data is corrupted. Such a value however. otherwise the transmitted signal levels may be reduced to an unacceptable level. below.2. 5 Volts 100k RxA 220R RxB TxA Transmit lines from host 100k TxB 0 Volts RxB RxA 5 Volts 100 k 100 k Recorder B (Final recorder) 100k resistors built into circuit board. then the line appears to be of infinite length and no reflections occur. external biasing resistors can be fitted as shown in figure 11. For the sake of clarity. Figure 11. a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument. does not give the best signal-to-noise ratio. Where the host does have its own internal biasing.2 Termination and Biasing If the communications line is left open-ended. 0 Volts Recorder A Figure 11. If the value of this resistor is equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable (120 Ohms in this case).

19.2.2b Host computer termination and biasing 11.) 5 Volts 5 Volts Host receiver 4k7 TxB Transmit lines from recorder TxA Host receiver 470R TxB Transmit lines from recorder TxA 4k7 0 Volts a.2 TERMINATION AND BIASING (Cont. 9600.3 Configuration pages Page 98 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . 1800. Host with internal bias resistors and external termination.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11. Parity. 220R TxB Transmit lines from recorder TxA 4k7 min. None Stop bits One Scroll through: One or None Address 1 Enter address 1 to 247 Figure 11.3) allow the Baud Rate. Host with external bias resistors 470R 0 Volts b. 2000. 0 Volts c. 2400. Host with external bias resistors providing termination. Odd.3 CONFIGURATION PAGES The configuration pages (figure 11. Host receiver 5 Volts 4k7 min. Figure 11. 4800. Noº of stop bits and the instrument address to be set up: Conf:Comms Protocol ModBus Baud rate 1200 Scroll through: 1200.2.200 Parity Even Scroll through: Even.

HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 99 .4. the scaled value is forced to scale high.Low range   Scaled value =  × Analogue input  + Low range   FFFF   In the event of a hardware error or under-range value.4) depends on alarm type as follow ALARM TYPE PARAMETER Absolute Absolute Deviation Deviation Rate Rate Digital Digital A1 to A4 SP1 to SP4 A1 to A4 SP1 to SP4 A1 to A4 SP1 to SP4 A1 to A4 SP1 to SP4 DEFINITION Not used Setpoint values Deviation Values Setpoint values Rate value Period value (secs) Not used 0000 = Open. Modbus protocol manual) and these are listed in section 11.000 11.3 Reading analog inputs The values read are in the range 0000 to FFFF.2 Alarm parameter definition Note: Any request to read a nonexistent setpoint value will result in the value 0000 being returned. This should not be taken to mean that the setpoint is at 0. The unit address (1 to 247) being set up as a part of the recorder’s communications configuration.4 is the base address at which channel 1 may be accessed. To obtain the scaled relative value. 1251 = channel 2 etc.4 GOULD MODICON MODBUS PROTOCOL 11. the required address passed with the code 01 would be 03 If an alarm is set for an input or derived channel. FFFF = Closed Table 11.1 Introduction When connected to a host computer the recorder acts as a slave Modbus device.4.4. the value is forced to scale zero. Should the analog value be over range. the associated alarm parameters can be read using code 03 Example: To read the set point of absolute alarm 1 on channel 8. Note: Addressing starts at zero.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11.4 11. the required address passed with code 03 should be 1257 (1250 = channel 1.4.4.4.4. Only a limited number of function codes have been implemented (ref.2 Channel addressing The channel 1 address listed in table 11.). the following calculation must be carried out where the analog input is in hex:  High range . The interpretation of alarm parameters (A1 to A4 and SP1 to SP4 in table 11. whilst channel numbers start at 1 Example: to read a digital input at channel 4.

.................... 1750 Derived alarm 4 status ....... 4250 Reserved (always returns 0000) ...... 1000 Analog input SP1 (Table 11......... 0 Analog input A1 (Table 11..............................2) ....................4...................................... 750 Analog input A4 (Table 11.....2) ........................................................................................................ 1000 Derived alarm 1 status .........2) ..........................................................................see code 04) ... 3750 Reserved (always returns 0000) . 500 Analog input A3 (Table 11...................................2) ....2) .............................................................................4............................................2) .........................see code 07) ........ 1750 Analog input SP4 (Table 11.... 2000 Derived channel A1 (Table 11...............4...... 2250 Reserved (always returns 0000) ................... 1500 Derived alarm 3 status ......................................... 6750 Print mode ............4....MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11...............................2) ......................2) ................... 2000 Analog input value ................... 5000 Derived channel SP3 (Table 11.................2) ..................................... 0 Digital input state (true = < 0.......................... 250 Input alarm 2 status ........................................................................................... 2750 Reserved (always returns 0000) . 5500 Derived channel SP4 (Table 11.......................4...................... 4750 Reserved (always returns 0000) .....................4........................ 750 Input alarm 4 status .........................5) .......... 4500 Derived channel SP2 (Table 11....2) ...... 5250 Reserved (always returns 0000) ............4 Modbus implementation channel addresses (Sheet 1: codes 01 to 03) Page 100 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .................................. 4000 Derived channel SP1 (Table 11............................4.......4.................. 1250 Derived alarm 2 status ........................................................................... 7000 0 = Trace priority 1 = Text priority 2 = Text only RECORDER ACTION 03 Read holding register Table 11.................................................. 3000 Derived channel A3 (Table 11.....4.....4.................2) ......4 Function codes CODE 01 02 FUNCTION Read coil status Digital read input status CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS (DECIMAL) Digital input state (true = >0........2) ...... 500 Input alarm 3 status ..........4......................................................4.................................. 1500 Analog input SP3 (Table 11...................4....2) ................ 3250 Reserved (always returns 0000) ..... 5750 Reserved (always returns 0000) ..... 2500 Derived channel A2 (Table 11..................................4...2) ................................................................... 6000 Input channel status (read only) (flags ................ 3500 Derived channel A4 (Table 11..........................see code 04) .......................................... 0 Input alarm 1 status ........................... 6500 Instrument status (read only) (flags ................2) ...... 250 Analog input A2 (Table 11............................... 1250 Analog input SP2 (Table 11..................4....4...5) .................4............. 6250 Derived channel status (read only) (flags ..................................................2) ........................4.............

..... 7250 Data quantity is the total number of characters in the text string (including colour commands) divided by two (must have an even number of characters............code 7) ........ ............... Derived channel value ......MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11............................... (Presets values for comms channels only) In addition to the above code 16....... 250 No bits set: Channel OK Bit 0 set: Channel off Bit 1 set: Over range Bit 2 set: Under range Bit 3 set: Hardware error / bad PV Bit 4 set: Ranging error / no data Bit 5 set: Overflow Bits 6 to 15: Always 0.......... As code 03 (Presets values for comms channels only) Read instrument status Bit 0: System error Bit 1: Writing system failure Bits 2 to 7 Always 0 Diagnostic code 0 (Echoes message as sent) Sets digital input code for comms channels in ..... where n is a numeric character from 1 to 6 as shown in the table below.....000............ 1000 (Bits 0 to 15 as for Input channel status above) Instrument status (flags .... MSB is printed first..............................000 Preset holding register .... 1250 Sets digital input state for comms channel .......... 0 Input channel status ............................................................................. 0 0 = 0.........................................) CODE 04 FUNCTION Read input register RECORDER ACTION ............................ The text string must consist of no more than 39 characters and may contain no more than 10 colour commands of the form !n...........4 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.......................................... 1 = 1.................. 500 Reserved (returns 0000) ....... Text is printed in black unless otherwise commanded The '!' character may not be used as a text character..................4...................... As code 03 address range................. 0 address range.........................000 Preset holding register for each channel in ............................................ 0 = 0............. CHANNEL 1 ADDRESS (DECIMAL) Analog input value .....4 Modbus implementation channel addresses (Sheet 2) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 101 ........ n 1 2 3 4 5 6 Colour Red Green Green Blue Blue Black 05 06 07 Force single coil Preset single register Read exception status 08 15 16 16 Loopback test Force multiple coil Preset multiple registers Print text string Table 11...................000................ 750 Derived channel status ....... 1 = 1...........4............

.. Original configuration unchanged. Place any other instruments on the communications link into standby mode... The transfer procedure is as follows 1...MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 11..... New configuration undefined 16: Save had no reply from comms and timed out 32: Save failed before transfer completed EXCEPTION RESPONSES 01 02 03 06 Illegal function Illegal data address Illegal data Illegal busy Unsupported or illegal Modbus function ...4 FUNCTION CODES (Cont..4 Modbus implementation channel addresses (Sheet 3) 11. 10 seconds after completion. 0 Attempt to preset input value of non comms channel Invalid configuration data Data value out of range for function Configuration transfer in progress via another port so unable to action function Table 11. Some records ignored.. will cause the host communications to return to normal use for instruments in standby mode........5 Recorder to PC wiring for transfer using configuration program Page 102 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . 4... 3: Restore failed on transfer Some config... 1 = Receiver. Recorder RXA RXB CMN TXA TXB Receive PC Serial Port (9-pin) Receive 2 RS422 to RS232 Converter Transmit Transmit 3 0 Volts 0 Volts 5 Figure 11... 2: Restore failed on data. Note: 10 seconds of inactivity on the communications link.. Send or receive file at host...5 XMODEM TRANSFER XMODEM transfers take place between a host computer and a single instrument to save or restore configuration.4......... transferred before failure..... at any point in the procedure.4. 2 = Sender Returns 1 byte of data as follows: 0: Transfer OK . 2..... 3.. host communications is restored to normal use.no errors 1: Restore failed completely File was incompatible or comms failed to transfer the file. but transfer mostly successful.) 65 66 Enter XMODEM mode Report XMODEM error Holds 1 byte of data specifying which mode to enter 0 = standby. Set the required recorder to sender or receiver mode as appropriate.. 0 Data address out of range for instrument config .......

Push the card fully into the slot until the ejector button below the card slot moves out. Note that the instructions on the card "insert this edge" and "this side up" should be on the right side of the card as it is inserted. Files are stored in DOS format. The instructions supplied with the card give details of storage periods and battery changing. The major functions of the Memory Card options are: Save and restore option: ASCII log option: Compressed log option: Configuration save and restore. can be used in conjunction with the card (and a suitable reader) to create or modify configurations for subsequent down loading to the recorder.see section 12. to run on a PC. As ASCII log but with PACKED data format. maintains the data for a period which is dependent on card type. Configuration software.5).2 MEMORY CARD INSERTION As shown in figure 12.2a Memory card insertion HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 103 . 12.2a. the memory card is inserted into a slot located at the top right corner of the chart platen. available from the manufacturer. Reformatting software is included with PACKED format data to convert logs to ASCII format thus allowing manipulation of the data in PCs. open the recorder door.1 INTRODUCTION Note: Most of the memory card functions are not accessible to the operator until they have been enabled in the Memory Card Operator Access’ configuration as described in section 12. To insert the card. To remove the card. The memory card is a static RAM (Random Access Memory) with battery back-up. The battery. Memory card functions are all available both from the configuration menu and from the operator menu (unless access permission has been denied . and the card is PCMCIA version 2 compatible. Card eject button Figure 12. operate the card ejector button (shown below).5. As above Save and Restore option but with ASCII Data logging. located within the card.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12 MEMORY CARD OPTION 12.

Op:Memory Card Op:Calibrate chart Figure 12.2b Memory card operator menu structure Page 104 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .) Background Display Furnace 1 Temp Deg C Op:Display Op:Chart Op:Alarm Summary MC:Directory Op:Alarm thresholds MC:Delete Op:DV alarm t'holds MC:Status Op:Action MC:Offline Op:Clock MC:Save Config Op:System error MC:Restore Config Op:Configuration MC:Format Op:DV reset MC:Archive 1 Op:Totaliser MC Archive 2 Op:Counter Op:Timer Dashed box = This page appears only if the associated option is present.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12 MEMORY CARD (Cont.

2.2. Note: Any existing data on a card with a battery will be lost during format. It then must be formatted by operating the 'Enter' key in the ' ↵ to FORMAT' display page as shown in figure 12. Before a memory card can be put into service. MC:Directory MC:Delete MC:Status CHANGE CARD WHEN OFFLINE MC:Offline MC:Save Config Card is Offline MC:Restore Config 'Format' deletes all data on the card MC:Format MC:Archive 1 Format type SRAM MC:Archive 2 to Format Please Wait Figure 12.2.2.2 Changing cards CAUTION Before inserting or removing a PC card. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 105 .1 above).1 Card formatting Memory cards are tested prior to shipment and the battery removed to preserve its useful life. The card returns to the 'Online' state as soon as the 'Card is Offline' display is quitted (by using the 'Cancel' key).1 below.2. the battery must be installed following the instructions with the card.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12.. MC:Offline should be selected (see figure 12. This ensures that data is not lost or corrupted whilst the card is inserted or removed.1 Card format and off-line menus 12.

Should the filename already exist. Once the configuration read is complete.2 Page 106 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .7. a further operation of the 'Enter' key causes the configuration to be written to the memory card. calls the filename page.CFG as their extension Once the required file name is displayed. While the configuration is being read from the memory card.' is displayed. MC:Delete MC:Status MC:Offline MC:Save Config Save to:CONFIG .CFG Enter 8-character (max.3 CONFIGURATION SAVE AND RESTORE MC:Directory 12.1 12.2 Restore NOTE: All existing configuration information will be overwritten by the new configuration. See section 12. calls a Filename page which allows the entry of an 8-character (max) string as the Configuration's file name.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. or Cancel returns to the filename page.3. 'Enter' confirms overwrite.CFG" cannot be changed. The file extension ".1 for details of permitted file name characters (Only DOS format file names allowed). Configuration files can be identified as they have . operation of the Clear (X) key causes the recorder to re-initialize and return to background display. Once the file name has been entered.3.CFG Use Down arrow (only) to scroll through filenames Restoring config Config complete Recorder re-initializes using the new configuration Figure 12. a further operation of the 'Enter' key causes the configuration to be read from the memory card. Operation of the 'Enter' key from the Restore Config page. an overwrite confirmation is requested.) filename Filename not previously used with this card Filename already in use to Overwrite Overwrite Do not overwrite Saving config Config save complete Figure 12. This allows the names of all the files held on the card to be scrolled through using the down arrow key.3. MC:Directory MC:Delete MC:Status MC:Offline MC:Save Config MC: Restore Config Restore Filename.3. the message 'Restoring config.1 Save Operation of the 'Enter' key from the Save Config page.

28.71.963 (Where XXXXA is the recorder model number) File containing two input channels (1 and 3) NOT including tags or units.93. File containing two input channels (2 and 3) including tags (TempVes1 and PressVes1) and units (˚C and bar respectively).”3" “DD/MM/YY”.1 Archive Configuration MC:Delete Logging to a data card file can be initiated by job.989 29/02/96. Log files may contain one or a large number of single logs.”1".963 (Where XXXXA is the recorder model number) Table 12.12:15:06.1). The Archiving operator pages (figure 12. interval A is used.28.12:15:06.989 29/02/96. for log group 2. Entry of file names. is carried out using the configuration menus (figure 12..28. if an interval is entered as "01:00:00" at 8:27. data type etc.1 Operator Log initiation Note: See section 12. “Log”.0.g.28. with DD/MM/YY. Reformatting Software for running on a PC. is included with the packed data option to allow conversion of the compressed data into ASCII comma-delimited format. The content of logs 1 and 2 are set up in Group Configuration as described in Section 4. archive interval.”TempVes1".1 Examples of ASCII format files HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 107 .4.1).7 for details of permissible file names / types.”2".4.4 DATA LOGGING (ARCHIVE) A log is a "snapshot" of the values within the log group at one point in time. suitable for direct use with PC spreadsheet or word processing packages.”Bar” “Log”.. data can be logged in ASCII format or in PACKED format which is a compressed format for high density data archiving.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. The log interval and starting point can be set (i.”PresVes1" 29/02/96. MC:Status MC:Offline MC:Save Config MC:Restore Config MC:Format MC:Archive to Send Log 1 to Send Log 2 Figure 12.93. automatically at one of two configurable periods (archive intervals A and B). 9:00.HH:MM:SS date format.12:15:06.4. MC:Directory 12. etc). Under normal circumstances. with DD/MM/YY. through operator action or. 29/02/96.e.. Column headers (Channel tags) included: “XXXXA”.”HH:MM:SS”.0.6. . . log group 2 is sent to the file defined in Archive 2 configuration (see section 12.4) allow only the initiation of the log. 10:00. Column headers (Channel tags) included: “XXXXA”.71.”3" .4.”˚C”.. logging will start on the next full hour and log each hour thereafter (e.HH:MM:SS date format. interval B being selected by job action.4.4. 11:00.0.12:16:04.1. According to which of the archiving options is chosen. When archiving automatically. More details can be found in section 4.0.

New file opened daily . these configuration steps are possible: File type ASCII PACKED Produces comma delimited columns of data.see section 12. File name extension is . First two columns used to specify time and date of archive.3.5.2. Single. comma delimited column titles are sent depending on the ‘Channel tag’ and ‘Instrument tag’ fields in the Log Format Configuration described in section 4.1 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.1.4. File name takes counter value . while a value of 34121. counters and derived channels are saved to 0.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. Noon on the 1st Jan 1900 would be represented by a value of 1.4.2 File name type Include column titles Text Hourly Daily Counter Yes/No Date format (ASCII) DD/MM/YY.see section 12.6.7.see section 12. (DD/MM/YY might be MM/DD/YY according to the date format selected in Clock configuration.000004% of display accuracy (4 parts in 108) Table 12.7.see section 12. For ASCII files only.2. compresses the data.4.1. For example.7.5: Log 1 to archive 1 Log 2 to archive 2 Archive interval B Message (Msg) N to archive 1 Message (Msg) N to archive 2 All the above can be initiated 'On going active'.4.7. For PACKED data only. Data is stored in a compressed manner which requires reformatting software to extract data from it.1 following. The integer part is the number of days since 31st Dec 1899.1. below.HH:MM:SS Spreadsheet Integer Compression ratio Normal High JOBS If an archiving option is present. the decimal part is the proportion of the day since midnight. floating-point number.4. compresses the data more than NORMAL.ASC (See table 12. and table 12.25 would represent the 6 am on the 1st June 1993. but provides an exact copy.1 above for examples) Proprietary format. the following jobs are added to the list given in section 4.PKD Fixed file name . File name extension is . New file opened hourly . 'On going inactive' or 'On acknowledge' Page 108 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . For PACKED data only.4. If YES. so that 6 am on the 1st June 1993 would be represented as 930601060000.) With reference to menus in figure 12. Totalisers. Compresses time and date as YYMMDDHHMMSS.02% accuracy. Input channel values are saved to 0.

ASC File:CCCCCCCC.4.PKD Compr.2 Archiving configuration menus HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 109 . Ratio Normal Compr.ASC Column Titles yes Use up/down arrows to scroll between 'yes' and 'no'.4. Ratio High Figure 12. File Type ASCII Name Type:text Name Type:hourly Name type:daily Name type:counter N File:NNNNNNNN. Date Fmt INTEGER Date Fmt D/M/Y.1 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.) Conf:Memory Card MC:Directory MC:Delete MC:Status MC:Offline MC:Save Config N--N in filenames = YY = MM = DD = HH = CCCCCCCC = MC:Archive 2 Editable characters Year number Month number Day number Hour number Value of counter N MC:Restore Config MC:Format MC:Archive 1 Interval A 00:00:00 Interval B 00:00:00 00:00:00 = archiving off Use cursor key to move from hours to minutes and from minutes to seconds fields.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12.ASC File:NNYYMMDD.PKD File:NNMMDDHH.ASC File:NNMMDDHH.PKD File:CCCCCCCC.H:M:S Date Fmt SPREADSHEET File Type PACKED Appears only if 'PACKED' option fitted Name Type:hourly Name type:daily Name type:counter N Name Type:text File:NNNNNNNN.PKD File:NNYYMMDD.

g.4. Automatic archiving is carried out at interval A except when interval B is selected by job action. 9:10AM. each of the memory card functions can be added to or removed from the operator pages using the OPERATOR ACCESS part of the recorder configuration. Conf:Access Chart Speed:yes ChartOn/Offline:yes Dashed box = This page appears only if the associated option is present. An entry of 00:00:00 causes the automatic triggering to be inhibited. If all functions are removed. the recorder will start its automatic archiving at the next whole 10-minutes or the next whole hour (e. Edit/Print Text:no Send Chart Log:yes MC Conf Save:no Chan Alarm Thold:no MC Conf Restore:no DV Alarm Thold:no MC Format:no DV Reset:no MC Status/Dir:yes Tot Preset Value:no MC Delete:no Cnt Preset Value:no MC Send Archive:no Timer Control:no MC Offline:no Figure 12. If a ‘round figure’ value (e. M CARD does not appear in the Operator Menu.) is entered at 9:03AM. The up/down arrow keys are used to toggle the permissions between ‘yes’ and ‘no’. 01:00:00 for 1 hr.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. 00:10:00 for 10 mins. Refer to the Operator Access description in section 4.5 OPERATOR ACCESS For the sake of security.5 Operator permissions Page 110 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . 12. or 10:00AM).13 for further details.g.2 Archive interval In 'Archive 2' configuration page. use the cursor and numeric entry keys to enter the required archive intervals A and B for automatic logging of log 2 group .

together with its size in Bytes. MC:Directory RN080502.1 Directory function display pages 12. Operation of the Page key from any of the filename pages.6.6. the down arrow key allows the user to scroll through the file names held in the card memory.6. The down arrow key allows the user to scroll through the file names held in the card memory. For each filename on display.1.ASC 06/08/97 15:24:38 Figure 12.6.2 Delete As shown in figure 12. A further operation of the 'Enter' key removes the file from the directory.CFG CONFIG .ASC 64 05/08/97 10:39:38 RICHAERT. As shown in figure 12.ASC 64 Figure 12.6.6.ASC Sure? RN031802. together with a '↵ to erase' statement. For each filename on display. allows the file size. operation of the 'Enter' key calls a further display page which asks for confirmation of erasure.CFG 7936 ZN080611.6 MEMORY CARD GENERAL FUNCTIONS 12.2.2 Delete function display pages HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 111 . operation of the page key calls a further display page which shows the time and date of the file's last activity.ASC Erase CONFIG .1 Directory The display shows the name of the oldest file on the card.ASC 148 06/08/97 10:42:00 CONFIG . the display shows the name of the oldest file on the card. MC:Delete Erase RN080502. and data and time of last activity to be viewed as shown in the figure.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12.CFG 5636 06/08/97 10:05:52 RN080610.CFG 7938 Erase ZN080611.ASC Yes Erase REICHERT.CFG No Please wait Erase RN080610.

4 Automatic file deletion Should the card become full while chart copy or data logging / archiving activities are being carried out. the following types of file name may be used when archiving data. followed by a three-character non-editable extension.PKD Use cursor key then up/down arrows to select counter number Name Type:hourly Name Type:daily Name Type:counter 1 File type ASCII Name Type:text File:NNNNNNNN. Hourly (Uses the recorder’s real-time clock) 4.6. 1. Counter value. 12. The file names consist of up to eight characters. PACKED names identical except extension = .6.CFG) are not deleted. MC:Status Usage: 11/ 128K Write Protected: no Figure 12.) Existing configuration files (. Text 2. Daily (Uses the recorder’s real-time clock) 3. Operation of the page key calls a display which shows whether the card is write protected or not. 12.ASC).3 Status display pages Note: A newly formatted card uses some space for format data. Should the card become full while a Configuration Save is being attempted the Save will be aborted and the message 'Err:Card full' will be displayed until cleared by the 'Clear' (X) key.7 for 'Archive 1'.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. Figure 12.6.ASC Use up/down arrows and cursor key to edit 1st two characters File CCCCCCCC.3 Card status This display tells the user how much memory is currently used (11kB in the example) out of the card’s total memory (128kB in the example).ASC Use up/down arrows and cursor key to enter up to 8character file name File NNMMDDHH. MC:Archive 1 Filename formats for ASCII files (extension = . the oldest data logging / archiving file on the card is deleted.ASC Use up/down arrows and cursor key to edit 1st two characters File NNYYMMDD.ASC CCCCCCCC will be the value of the selected counter at the time of archiving. (The oldest file will be deleted whether or not it is of the same type as the one being written.7 ARCHIVE FILES As shown in figure 12.7 Filename selection Page 112 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

12. then the file name would be NN080309. if counter N is set up to hold the batch number. then the file name would be NN980803. the existing file will be overwritten and lost. PKD extensions are treated in exactly the same way. none of the filename characters can be edited.3 Daily file names Daily filenames are similar to hourly filenames except that they contain the date rather than the time at which the file is opened Only the first two characters (NN) can be edited. the file name being the value of counter N. Thus if an ASCII log were started some time between nine and ten a.1 Text file names With ‘Filename type’ selected as ‘Text’. Configuration file names (. and if this is given. the file will be closed at an appropriate point.m.7. a separate chart copy to be made for individual batches.4). and a new file opened with the counter’s new value for a file name. until an unused file name is found. The remainder of the file name will be the time and date on which the copy was initiated. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 113 . for example.ASC file. Should the counter be incremented during data transfer. 12. If AS1 also exists. Thus if an ASCII log were initiated some time on the 3rd of August 1998. 0 to 9 à ê è ô ù # $ % & ( ) . AS3 — A10 — 100. the remainder of the file name will be the date on which the file was initiated.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. This allows.7. and so on (up to 999).7. the extension will be incremented to AS2. a warning message appears asking for overwrite permission.4 Counter file names With ‘Filename type’ scrolled to ‘Counter’.5 File name extensions All logging file names have automatic extensions of "ASC*" or "PKD*" depending on whether they are in ASCII or PACKED format (See section 12. 12. on the 3rd of August._ ! ^ ‘{ } ~ â ë ï î ì ò û ÿ á í ó ú The use of any other character will result in a fleeting 'Invalid config' message. a to z. only the first two characters (NN) can be edited.ASC. then the extension is ‘incremented’ from ASC to AS1. * If a new ASCII file is created on a disk that already has a XXXXXXXX. the NN—NN field can be freely edited with alphanumeric characters as follows: A to Z.ASC.7. 12.2 Hourly file names With ‘Name Type’ scrolled to ‘Hourly’.7.CFG extensions) are different in that if an attempt is made to create a configuration file which already exists.

2.3 Error messages In the event of an error occurring during card use.8 OTHER INFORMATION 12.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12. If a Counter name is chosen.8. 3. If none of the above events occur. The first log generated after the disc is placed online will force a new file to be created. 4.7).5. a message will appear for a few seconds. 12. Mem Card Bat Low Mem Card Full M Card Near Full (80% full) MCC Overdrive (Archiving buffer full and no card or available card space) These can be used to initiate recorder jobs as described in section 4. the first log generated during that clock hour or calendar day will create a new file.1 Event sources The following event sources (depending on which option is fitted) are added to the recorder: 1.6 Rules for creation of files 1. 2. The first log generated after any change has been made to the configuration of any channel will create a new file. Memory card battery flat 3. Memory card battery low 2. 3.2 System errors The following possible system errors are added to the recorder: 1. The first log generated after any change has been made to the Archive Menu will create a new file. an automatic interval or timer job will add a new set of data to the open file. MCC Overdrive error (Archiving buffer full) (Archiving options only) Any of these will cause a message to be sent to the display and an entry to be placed in the system error list (see section 3.7. If an Hourly or Daily file name is chosen.8. 12. 12. the incrementing of the chosen counter will create a new file. 5. 4. if all memory card options are present: Directory empty Card write protected Card changed Card not formatted Card not fitted File write protected File read protected Card reader fault Card read failure Card write failure Bad filename Card data corrupted Card full MCC overdrive Page 114 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .8. The following error messages are possible.1.

9 Memory card menu structure HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 115 . Conf:Transfer Conf:Access Conf:Memory Card Conf:Lin Table Conf:Serial Comms Conf:Adjust Conf:Default Figure 12.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 12.9 MEMORY CARD CONFIGURATION MENU OVERVIEW Operator menus Op:Configuration Conf:Instrument Conf:Chart Conf:Channel 1 MC:Directory Conf:Group Display MC:Delete Conf:Oper Action MC:Status Conf:Clock MC:Offline Conf:Message 1 MC:Save Config Top level configuration menu Conf:Alarm Messages MC:Restore Config Conf:Event 1 MC:Format Conf:DV 1 MC:Archive 1 Conf:Totalizer 1 MC:Archive 2 Conf:Counter 1 Conf:Timer 1 Conf:O/P Channel 1 Dashed box = This page appears only if the associated option is present.

1 above. Pollution degree 2 (see page 2 for definitions) 100V RMS or dc (double insulation) 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation) Page 116 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . Figure 13. The fuse type is 20 mm slow-blow.1.1. as shown in table 13.2 Safety isolation specification Safety isolation (dc to 65Hz.1 Fuses The required fuse value depends on the supply voltage.1 INTRODUCTION This option supplies one or two sets of three isolated 25 Volt outputs.2).1 shows an overall view of a transmitter power supply option with inputs for three channels. CAUTION Although the recorder can operate on a line voltage of 90 to 264 Vac. Electrically.1.2. BS EN61010) Channel to channel: Channel to ground: Installation category II.1 Transmitter power supply 13. the circuit boards contain a transformer with multiple isolated secondary windings used to drive three simple regulators via individual rectifying/filtering circuits. Physically. the transmitter power supply must be set for the level of voltage connected.1 Supply Voltage versus Fuse Values 13. Each output is intended to supply power to a remote transmitter in order to run a 0 to 20 mA or a 4 to 20 mA current loop. Outputs from the regulators are wired to terminal blocks for user connection.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 13 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY OPTION 13. See the link identifications shown in Figure 13.1.1. and one is located under a insulating cover on each circuit board as shown in figure 13. Link for 115Vac Remove for 230V ac Remove for 115Vac Link for 230V ac Output 3 Shunt boards on channel inputs Link for 115Vac Remove for 230V ac Output 2 Output 1 Fuse type = 20mm slow-blow Fuse value (115V) = 100mA Fuse value (230V) = 63mA Figure 13. Supply Voltage 110/120 220/240 Fuse value 100 mA 63 mA Fuse part Number CH050012 CH050630 Table 13. each unit consists of a circuit board and associated channel input shunt assemblies located on the inside back wall of the case (see figure 1.1.

2 SIGNAL WIRING The transmitter outputs are connected at a terminal block as shown below. 2 Fuse Fuse Transmitter power supply No. Input board I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- II V+ V- Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan Chan 6 5 4 3 2 1 Figure 13. 1 'Micro board' Channel 1 connection to transmitter power supply.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 13. Transmitter power supply No.2a Internal Transmitter power supply wiring Transmitter + Pins for input board connector + Transmitter power supply (Internal) + Figure 13.2b Transmitter wiring (internal power supply) Transmitter + + Pins for input board connector - - + Transmitter power supply (External) Figure 13. Other channels use similar connections.2c Transmitter wiring (external power supply) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 117 . Connection between the shunt board and the power supply are made at manufacture.

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 118 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

Acid dye PHYSICAL DATA Boiling point Vapour pressure Odour >212 C <20 mm Hg Specific gravity Solubility in water Colours 1. there are no known deletarious effects arising from the inks or pen tips. If swallowed. If necessary. Obtain immediate medical attention If inhaled.1 Complete Various None FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA Flash point (deg C) (Method used) Extinguishing media Special fire-fighting procedures Unusual fire and explosion hazards Not flammable Use medium appropriate to primary cause of fire. If irritation develops.05 to 1.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14 REFERENCE Product: WATER BASED INKS NOT CONTAINING FORMAMIDE LA249556 LA250280 14. consult a physician.1. move to fresh air. Remove stains with soap solution. use organic vapour respirator Normal ventilation is adequate Use gloves when handling printheads to avoid stains on skin/clothing When printheads are being used for recording purposes. FLAMMABLE LIMIT LEL Not available UEL Not available None None HEALTH HAZARD DATA Threshold limit value Not established LD 50 Oral > 5g/kg LD 50 Dermal Not established Skin and eye irritation None in normal use Over-exposure effects Slight irritation of mucus membrane FIRST AID PROCEDURES Eyes and skin Ingestion Inhalation Flush affected areas with water. aid breathing and obtain medical attention REACTIVITY DATA STABILITY Stable Yes Unstable None Conditions to avoid Strong oxidising agents and temperatures above 90 C Hazardous decomposition products Hazardous polymerisation Will not occur SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES Wipe up spills with towels and cloths. This is reflected in the fact that the lists of part numbers may include more than those items relevant to this product. Other HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 119 . Induce vomiting.1 Printheads Part numbers: LA248163 HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS Name % Range 1 to 4 TLV Not available Toxicological data Not established Note: The COSHH data included here is derived directly from data sheets produced by the manufacturer to cover all its products.1 COSHH 14. Dispose of waste in accordance with local environment control regulations SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION Respiratory Ventilation Protective clothing If vapours are generated. dilute with water.

If batteries are abused. Toxic fumes might be generated. seek medical assistance. Over-exposure effects Not applicable Chemical nature See above. Batteries should not be discarded with normal refuse. wash with plenty of water. Not applicable REACTIVITY DATA STABILITY Stable Yes CONDITIONS TO AVOID Mechanical damage.2 Batteries Product: Part numbers: PA250331 Rechargeable batteries HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS Name Mischmetal alloy Nickel Hydroxide Potassium hydroxide % Range 10 10 8 TLV Not available Not available Not available Toxicological data Highly toxic if ingested Highly toxic. Contact should be avoided DISPOSAL Batteries must be disposed of in accordance with current local regulations. or washed away with copious amounts of water. Avoid contact. this may lead to the leaking of a caustic alkaline solution which will corrode aluminium and copper. Give plenty of milk to drink. SPECIAL PROTECTION INFORMATION Respiratory Ventilation Protective clothing Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Other Page 120 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . HEALTH HAZARD DATA Threshold limit value LD 50 Oral Skin and eye irritation Not applicable Not applicable LD 50 Dermal Not applicable Should cells leak. The leak material should be neutralised using a weak acidic solution such as vinegar. the leak material will be a caustic solution. wash the affected area withplenty of water and cover with dry gauze. Obtain immediate medical assistance.1. FIRST AID PROCEDURES Eyes and skin Ingestion Inhalation If leakage occurs. If battery ingested. Overcharging Short circuiting terminals Charging temperatures outside the range 0 to 65 C Unstable None Will not occur Hazardous decomposition products Hazardous polymerisation SPILL OR LEAK PROCEDURES In normal use there is no risk of leakage. Seek medical assistance.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14. If eyes are affected. stating 'NiMHy battery'. DO NOT induce vomiting. Highly corrosive. PHYSICAL DATA Boiling point Vapour pressure Odour Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Specific gravity Solubility in water Colours Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable FIRE AND EXPLOSION DATA Flash point (deg C) (Method used) Extinguishing media Special fire-fighting procedures Unusual fire and explosion hazards Not applicable Use medium appropriate to primary cause of fire FLAMMABLE LIMIT LEL UEL Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Batteries might explode due to excessive presure buildup which might not be self-venting. If ingestion of leak material occurs. There are no risks in normal use.

2.4 Printer must be off line Certain functions require that the chart be off line before they can take place.2 ERROR MESSAGES 14. For example if you have set input type to T/C.2.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14.2.3 Input adjust not available (I/P Adj n/a on ch NN) Appears if an attempt is made to adjust an input channel which is not an analogue input.13) if the channel is in error or if there is a hardware or internal communications fault. and the chart drive switched off. and the attempted 'Enter'will be ignored. but is normally the result of the operation of the 'Enter' key before configuration is complete. the message will appear. Op:Chart must be accessed.2 Failure to adjust channel (Adj fail on ch NN) Appears during the input adjust procedure (section 4. 14. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 121 . 14.1 Invalid configuration This message can appear under a number of circumstances. but operate the Enter key before you set a suitable Linearization type. 14.2.

............ Issue 7 Page 86 ....................... Issue 7 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Page 46 ..... Issue 7 Page 8 ............................................... Issue 7 Page 121 ......................................................................... Issue 7 Page 44 ........................................................... Issue 7 Page 60 .. Issue 7 Page 59 ... Issue 7 Page 56 ... Issue 7 Page 45 ...................3 LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES This (issue 6) manual consists of the following pages at their stated issue number and date Page 1 ..................... Issue 7 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Page 91 .......... Issue 7 Page 90 ...... Issue 7 Page 75 .. Issue 7 Page 106 ............ Issue 7 Page 126 .............. Issue 7 Page 100 ...... Issue 7 Page 39 ................................. Issue 7 Page 134 ......................... Issue 7 Page 25 ................................ Issue 7 Page 124 .............. Issue 7 Page 53 ...... Issue 7 Page 110 ..... Issue 7 Page 128 ........................... Issue 7 Page 50 ................. Issue 7 Page 103 ............ Issue 7 Page 51 ...... Issue 7 Page 69 . Issue 7 Page 68 ........ Issue 7 Page 9 .................. Issue 7 Page 102 ..................... Issue 7 Page 78 ...................................... Issue 7 Page 57 ...................... Issue 7 Page 92 .............. Issue 7 Page 105 ........... Issue 7 Page 120 . Issue 7 Page 11 ... Issue 7 Page 131 ...... Issue 7 Page 23 ................ Issue 7 Page 31 ... Issue 7 Page 71 .............. Issue 7 Page 81 ......................................... Issue 7 Page 38 .. Issue 7 Page 2 ..................... Issue 7 Page 89 ................................. Issue 7 Page 49 ................................................................................................................................... Issue 7 Page 20 ............... Issue 7 Page 27 ............................ Issue 7 Page 3 ......................... Issue 7 Page 94 ....................... Issue 7 Page 79 ............ Issue 7 Page 42 ...................................................................... Issue 7 Page 14 .................................... Issue 7 Page 5 ......... Issue 7 Page 114 .. Issue 7 Page 72 .................................. Issue 7 Page 35 ... Issue 7 Page 107 .......... Issue 7 Page 36 ......... Issue 7 Page 6 ..... Issue 7 Page 54 ................................... Issue 7 Page 125 ................. Issue 7 Page 117 ................ Issue 7 Page 87 .............. Issue 7 Page 41 ................. Issue 7 Page 101 ..................................... Issue 7 Page 83 .... Issue 7 Page 17 ..........MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14.................. Issue 7 Page 58 .. Issue 7 Page 64 ........... Issue 7 Page 29 .. Issue 7 Page 7 ................................................. Issue 7 Page 43 ............... Issue 7 Page 129 ........... Issue 7 Page 21 ..... Issue 7 Page 122 ... Issue 7 Page 32 ............... Issue 7 Page 55 ...... Issue 7 Page 48 ......................... Issue 7 Page 19 ............................................. Issue 7 Page 22 .. Issue 7 Page 66 ...... Issue 7 Page 108 ............................ Issue 7 Page 77 ................... Issue 7 Page 93 ...... Issue 7 Page 111 ..... Issue 7 Page 104 .. Issue 7 Page 12 .......... Issue 7 Page 28 ........................ Issue 7 Page 47 ...................................................... Issue 7 Page 63 ........................... Issue 7 Page 24 ........... Issue 7 Page 88 .............................. Issue 7 Page 97 ...................... Issue 7 Page 115 .. Issue 7 Page 133 ............................ Issue 7 Page 96 .............. Issue 7 Page 65 ....................... Issue 7 Page 70 ..................................................... Issue 7 Page 112 ............................................... Issue 7 Page 76 ............................................................................... Issue 7 Page 67 .................................. Issue 7 Page 119 ............... Issue 7 Page 13 ...... Issue 7 Page 82 ............................... Issue 7 Page 10 ................ Issue 7 Page 26 ........................ Issue 7 Page 18 ......... Issue 7 Page 37 .............................................................................. Issue 7 Page 80 ............................ Issue 7 Page 4 ............... Issue 7 Page 84 ..................... Issue 7 Page 123 .............. Issue 7 Page 52 ............................. Issue 7 Page 132 .................................... Issue 7 Page 73 .............................................................. Issue 7 Page 113 ... Issue 7 Page 62 ...... Issue 7 Page 34 ........................ Issue 7 Page 109 ....... Issue 7 Page 116 ......... Issue 7 Page 98 ............ Issue 7 Page 118 .................... Issue 7 Page 33 ...................... Issue 7 Page 127 .............................................. Issue 7 Page 95 ........ Issue 7 Page 85 ........... Issue 7 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Nov 06 Page 122 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . Issue 7 Page 40 .......... Issue 7 Page 99 ..... Issue 7 Page 30 ................................................................. Issue 7 Page 130 ...................................... Issue 7 Page 16 .... Issue 7 Page 15 ..... Issue 7 Page 61 ................. Issue 7 Page 74 .....

the cold junction can be held at a known temperature. Includes chart hold-down tabs and a means for gripping the center of the chart to turn in at a specified rate. Internal.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14. Recorders fitted with memory card or communications options can save their configuration to the memory card or to the host computer. Also called retransmission output. Analogue input Analogue output Attenuator Break response Chart drive Cold Junction Compensation Communications Configuration Counters Data acquisition HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 123 . Counters can be preset. A mechanical paper rotation. As a part of the channel configuration. and also allows configurations to be copied from one recorder to another. the instrument’s response to an open circuit can be defined as ‘None’. This temperature is entered (in degrees) as a part of the CJC configuration. Also known by the abbreviation CJC. An input which changes in a smooth (non-stepped) way (e. changing chart speed etc. an auxiliary temperature detector can be used to measure the cold junction temperature. and as a noun to mean ‘the way in which the recorder has been set up (or configured)’. Remote. Alarm A function which is triggered when an input signal or a signal derived from it reaches a certain value (absolute or deviation alarms) or changes faster than a specified rate (rate-ofchange alarms) or changes state (digital alarms). for any reading from a TC to be accurate. A resistive device which reduces the signal voltage by a known ratio (usually 100:1) The recorder can detect an open circuit at its input terminals. ‘Drive high’ or ‘Drive low’. If ‘none’ is selected the trace is allowed to drift according to what the input wiring is picking up (acting as an aerial). For remote TCs. thermocouples. In particular. External.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS The following glossary is general to all the manufacturer’s products and may thus contain terms which are not applicable to your particular unit. Counters can be incremented or decremented by digital/discrete inputs or by job list action. resistance thermometers). Each counter can have a set point which triggers a job list when the counter value passes through the set point either incrementing (High) or decrementing (Low). or to read information from them regarding the process variables being measured. Thus. many of the terms are relevant only to configurable recorders. This input channel number is entered as a part of the CJC configuration. This can be done in three ways: Internal.g. An output from the recorder which is a scaled and linearized copy of an analogue input or derived channel. This is used as a verb to mean ‘the process of telling your recorder what you want it to do’. and the other (non-bonded) end of the conductors (the cold junction (CJ)). Drive high (low) causes the trace to be drawn at the extreme right (left) side of the chart. sounding a buzzer. The recorder has integral temperature detectors measuring the temperature near the terminal blocks (the cold junction for directly connected TCs). This ensures against loss. the alarm can initiate a job list. For remote TCs. The current generated by a thermocouple (TC) junction depends on the temperature difference between the actual bonded junction (the hot junction). The term Data Acquisition Unit describes those units which are able to read input signals and act upon them (alarms retransmission maths functions etc) without necessarily having the facility of displaying or recording them. Most recorders now offer a ‘Serial Communications’ option to allow a computer (PC) to communicate directly with one or more recorders in order to configure them. such as causing a relay output to change state. the temperature of the CJ must be taken into account. External or Remote. A general term describing the successful reading of an input signal. Once triggered. This detector is then connected to a separate input channel..

Most transducers produce an output which is not directly proportional to the input. the voltage output from a thermocouple does not vary linearly with the temperature it is exposed to. using a derived channel. an event input can initiate a job list. a number of mathematical functions become available to the user. then an annoying and potentially damaging series of alarms can be generated. With the maths pack option(s) fitted. or could be used to trigger a job list if the difference between the two input signal became too great or too small. Channel average). when the job list becomes active. Start Alarm without hysteresis 100 Input signal value 90 End Alarm with hysteresis Al arm off only when value falls below 90.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS (Cont. which effectively puts a dead band round the set point. Alternatively. The result of one or more input channel or derived channel being acted upon by a mathematical function (e. A complete list of functions is given below. in which case a simple Subtract function would be used. Examples are switch inputs or voltage pulse inputs. In most modern instruments. The resulting Derived Variable can be traced. change chart speed etc. A voltage.) Derived channel Derived Variable (DV) Digital (discrete) input Event input Hysteresis A ‘pseudo’ channel which contains the results of maths pack operations so they can be traced on the chart. instead of just one alarm which can be acknowledged and the cause dealt with if necessary. and so on. but not all are available on all instruments. An input which has only two states (on or off). would be triggered when the input signal value rose above 100. logged. An attempt to depict this example is given in the figure below. current or digital input signals from the user. Input channel Input signal Job list Linearization table Log Mathematical function An input circuit which accepts voltage. Page 124 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . A set of actions to be carried out by the recorder. The recorder uses a ‘look-up’ table to find a temperature value for any mV input from a specified thermocouple type. Typical ‘jobs’ are to activate a relay.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14. When an input signal is ‘hovering’ near a setpoint. A discrete (switch) or digital (voltage level) input. Similar tables exist for other transducers such as resistance thermometers. current or digital input applied to the recorder input circuits. See also Analogue input and Digital (discrete) input. used in other calculations etc. but would not re-trigger again until after the alarm had been ‘cleared’ by the process value falling below 90. you may want to look at the difference between two input signals. a ‘hysteresis’ value can be entered in the alarm configuration. For example. display a message. When active. Logging allows process variable values to be printed numerically in tabular form on the chart. To avoid this. For example. the user can enter one or more tables of his/her own. For example an absolute high alarm with a set point of 100 and a hysteresis value of 10.g. logs can be sent to the memory card (if fitted).

) Constant Copy Add Subtract Multiply Divide Modulus Square root Channel average Group average Rolling average Exponent Natural log 10x Log base 10 Rate of change Sample and hold Channel minimum Latching minimum Continuous minimum Channel maximum Latching maximum Continuous maximum Polynomial Relative humidity Linear mass flow Square root mass flow Zirconia probe Switch High select Low select Trace generator Stopwatch Time stamp F value Measured value Memory card Multipoint recorder Operator interface Paper transport system Pen Printhead Process variable Relay output Resistance thermometer Retransmission output Setpoint Shunt An umbrella term which means: the value of an input channel. totaliser.4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS (Cont. a low value resistor must be placed across the inputs. Also known as ‘threshold’. and are usually of very close tolerance. timer etc. but for any given type. to convert the current signal to Volts. counter. this non-linearity is well known and invariable and is compensated for by linearisation tables in the recorder memory. if required. Relays are energised continuously except when ‘in alarm’. together with a disposable multi-colour cartridge. derived channel. Thus. a 0 to 20 mA (0.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14. See also Process variable. a resistance thermometer is constructed of a material whose resistance varies in a known way on the temperature it is exposed to. See also Measured value. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 125 . counter. See also hysteresis. data etc. so that if power to the recorder fails they go into their ‘alarm’ state. Disadvantages are that fast transients may be missed at low chart speeds. Each trace is made up of dots. measured in engineering units (e. this is the point at which an alarm becomes active or inactive. timer etc. This is used to describe recorders which have multiple pen printheads rather than individual pens to produce the trace on the chart. used to record configurations. Used to describe SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) solid state memory cards. motors etc. The input circuit of each recorder channel measures voltage signals. A set of contacts which changes state as a result of a job list being run. Degrees Celsius). produced by the printhead as it traverses across the chart at regular intervals. the traces can be annotated for identification and messages can be printed on the chart. which can then be taken to a remote PC for further analysis. needed to move the chart through the cassette. The paper transport system is often considered to be an integral part of the writing system. Advantages are that many more traces can be laid down on the chart. See Analogue output. or portable hard or floppy disks. An umbrella term which means: the value of an input channel. A term used to describe the controls (e. This includes the chart cassette and the mechanical system. If current signals are connected to the recorder. totaliser. pushbuttons. The resistance variation is non-linear. allows multi-point recorders to mark the chart.g. Also known as a resistance temperature detector (RTD).g.02 x 250) Volts = 5 Volts. Used to draw (trace) the value of a single process variable on the chart in continuous trace recorders. Such resistors are called ‘Shunt resistors’ or ‘Shunts’ for short.) Maths functions (Cont. keypads) and visual feedback (display) that are used to operate and configure the unit. This is a device which. A fiber-tipped disposable stylus with an integral ink reservoir. measured in mathematical units as a proportion of the span.02 Amps) signal applied across a 250 Ω resistor produces a voltage range of 0 to (0. according to Ohms law (Volts = Amps x Ohms). derived channel.

A mathematical function which allows flow rates (e. Trace Thermocouple Threshold Timer Totalizer Transducer Transmitter Writing system Zero Page 126 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 . as long as it is less than the Span value. this non-linearity is well known and invariable and is compensated for by linearisation tables in the recorder memory. or they may need power generated for them. See setpoint. Thermocouple wire (compensation wire) is expensive. A general term used to describe the mechanical means of moving pens/printheads across the chart width. resistance thermometers (RTDs) and flow meters. flow rate. Common transducers are potentiometers.g. A device which produces an electrical output proportional to temperature. cubic feet).4 GLOSSARY OF TERMS (Cont.g. Timers carry out general timing functions.) Span Span has two common meanings: the highest (or outer) grid of the chart. This device converts the mV signal from the thermocouple to a mA signal which can then be wired to the recorder using normal copper wire. The voltage varies in a non-linear way with temperature. Transmitters can be self powered. pressure.minimum value). or the value given by (maximum value . A junction of two dissimilar metals which produces a small voltage. and if the thermocouple is a long way from the measuring device. it is often cheaper to instal a ‘transmitter’ local to the thermocouple. The line produced on the chart or display screen showing the value of the process variable being measured. Zero is generally taken to mean the value associated with the lowest (or center) grid line on the chart. speed. The two meanings are identical where the minimum value is zero. The term often includes the paper transport system used to drive the chart. and can initiate job lists. cubic feet per second) to be converted to actual quantities (e. the value of which depends on the temperature of the junction. thermocouples. Its actual value need not be zero. Most recorders can be fitted with Transmitter Power Supplies as an option. but for any given type.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE 14. position etc.

The equipment is supplied from the fixed installation (IEC664) POLLUTION DEGREE 2 Normally.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE ANNEX A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree 2. only non-conductive pollution occurs. HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 127 . These are defined as follows: INSTALLATION CATEGORY II The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V or lower ac line voltage is 2500V. however. I. Occasionally.E. a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected.

see fig 1. corner drop test & BS EN60873 edge drop test BS EN60873 (10 to 60 Hz @ . dc None 40ms at 75% max. 4-Channel analog output (retransmision) board Options (See options manual) Host Communications Memory Card Transmitter Power Supply Controllers (see also separate controller manual) Also Case Heater (not described) Environmental Performance Temperature limits Humidity limits Protection Shock Vibration Altitude (max) 0 to 50˚C operating (-20 to 50˚C with case heater) With control.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE A1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder) Board types (I/O) Universal input board.2.black has extra 50% 2 Hz (1 Hz when supplied with derived channels. instrument load 120msec at 75% max. Pollution degree 2 Paper transport Type Chart speeds Chart type Transport accuracy Stepper motor 1 to 960 hours per rev.07 mm displacement. Installation category II.1) Printing system Pen type Print resolution Default trace colours (can be changed during configuration) Four-nib cartridge 0.2 mm Channel 1 2 3 Colour blue red green Channel 4 5 6 Colour black blue/red green/black Printhead life Update rate Trace rate (maximum) Characters per line 1.5 wide (both – 0 + 2 mm) 150 mm average 7 Kg (15 lbs) Vertical + 5/– 30 degrees (where + means top or recorder towards operator . 60 to 150 Hz @ 1g) < 2000 metres Physical Bezel size Panel cutout dimensions Depth behind bezel rear face Weight Panel mounting 360 High by 380mm wide (Bezel centreline offset 5 mm right with respect to cutout centreline .0 x 106 dots per color . archiving or retransmission) 1 pass every 5 seconds 39 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emissions: Immunity: Electrical safety BS EN50081-2 BS EN50082-2 BS EN61010. instrument load Page 128 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .1) 340. 24 hour.IP54 (optional IP65) BS EN61010. not timed 0. 45 to 65 Hz 20 to 53V ac (45 to 400 Hz) or dc (dc inrush-15A for 10ms @ 20V dc) 100VA.see figure 1. 0 to ≈40˚C (depends on exact hardware configuration) 10 to 90% non-condensing door and bezel .2. 7-day. ac.25% single turn time accuracy Power requirements Line voltage Power (Max) Fuse type Interrupt protection Standard: Enhanced: Standard: Low voltage option: 90 to 264V. timers. 60W.5 High by 345. 6-Changeover relay output board. 12 hour.

085% input + 0.52 ppm range 80 ppm input + 7. dc milliamps (with external shunt).035% input + 0.ground). 250 Volts continuous 45 mV peak at lowest range.to .084% input + 0.024% range 0. 68KΩ on 10V (always use mA input type for current inputs with shunts as it corrects for the 68K) 42 V rms (terminal I to terminal V-). 150mV. Ohms. ±2˚C Resistor or voltage divider for terminal board mounting 0.5 V Max Typical 1 V 37 V Max Typical 10 V 370 V Max 38 mV 1.channel and channel .035% input + 0. Contact closure (not channel 1) (Minimum contact closure = 500msec) Freely configurable Common mode: >130dB (channel . >10 MΩ at 500 V dc >10MΩ (38mV. 50 V rms (terminal V+ to terminals V.275% input + 0.084% input + 0. BS EN61010) Dielectric strength (BS EN61010) Insulation resistance Input resistance Overvoltage protection Sensor break detection Recognition time Minimum break resistance Terminal block Six. dc millivolts. ±1V.to .to ground =1350 Vac.030% range Temperature coefficient (per C) 37 ppm input + 1. Series mode: >60dB.8 ppm range 35 ppm input + 0. Pollution degree 2 300 V RMS or dc channel . ±10V DC Volts. 1V). ±150mV.051% range 0. Installation category II.030% range 0.027% range 0. 500 msec.03 ppm range 80 ppm input + 18.4 V (Continued) HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 129 .024% range 0.or I) ± 57 nA max. ±38mV. 12 Volts peak at highest range.16 ppm range 80 ppm input + 1.1% of input 0. thermocouple.channel (double insulation) and channel .029% range 0.ground (basic insulation) Channel .MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Input board) General Termination Maximum number of inputs Input ranges Input types Input type mix Noise rejection (48 to 62 Hz) Maximum common mode voltage Maximum series mode voltage Isolation (dc to 65 Hz.038% range 0.2% of input Range Resolution Error at 20 C 0.to .channel = 2300 Vac (both 1 minute type tests).6 ppm range 76 ppm input + 0.35 ppm range 272 ppm input + 3.5 ppm range Typical Max Typical 150 mV 5. 2 / 3-wire resistance temperature detector (RTD).6 ppm range 35 ppm input + 0.035% input + 0. Channel . 10 MΩ DC Input ranges Shunt/Attenuator Additional error due to shunt Additional error due to attenuator Performance @ 20 ˚C.to .076% input + 0.

270 to + 400 .030% input + 0.04 C DIN43700:1985 0.03 C Hoskins 0.04 ppm range 35 ppm input + 36. JIS C1604:1989 DIN43760:1987 DIN43760:1987 IEC 751 Eurotherm Recorders SA IEC 751 Max linearisation error 0.036% range 0. 0 to 600 Ω.1 0.1 0.1 0.02 C 0.200 to + 600 0 to + 1406 0 to + 1370 0 to 400 C: 1.19 ppm range 35 ppm input + 1.030% input + 0.03 C Hoskins 0.9 ppm range 0 to 600 22m 0 to 6k RTD types.045% input + 0.01 C 0.026% range 0.1 - .034% input + 0.04 C IEC 584.04 C IEC 584.141% range 0.02 C DIN 43710:1985 0.07 C IEC 584.01 C Thermocouple data Temperature scale Bias current Cold junction types CJ error CJ rejection ratio Remote CJ Upscale / downscale drive Types and ranges ITS90 1.069% range 0.01 C 0.047% range 0.1 0. Mismatch = 1 Ω/Ω (3-wire) Temperature scale Resolution and accuracy @ 20 ˚C. instrument at 25 ˚C 50:1 minimum Via any user-defined input channel Set on a PER RECORDER basis. ±2 ˚C ITS90 ResRange olution ( ) 0 to150 5m Typical Max Typical Max Typical Max Error at 20 C 0. external.08 C IEC 584. 0 to 6kΩ Error = negligible (3-wire).02 C IEC 584.08 C Ipsen 0.09 C 0.12 C Hoskins 0.270 to + 1300 .6 ppm range 20 ppm input + 0. All channels must be set (high or off) OR (low or off) See table T/C Type B C D E G2 J K L N R S T U Ni/NiMo Platinel Overall range ( C) 0 to + 2300 0 to + 2495 270 to + 1000 0 to + 2315 210 to + 1200 270 to + 1372 200 to + 900 Standard Max linearisation error 0 to + 1820 IEC 584.1 0.7 C 400 to 1820 C: 0.MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE A2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Input board) (Cont.049% input + 0.6 ppm range 20 ppm input + 0.04 C IEC 584.1 0.01 C 0.032% range Temperature coefficient (per C) 20 ppm input + 2.60 to + 250 -50 to + 170 -200 to + 850 -200 to + 600 -200 to + 850 Standard General Electric Co. ranges and accuracies 148m RTD Type Cu10 JPT100 Ni100 Ni120 Pt100 Pt100A Pt1000 Overall range ( C) -20 to + 400 -220 to + 630 .14 C Engelhard 0.02 C Page 130 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .20 C (To IPTS68) IEC 584.1 0.50 to + 1768 .97 ppm range 35 ppm input + 14.) Resistance/RTD inputs Ranges (including lead resistance) Influence of lead resistance 0 to 150 Ω.7nA on ±38mV range.045% input + 0. remote 1˚C max.01 C 0. 8nA on all other ranges Off.50 to + 1768 . internal.

............................................................................. 21............................ 108 Archive file names .......................... 39 Transfer Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 45 Open/closed text .......................................................................................................................... 50 Speed Printing on the chart ... 46 Test waveforms ............................................................................................................................ 53 Colour of traces ............................................ 47 Operator setup page ............................................................. 53 Shunt value ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Tag ................................................... 28 Calibration ...................MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE INDEX Symbols 10 to the power (Maths function) ............................................................................................. 19 Input range .............. 32 Configuration ........................................................................................... 48 Adaptive recording ................................................................................................................ 46 Trace colour selection ..................... 17 Channel Basic configuration ............................................ 41 Replacement ....................................... 50 Trace on/off .............................................. 49 Deviation value entry .................. 31 Error messages ..................................... 120 Printheads .................................................. 49 Indication ........................ 43 Span A/B setting .......................... 41 CJC Remote channel Nº .................... 50 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 131 ................ 47 Alarms Relay option ....................................... 50 Value format ........................ 40 Return to default ...................... 120 Counters ... 45 CJC type selection .................................................................................................................. 53 Entry to ........ 59 Alarm Average ..... 21 to 27 Group .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 88 Custom Linearisation ....................................................................................... 50 Configuration Alarms .......................................... 49 Changing Chart .............................................. 65 Archive configuration ..... 45 Clock configuration ................................................................................................... 47 Hysteresis .......................................................................................................................... 46 Scaling ................................................................................................................... 47 Off/On ............................ 60 Save/Restore ........ 18 Hold ..................... 42 User .............................................................................................................. 29 Threshold (setpoint) entry .......... 32 Input ...... 106 Techniques .............. 45 Selection for display .............................................................................. 48 to 49 Unlatched ............................................................. 44 Nº of decimal places ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Damping ................................................................................................................................... 45 Channel average (Maths function) ..................................................................... 47 Types ................ 121 Example ............................................... 49 Enable ......................................................................... 41 to 42 Clock ...................... 43 Input units ....................................................... 19 Jobs ...................................................................) Linearisation types .......................... 47 to 49 Channel . 49 Dwell ........................................... 70 Adjust Chart ............................................. 72 Change value (Rate of Change alarms) ............................................ 45 Display ............................ 32 Align with time datum .......................... 43 Line thickening .... 42 Add (Maths function) .................................. 92 Copy (maths function) ................................................................................. 71 Channel (Cont.................................................................................... 45 C Chanel minimum (maths function) ..... 71 Channel maximum (maths function) ............................................................................................ 57 Constant (maths function) ................................................ 16 Print cartridge ............... 42 Password ..................................................................................................................... 49 Latched ..... 55 Log interval ....................................... 30 Reference value entry ...................................................... 107 Average (Rate of Change alarms) ................................... 16 Span setting ................................................ 40 Type selection ................................. 43 to 51 Chart ................................................................................................................................................. 43 Input type ..................................... 40 Internal events ........................... 72 Character set ............................................................ 112 Archive to memory card ......................................................................................................................................... 52 Instrument ...................... 49 Trigger ...... 70 COSHH data Batteries . 63 Analog output option ............... 70 Controller option ............................................................................................................................................................................. 22 to 27 Break Response .................... 49 Summary page ........... 49 Change value .................................................................................................................... 35 Chart Adjust ............................... 49 B Break Response ................................................ 95 A Absolute alarms ........................................................

.............................................................................................................................. 52 Display .......... 60 G Group Configuration ............................... 121 J Jobs .................. 45 Default Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 69 Memory card option .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 16 Instrument tag .......................... 16 Change the print cartridge ................................... 49 N Natural log (Maths function) ....................................... 43 Input board Specification .......................................................................................................................................................................... 53 Inclusion in messages ........ 53 Interpretation . 21 Numeric values ....................... 71 Embedded sequences .............................. 42 Setting ............... 48 Deviation value entry ............ 129 to 130 Installation Chart .......................................................... 53 Log ................................................................................................................. 121 Events ................ 78 How to Change the chart ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 55 M Mass Flow (maths function) Linear .... 43 Units selection ........................................................................... 73 Factory settings (return to) ............................................................................................................................................. 72 Dwell (alarms) ............................. 54 Printing ............... 29 Interval .............................................. 107 Date Format ......................................................................... 40 Internal Events .. 99 Modulus (Maths function) .............................................................................. 76 Maths pack Menu overview ........................... 108 L Language selection ..... 44 Log Contents ........................................................... 50 Linearisation tables ................................................................................... 45 Dump scales ..................................................MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE D Damping ........................... 103 Message Configuration .............................................. 52 Group average (Maths function) ................ 72 DV Group cont min (maths function) ........................................ 83 Option .......................... 54 Entering Configuration menus ....................................................................................... 40 Line thickening ........................................................ 70 Drive hi/lo ................................... 29 DV Group cont max (maths function) ... 55 Invalid configuration message ................................................... 49 Display Group ............................. 45 Data logging ......................................................................................................................................................... 71 H High select (maths function) .......................................................... 74 Square root ................ 37 Maths pack ..................... 52 Initiation .............................................. 60 Derived variables ................................................................ 17 Hysteresis ............................................................................................................ 71 Page 132 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 ...................................................................................................... 42 Modbus protocol .......................................................................................................... 70 F F Value (maths function) .... 49 I Input Adjust ......................................... 30 Decimal place position ............................................................................. 72 DV Group latch max (maths function) ................. 78 E e to the power (maths function) ................................................................................... 72 DV Group latch min (maths function) .. 22 Text ................................................................... 43 Type selection .................................... 70 Multiply (Maths function) ... 69 Memory card ............................ 52 Group .............. 42 Log base 10 (Maths function) ... 35 Error messages ...... 59 Range entry ........................................................................................... 18 Divide (Maths function) ............................................................................................ 54 Printing on the chart ......................................................... 69 Deviation alarms ... 53 View ......................................................................... 71 Low select (maths function) ..................................................................................................................................

.......................... 80 Power-up message ....................................... 116 Q Quick scale print ............. 54 Printing on the chart ... 72 Rate-of-change alarms ................................................... 58 Menus Alarm setup page .................................................................................... 65 Controllers ................................. 78 Symbols (Recorder labelling) .............. 129 to 130 Recorder ................... 30 Top level ....................................................................... 29 Process value Display ............................... 102 Z Zirconia probe maths function ................................................. 46 Instrument ...................... 40 Percentile maths function ................................................... 53 View ............................................................ 71 U User chart speed ..... 46 Text entry .......................................................... 18 Print cartridge replacement ......................... 57 Transmitter power supply .............................................................................................................................................................................. 50 Transfer configuration ........................................................................................ 40 Replacing Chart .......................................... 77 Oxygen correction (maths function) ................. 10 Sample and hold (maths function) ....................................... 31 P Password Default ......................................... 90 Totalisers ............................................................................................................................................................................. 72 Scale Printing on the chart ..... 79 Timers .................................... 18 Inclusion in messages ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 31 Entry of new ........................................................... 96 Transmitter power supply ............................... 49 Recorder Installation Mechanical .......................... 50 On/off ........................................................................................................................................ 17 Printhead Park ................................................................. 116 Square root (Maths function) ...................................................... 29 R Rate of change (maths function) .................................................................................................. 65 Rolling average (Maths function) ..................................................................... 78 Subtract (Maths function) ................. 46 Operation Detailed ............................................... 16 Retransmission option ............................................... 70 Switch (maths function) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 128 to 130 Reference value entry ........ 45 Serial comunications option .. 27 Clock .......................................................... 17 Printing Logs ........................................... 85 Trace Colour . 42 Setting ............................................................................................................... 81 T Tag Channel ........................................ 30 Time stamp (maths function) ..... 94 Input board ................... 54 PV formats (maths functions) ................................................................. 29 System error ....................................................................... 30 Configuration ........ 96 Shunt value entry ............. 10 System error ............. 29 Scales ................................... 27 Oxygen concentration ......................128 to 130 Relay ........................................................ 43 Span setting ................... 35 Third order polynomial (maths function) .................................................................................. 41 V Value format ............. 27 to 32 Operator Access to configuration .. 9 Stopwatch (maths function) .................................................................................................................................................. 73 Relay option ....MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE O Open/closed text ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 22.................................. 96 to 97 Test waveform selection .................... 10 Specification .... 29 Log .............. 77 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 Page 133 ........................................................................................... 72 Time Inclusion in messages ..................................... 78 S Safety notes ................................................... 50 Specification Analogue outputs ............ 42 Scaling ............................................................................ 30 Chart ................................ 63 Serial Communications board ................................................. 40 Termination and biasing .................... 79 Oxygen potential .................................................................................................................................................................. 11 Labelling symbols ............................................... 49 Relative humidity (maths function) .......... 63 Remote CJ channel ............................................................................. 45 X XMODEM transfer ...... 31 Dump scales ........ 71 Static precautions ....................................................................................................................................................................................

MULTIPOINT CIRCULAR-CHART RECORDER: USER GUIDE This page is deliberately left blank Page 134 HA250385 Issue 7 Nov 06 .

hk@eurotherm.com BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm Ltda.com Website: http://www.eurotherm.be@eurotherm.com SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm España SA Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001 Fax (+34 91) 661 9093 E-mail info.com SWITZERLAND Wollerau DENMARK Copenhagen Eurotherm Danmark AS Telephone (+45 70) 234670 Fax (+45 70) 234660 E-mail info.com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing FINLAND Abo Eurotherm Finland Telephone (+358) 22506030 Fax (+358) 22503201 E-mail info.br@eurotherm.in@eurotherm.A/N.uk U.com INDIA Chennai Eurotherm India Limited Telephone (+9144) 2496 1129 Fax (+9144) 2496 1831 E-mail info.no@eurotherm.com Web www.com Eurotherm Limited Telephone (+44 1903) 268500 Fax (+44 1903) 265982 E-mail info.o Telephone (+48 32) 218 5100 Fax (+48 32) 217 7171 E-mail info. Durrington.ch@eurotherm.com KOREA Seoul Eurotherm Korea Limited Telephone (+82 31) 2738507 Fax (+82 31) 2738508 E-mail info.it@eurotherm. Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Fax (+5519) 3707 5345 E-mail info.com AUSTRIA Vienna Eurotherm GmbH Telephone (+43 1) 7987601 Fax (+43 1) 7987605 E-mail info. BN13 3PL Telephone: +44 (0)1903 268500 Facsimile: +44 (0)1903 265982 e-mail: info.cn@eurotherm.A Leesburg VA FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA Telephone (+33 478) 664500 Fax (+33 478) 352490 E-mail info.com ITALY Como Eurotherm S.V.com BELGIUM & LUXEMBURG Moha Eurotherm S.fi@eurotherm.co.cn@eurotherm.com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB Telephone (+46 40) 384500 Fax (+46 40) 384545 E-mail info.com Guangzhou Office Telephone (+86 20) 8755 5099 Fax (+86 20) 8755 5831 E-mail info.com Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040 Fax (+41 44) 787 1044 E-mail info.V.com Eurotherm Inc.uk Specification subject to change without notice.dk@eurotherm.com Beijing Office Telephone (+86 10) 6567 8506 Fax (+86 10) 6567 8509 E-mail info.com NORWAY Oslo Eurotherm A/S Telephone (+47 67) 592170 Fax (+47 67) 118301 E-mail info. West Sussex.com NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn Eurotherm B.fr@eurotherm.Inter-Company sales and service locations AUSTRALIA Sydney Eurotherm Pty.se@eurotherm.cn@eurotherm.at@eurotherm.es@eurotherm.com Web www.S.uk@eurotherm. Telephone (+31 172) 411752 Fax (+31 172) 417260 E-mail info.com Shanghai Office Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188 Fax (+86 21) 6145 1187 E-mail info.us@eurotherm. ©Eurotherm Limited. Telephone (+1 703) 443 0000 Fax (+1 703) 669 1300 E-mail info.com E U ROT H E R M EUROTHERM LIMITED Faraday Close.com HONG KONG & CHINA Eurotherm Limited North Point Telephone (+85 2) 28733826 Fax (+85 2) 28700148 E-mail info.eurotherm.com ED52 GERMANY Limburg Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Telephone (+49 6431) 2980 Fax (+49 6431) 298119 E-mail info. Telephone (+61 2) 9838 0099 Fax (+61 2) 9838 9288 E-mail info.com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited Telephone (+353 1) 4691800 Fax (+353 1) 4691300 E-mail info.de@eurotherm.uk@eurotherm.co.kr@eurotherm.l Telephone (+39 31) 975111 Fax (+39 31) 977512 E-mail info.eurotherm.com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.pl@eurotherm. HA250385/7 (CN22887) .nl@eurotherm. Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 E-mail info.au@eurotherm. Ltd. Worthing.ie@eurotherm.r.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->